# 星队长（XingDuizhang）完整资料

> 星队长是面向 TikTok 带货团队的 TK 管理系统，支持多账号管理、订单与 GMV 自动同步、团队协作、佣金结算与利润核算。免费版 ¥0 起步。

这份文件把星队长官网每一页的首段回答和常见问题拼在一起，方便 AI 搜索和大模型一次读完、准确引用。官网地址 https://xingduizhang.com ；精简版见 /llms.txt 。

一、中文页面


## 星队长（XingDuizhang）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长是面向 TikTok 带货团队的账号与经营管理系统。集中管理账号、作品、订单与团队业绩，让日常协作和经营复盘更清楚。

问: 星队长是什么？
答: 星队长是面向 TikTok 带货团队的 TK 管理系统，把 TK 账号管理、订单与业绩、团队管理、经营核算和供应链佣金结算放进一套系统。老板看清整体和利润，员工专心剪辑、发布和出单。

问: TK 管理系统一般包含哪些功能？
答: 常见的是账号管理、订单同步和业绩统计；星队长在这之外还做了团队管理（实时办公室、派品审片、发布登记、考勤工资、每天自动推送的文字日报）、经营核算（账号投入、设备、网络、工资成本和利润）和商务中心（供应链线下佣金逐单计算、结算单、首款尾款）。

问: 星队长能管理多少个 TikTok 账号？
答: 所有版本管理 TikTok 账号数均不设上限，按团队成员数与功能模块分 4 档：免费版（最多 3 人）管号看订单；基础版（最多 10 人）管商家结算、样品与回本；专业版（最多 30 人，含 2 个选品席位）算总账、工资绩效与看实时办公室基础；企业版（最多 100 人，含 5 个选品席位）含派品审片、正式考勤、日报与多部门管理。

问: 接入 TikTok 账号需要给密码吗？
答: 不需要。账号走 TikTok 官方授权，安全合规。号库里录入的账号密码加密保存，只给申请人、商务和机构负责人看，每次查看都留记录。

问: 支持哪些国家站点？订单按哪天算？
答: 目前已开通美国、墨西哥、巴西、英国及东南亚 6 国（印尼、马来西亚、泰国、越南、菲律宾、新加坡）共 10 个国家站点（全球 16 个市场其余 6 个陆续开放），在顶栏切换国家并按当地币种显示。美区订单和利润按 GMT-8 固定切日统计，北京时间每天 16:00 换天，和 TikTok App 数据页一致；每天北京时间 16:30 收齐后出前一天的日报。

问: 星队长收费吗？
答: 免费版 ¥0（最多 3 人，不用绑卡，管理 TikTok 账号不限）；基础版 ¥199/月（年付 ¥1,990/年，最多 10 人）；专业版 ¥699/月（年付 ¥6,990/年，最多 30 人，含 2 个选品席位）；企业版首发价 ¥1,999/月（原价 ¥2,999/月，年付 ¥19,990/年，最多 100 人，含 5 个选品席位）。智能选品也可按 ¥249/月/席单独购买，并支持免费试用 3 天（连续 72 小时，每个机构限 1 次，由机构负责人手动开启）。

## TK 账号管理
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/features/tiktok-account-management?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

几百个 TikTok 账号，用星队长这套 TK 账号管理系统扫码授权后就能批量管理：每个号的粉丝、播放、作品、挂车掉车自动汇总，7 天没动静的号会标出来；橱窗被封自动发现，号从哪来、花了多少钱也一并记着，所有号按部门、小组、负责人分好。

问: 授权要账号密码吗？
答: 不需要交出账号密码。TK账号管理系统走 TikTok 官方扫码或授权流程，授权后自动同步资料与订单；号库密码仅用于团队内部领号且全程加密留痕。

问: 播放数据多久更新一次？
答: 每天北京时间 9 点自动刷新一次全部正常账号。需要看实时变化时，可按版本额度手动单刷或只批量刷新在发、在涨、在出单的活跃号。

问: 橱窗被封了还能看订单吗？
答: 还能继续看并自动收尾对账。系统标为橱窗封禁后 48 小时内照常同步订单，之后 30 天每天同步一次退款和结算变化，满 30 天才停。

问: 星队长是 TikTok 官方产品吗？
答: 不是。星队长是独立的TK账号管理系统，与 TikTok 无隶属关系，数据通过你本人的官方授权同步。

问: 可以把所有国家、所有类型账号都接入吗？
答: 系统按美国、墨西哥、巴西、英国及东南亚 6 国（印尼、马来西亚、泰国、越南、菲律宾、新加坡）共 10 个站点组织账号。各站点支持的账号类型、授权和订单数据范围不同，具体以工作台及实际授权结果为准。

问: 账号管理是否等于自动发视频或防关联浏览器？
答: 不等于。本系统只做授权后的账号、作品与订单经营管理，不代发视频，也不提供防关联浏览器。

## 订单与业绩
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/features/performance-analytics?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok业绩统计怎么做？账号授权后，星队长会把 GMV 和佣金自动算好：订单自动同步，成交 GMV、线上佣金、预计线下佣金和退款逐单可查，按 GMT-8 统计、和 TikTok App 数据页一致；哪个人、哪个号、哪个商品在出单，一眼看清，明细可以按橱窗号、渠道号导出。

问: 和 TikTok 后台的数字对不上怎么办？
答: 先对齐时区和统计口径就能对上。星队长默认按 GMT-8（北京时间 16:00 换天）做TikTok订单与业绩统计，而 TikTok Seller Center 美区默认按美西时间；结算对账可切换商家时区，退款以平台最终回传为准。

问: 员工业绩怎么算？
答: 按账号当前负责人自动汇总名下全部订单、GMV 和佣金。账号换负责人后新订单自动归新负责人，员工只能看自己范围的数据，全团排行按角色权限开放。

问: 星队长怎么区分 Shop Ads 投流广告出单和自然流出单？
答: 系统会为每笔同步回来的订单自动标注流量归因，将短视频自然流订单与 Shop Ads 投流广告订单清晰拆开，方便团队按不同比例核算合作佣金并评估真实投产比。

问: 筛选好的订单明细可以直接导出成 Excel 跟商家对账吗？
答: 可以。支持按日期范围、账号、流量来源、合作商家或售后状态组合筛选订单，30 天且 500 单以内可即时下载 Excel，更长周期（最多 90 天）支持后台异步生成导出。

问: 显示为零和没有数据是一回事吗？
答: 不是。零是已确认的数值，未授权、未同步或费率待确认会单独标注状态，不会混同为零。

问: 订单数据是否保证实时完整？
答: 受平台回传与授权状态影响会有几分钟延迟。授权后先同步近 7 天订单并后台补齐 90 天，以页面更新提示为准。

## 团队管理
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/features/team-management?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 带货团队的考勤和日报，交给星队长这套TK团队管理系统自动管：打卡自动进工资，每天北京时间 16:30 写好一份文字日报；谁在上班、剪辑、开会，今天剪了几条、离目标还差多少，派品、交片、审片也在一条线上，出勤按北京日期统计。

问: 员工必须一直开着网页吗？
答: 不需要一直开着网页。员工打卡、切换状态、点完成 +1 在电脑顶栏或手机网页点一下即可完成，权限按老板、组长、员工三级严格隔离。

问: 考勤能导入钉钉的数据吗？
答: 可以直接导入。工资表支持导入钉钉或企业微信导出的考勤表，若当月未导入且开启了考勤规则，则自动采用星队长打卡记录核算底薪与扣款。

问: 审片的视频会一直占空间吗？
答: 不会一直占空间。视频文件在审片通过或被新版本替换 7 天后自动清理，打回满 30 天未重传也会清理，但按帧审片意见和任务记录永久保留。

问: 逐帧视频审片和发布登记是怎么串起剪辑交付流程的？
答: 剪辑师按派品任务上传成片后，小组长可在任意视频画面暂停并打上精确到秒的修改批注；成片通过并发布到 TikTok 后，员工登记发布账号与条数，系统会自动与平台同步回来的真实带车视频逐条核对。

问: 小团队也需要团队管理系统吗？
答: 超过 3 人共管账号或派品频繁就需要。可先用星队长把账号归属、每日目标和自动日报跑起来。

问: 所有员工都能看到全部经营数据吗？
答: 不能。老板看全公司和利润，组长只看本组出单与进度，员工只看自己名下账号、任务和工资明细。

## 经营核算
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/features/profit-accounting?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK 带货利润核算就一个式子：佣金收入 − 各项成本。收入从商务中心逐单算出来，账号投入、设备、网络、工资和日常开支自动记进成本。每天的利润按团队、员工、账号 3 层展开，每个号多久回本也算好，不用月底再拿表格手工汇总。

问: 利润是按到账算的吗？
答: 不是按到账算，而是按订单确认收入。TK带货利润核算把每天同步的线上与线下佣金扣减退款后直接算作经营收入，实际回款进度在商务中心结算单里单独跟踪。

问: 汇率怎么设？
答: 支持按供应链单独设置结算汇率，未单独设置的以及 TikTok Shop 平台线上佣金统一使用机构默认汇率（默认 6.8，可随时修改）。

问: 员工能看到利润吗？
答: 不能看到。公司的利润、账号成本和公共开支默认仅对老板可见；部门负责人只看本组出单，普通员工只能查看已确认月份里自己的工资条明细。

问: TK带货利润核算怎么计算每个账号的回本周期和封号亏损？
答: TK带货利润核算按「已赚回佣金 ÷（账号成本 + 分摊成本）」逐号做带货利润核算与回本率计算，并根据近 7 天日均净佣金推算预计回本天数；若账号被封禁，尚未赚回的账号投入与分摊成本会在带货利润核算中单独归入封号亏损汇总。

问: 工作手机、网络线路和公共房租水电怎么分摊到账号？
答: 在TK带货利润核算中，工作手机默认按 180 天按日摊销，网络线路与 AI 工具按月费折算，直接计入带货利润核算的绑定账号或使用人；未指定归属人的房租水电、样品物流等公共开支，按各员工名下在管账号数量自动分摊进带货利润核算。

问: 员工阶梯提成和考勤扣款怎么自动合成月度工资条？
答: TK带货利润核算支持最多 10 档分段累进提成模板，月底通过带货利润核算自动汇总员工名下账号净佣金计算提成，结合星队长打卡或导入的钉钉、企业微信考勤算出实发底薪与扣款，确认锁定后生成个人工资条与月度带货利润核算报表。

## 商务中心
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/features/business-center?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

用星队长这套 TK 佣金结算系统，线下佣金和商家对账分 3 步：每一单自动归到对应商家，按店铺、商品的费率算佣金；周期一到出结算单，订单、GMV、佣金、汇率一起冻结；首款、尾款什么时候到、到没到，一张表看清，逾期自动标红。

问: 结算单和经营核算是什么关系？
答: 两者分开核算、互不重复。经营核算直接按每笔订单算出的佣金确认日常经营收入，而TK佣金结算系统的结算单专门跟踪商家对账确认与首款、尾款实收进度。

问: 一个供应链有很多店铺怎么办？
答: 把这些店铺全部绑到同一家供应链名下即可。绑定后，所有关联店铺同步进来的订单都会自动归集到该供应链合并出账，不用逐单手选。

问: 员工能看商务中心吗？
答: 普通员工默认不能看。商务中心涉及供应链费率与公司回款，目前仅对机构负责人和商务角色开放，按角色严格控制可见范围。

问: 同一家合作商家既有店铺默认佣金又有单品高佣，按哪个算？
答: TK佣金结算系统严格按「单笔绑定 > 商品规则 > 店铺默认 > 供应链默认」四层优先级逐单匹配佣金率，越具体的规则优先级越高，每笔订单都会标明命中的规则名称与费率。

问: 自然流出单和投流广告出单能设置不同的线下佣金率吗？
答: 可以。开启投流分开计算后，系统会根据订单归因区分自然流订单与 Shop Ads 投流订单，分别按各自约定的佣金比例核算应收线下佣金，避免投流单与自然流单混算。

问: 确认对账单后，商家分批打的首款和尾款怎么跟踪逾期？
答: 结算单确认后订单、GMV、佣金与汇率立即冻结；默认按 80% 首款（账期结束 3 天到期）与 20% 尾款（15 天到期）生成应收计划，支持分笔登记实收金额、上传打款凭证并自动标红逾期未到账账单。

## 工具箱
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/features/creator-toolbox?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长工具箱就是一个 TikTok 爆款视频拆解工具：贴链接或上传视频，自动识别台词、翻译，拆成开头、主体、转化 3 段，写出卖点、爆的原因和能复用的模板。设备、网络、AI 账号的使用人和费用也在这里管。

问: 拆解支持哪些视频？
答: 同时支持粘贴 TikTok 视频链接和直接上传本地视频文件。TikTok爆款视频拆解工具会自动完成语音转写、翻译和开头、卖点、转化三段结构拆解，并保存历史记录供团队复用。

问: 选品中心什么时候上线？
答: 智能选品含在专业版（2 个席位）与企业版（5 个席位）中，也可按 ¥249/月/席单独购买，并支持免费试用 3 天（连续 72 小时，每个机构限 1 次，由机构负责人手动开启）。

问: 拆解一条爆款视频后，剪辑团队怎么直接拿去实拍跟拍？
答: TikTok爆款视频拆解工具会将视频按秒拆成开头钩子（前 3 秒留人）、主体演示（核心卖点证明）和结尾转化（小黄车促单）三段，同步生成双语台词与可复用分镜脚本模板，商务派品时可直接勾选附带给剪辑。

问: 团队里共用的爆款拆解记录会重复扣除每月拆片额度吗？
答: 不会。同一条公开 TikTok 视频一旦拆解完成，其分镜结构、原声台词和翻译结果会在平台内存档共享；团队成员反复打开查看历史结果不扣次数，只有点击「重新拆解」时才会消耗 1 次额度。

问: 工作手机、跨境网络线路和 AI 工具账号怎么在工具箱里管？
答: 工具箱内置设备、网络与 AI 账号台账，集中记录每台手机、每条网络线路和每个 AI 剪辑账号的领用人、绑定 TikTok 账号、月费与到期日，提前 7 天自动标黄提醒续费。

问: 登记在工具箱里的手机和网络费用需要再去账本手工记一遍吗？
答: 不需要重复录入。在工具箱登记好的工作手机（默认按 180 天摊销）、网络线路月费和 AI 工具订阅费，每天会自动同步进经营核算的成本台账，直接参与单号回本与月度利润计算。

## 星队长功能｜账号、订单、团队、核算六大模块（2026）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/features?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长功能一共 6 大块：TK 账号管理、订单与业绩、团队管理、经营核算、商务结算和爆款拆解工具箱，把 TikTok 带货团队每天要管的事放进一个系统。每个功能都能单独用，连起来更省事，免费版就能先把账号和订单管起来。

问: 星队长功能总共有哪六个核心模块？
答: 星队长功能涵盖六大模块：TK 账号管理（矩阵号看板与号库发号）、订单与业绩统计（10 分钟同步 GMV、线上线下佣金与排行榜）、团队管理（实时办公室、派品按帧审片、考勤与 16:30 日报）、经营核算（账号投入、手机、网络、工资与单号回本）、商务中心（供应链四层费率与首尾款对账）以及工具箱（爆款视频拆解与设备网络台账）。

问: 六个模块必须全部一起用吗？能不能先只用管号和看单？
答: 可以单独使用，也可以串起来用。很多团队刚接入时先用「TK 账号管理」和「订单与业绩统计」把所有矩阵号和实时订单看清楚；等合作商家和剪辑人员增多后，再逐步启用商务中心、团队管理和经营核算。

问: 订单、账号成本和员工考勤是怎么在模块之间自动打通的？
答: 数据只需录入或授权一次：账号扫码授权后每 10 分钟同步订单，商务中心按店铺与商品规则算出线下佣金，经营核算自动汇总佣金收入并扣减号库账号成本、180 天手机摊销、网络月费与考勤工资，直接生成团队、员工和单号利润。

问: 接入星队长功能需要提供 TikTok 账号密码吗？
答: 不需要。账号看板与订单同步走 TikTok 官方扫码或 OAuth 授权，不接触登录密码；号库里自愿录入的内部账号密码采用加密存储，仅对申请人、商务和机构负责人开放且每次查看均留审计记录。

问: 不同岗位的员工在工作台里看到的星队长功能一样吗？
答: 不一样。系统按「老板 — 部门负责人 — 普通员工」三级权限严格隔离：剪辑与运营只看自己名下的账号、任务和个人工资条，组长只管本组在岗、审片与出单排行，全公司成本、账号成本和经营净利默认仅对老板可见。

问: 目前已开通哪些 TikTok Shop 国家站点？
答: 系统按美国、墨西哥、巴西、英国及东南亚 6 国（印尼、马来西亚、泰国、越南、菲律宾、新加坡）共 10 个站点组织账号。各站点支持的账号类型、授权和订单数据范围不同，具体以工作台及实际授权结果为准。

## TikTok带货团队解决方案｜个人卖家、工作室、MCN机构（2026）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/solutions?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

不同规模的 TikTok 带货团队怎么管？星队长的 TikTok 带货团队解决方案按 3 种不同规模分开落地：个人卖家与小工作室、成长期带货团队、多部门公司，各自用一套系统把账号、订单、团队和结算管起来，已有 1,400+ 家机构这样用起来。

问: 一个人管十几个 TikTok 账号，先用哪个方案最合适？
答: 个人卖家在星队长 TikTok带货团队解决方案里建议先从免费版（¥0，最多 3 人，不用绑卡）起步：扫码授权接入全部达人号（橱窗号）与渠道号后，订单每 10 分钟自动同步，每天自动刷新播放量、挂车状态和橱窗封禁预警；当合作商家变多、需要逐单算线下佣金和看每个号回本时，再升到基础版（¥199/月，最多 10 人）即可。

问: 5 到 30 人的带货团队怎么用这套方案把剪辑、审片和商家对账串起来？
答: 成长期的带货团队通过实时办公室查看全员在岗与今日剪辑完成数，商务从品库派品并附带爆款拆解脚本，组长按帧批注审片，同时在商务中心绑定合作店铺，按四层费率自动算出应收线下佣金并跟进首尾款。

问: 多部门 MCN 带货团队怎么做到各组数据隔离、老板看全盘利润？
答: 这套方案按「老板 — 部门负责人 — 普通员工」三级权限隔离带货团队数据：员工只看名下账号与任务，组长只管本组出单与审片且看不到公司成本，老板则可按团队、员工、账号三层穿透查看真实经营净利。

问: 不同规模的带货团队在账号数量和成员席位上有限制吗？
答: 所有版本管理 TikTok 账号数量均不设上限，封禁或停用的老号无需删除，也不会占用新号名额；团队成员按套餐分档：免费版最多 3 人、基础版最多 10 人（可按 ¥49/人/月加人至 15 人）、专业版最多 30 人（含 2 个选品席位）、企业版最多 100 人（含 5 个选品席位），超过 100 人可联系客服单独报价。

问: 带货团队从几个人扩招到几十人时，原来录入的账号和账本数据需要重导吗？
答: 不需要。所有已授权的 TikTok 账号、历史订单、号库密码、合作商家费率以及账号投入和手机网络成本台账都会原样保留，带货团队新建部门和小组后直接把成员与账号划入对应分组即可。

问: 跨美区、东南亚、拉美和英区多站点运营的带货团队，出单和日报时间怎么对齐？
答: 系统已开通美国、墨西哥、巴西、英国及东南亚 6 国（印尼、马来西亚、泰国、越南、菲律宾、新加坡）共 10 个国家站点，支持在顶栏切换站点并按当地币种展示；美区订单默认按固定 GMT-8（北京时间每天 16:00 换天）统计，每天 16:30 收齐前一天订单后自动生成文字日报推送给负责人。

## 星队长价格｜版本价格与收费标准，免费版¥0起步（2026）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/pricing?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长价格分 4 档管理套餐（管理 TikTok 账号数不限，年付按 10 个月计费）：免费版 ¥0（最多 3 人，不用绑卡）、基础版 ¥199/月（10 人）、专业版 ¥699/月（30 人，含 2 个选品席位）、企业版首发 ¥1,999/月（100 人，含 5 个选品席位）；智能选品也可按 ¥249/月/席单独购买；注册赠送 3 天专业版。

问: 年付怎么算？
答: 年付按 10 个月收费，等于一年送 2 个月。比如基础版年付 ¥1,990，专业版年付 ¥6,990。

问: 首发价到什么时候？以后会不会涨？
答: 企业版、选品单买、基础＋选品有首发价，到 2027 年 2 月 28 日（北京时间）为止。首发期内开通、之后连续续费的，24 个月内都按首发价续。基础版和专业版没有另外打折，首发和平时一个价。

问: 账号不限，是不是可以无限刷新？
答: 账号数量不限，想加多少号都行；刷新按版本给：全速名额里的号最快每 4 小时自动刷新一次，其他正常号每天刷新一次，订单同步不占刷新次数。名额不够可以买全速加号包。

问: 选品 3 天免费试用怎么算？
答: 每个机构一次、1 个席位。负责人自己点「开始试用」才开始算，连续 72 小时。到期不会自动扣款，收藏和记录都留着；没开通也能继续看昨日榜每榜前 3。

问: 注册送什么？
答: 注册赠送 3 天专业版试用，到期按免费版使用，数据保留。选品单买另有 3 天试用，每个机构一次。

问: 我是老会员，或者有赠送的会员，会被收回吗？
答: 不会。已经买的会员、永久权益、赠送和试用都按原来的承诺保留，到期前照常用，不会被自动换成新版本。

问: 专业版和企业版的团队功能差在哪？
答: 专业版有团队基础：人效看板（每个人每天、每月的出单、发布、成交）、上班打卡、1 个实时办公室（最多 30 人）。企业版是完整团队：多部门和管理范围、员工评分、目标、派单审批、请假补卡审批、日报周报汇总、多个办公室和大屏。

问: 超过 100 人怎么办？
答: 企业版包含 100 人，超过的找星队长客服单独报价。基础版可以按 ¥49/人/月 加人，最多加到 15 人。

问: 升级、降级会丢数据吗？
答: 不会。升级按剩余天数折算差价；降级后超出版本的功能先停用，账本、工资、收藏这些数据都留着，再升级就回来了。

问: 星豆和拆解次数怎么算？
答: 每月送的星豆全机构共用，月底清零；自己买的星豆包不清零。爆款拆解按次数算，不再扣星豆；拆解失败会退回次数，看别人已经拆好的不扣次数。

## 关于星队长｜TikTok带货团队的TK账号与经营管理系统（2026）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/about?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长是一款给 TikTok 带货团队用的账号与经营管理软件，已有 1,400+ 家机构在用，管着 20,000+ 个账号；TikTok Shop 的 16 个市场陆续开通，美国、墨西哥、巴西、英国及东南亚六国共 10 国站点已开通。账号、订单、团队和账放进一套系统，老板看清整体，员工专心干活。

问: 电脑和手机分别从哪里进入？
答: 电脑浏览器打开官网登录星队长工作台；手机打开 xingduizhang.com 进入手机版，也可微信扫码用小程序。不同端的功能范围以实际页面为准。

问: 星队长是 TikTok 官方产品吗？
答: 不是。星队长是独立产品，TikTok 与 TikTok Seller Center 名称只用来说明业务场景，不代表平台背书。

问: 星队长里的数据多久更新一次？
答: 星队长的订单每 10 分钟自动同步，16:30 收齐前一天美区单；播放和作品每天 9:00 及每 2 小时刷新，也可手动刷新。星队长对没获取到的数据会标出来，不会当成 0。

问: 在星队长里每个成员都能看到所有数据吗？
答: 不会。星队长里的成员能看什么取决于机构、角色和管理范围；利润、成本这些经营数据默认只给老板看。

问: 星队长目前支持哪些 TikTok Shop 国家站点？美区订单按哪个时区换天？
答: 星队长目前已开通美国、墨西哥、巴西、英国及东南亚 6 国（印尼、马来西亚、泰国、越南、菲律宾、新加坡）共 10 个国家站点，其余 6 个全球站点陆续开放。星队长里的美区订单和利润默认按固定 GMT-8 统计（北京时间每天 16:00 换天，与 TikTok App 数据页一致，16:30 收齐前一天并由星队长自动生成日报）；跟合作商家对账时也可切换美西时间核对。

问: 团队原来的账号表格、合作商家和成本账本怎么迁进星队长？
答: 在星队长里，已买账号可按模板批量导入号库并加密保存密码，合作商家的店铺和商品粘贴链接即可自动识别绑定并设好四层佣金费率，工作手机（默认 180 天摊销）、网络线路和日常开支填进星队长台账后即可接着算回本与月度利润。

## 数据怎么更新｜星队长订单、播放与封禁检查频率（2026）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/help/data-refresh?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长数据更新按类型定时执行：订单约 10 分钟更新一次，北京时间每天 16:30 收齐前一天；作品和播放每天 9:00 全量刷一次，10:05 至 22:05 每 2 小时再刷，23:55 收尾；达人号（橱窗号）每天 11:10 检查封禁，渠道号每 6 天轮巡。美区账号还能不限次数手动刷新。

问: 新扫码授权接入的 TikTok 账号多久能看到第一批数据？
答: 新绑定的账号通常在授权成功后约 1 分钟内完成第一次公开主页与作品抓取；订单中心会立即快速同步最近 7 天的成交明细，并在后台继续补齐近 90 天历史订单。

问: 为什么有时候后台订单数和 TikTok Seller Center 当天数字差几单？
答: 主要源于时区换天时点不同：星队长默认按固定 GMT-8（北京时间每天 16:00 换天）统计，与 TikTok App 数据页一致；而美区商家后台默认按美西时间换天。对账时可在商务中心切换商家时区核对。

问: 哪些账号会触发每 4 小时一次的自动加刷？
答: 系统会根据近 7 天动态自动识别「在发、在涨、在出单」的活跃账号（近 7 天发过作品、挂车视频日播放增长满 1,000 或 20%、近 7 天有成交），在北京时间 10:00 至 24:00 之间每 4 小时自动多刷一次。

问: 手动点击刷新会消耗订单同步额度吗？
答: 不会。订单每 10 分钟自动同步一次，完全不占用手动刷新次数。手动刷新仅用于立即更新作品播放量与挂车状态：美区账号不限手动刷新次数（单号间隔 2 分钟），墨西哥与巴西账号按会员每日额度计算并在北京时间 0 点清零。

问: 账号如果突然被封橱窗，星队长什么时候会发现并停更？
答: 系统每天北京时间 11:10 巡检全部达人号（橱窗号），渠道号每 6 天轮巡一次。一旦发现原本存在的橱窗消失，会自动标记为「橱窗封禁」；此后 48 小时内照常每 10 分钟同步订单，随后 30 天内每天同步一次退款与结算变化，确保月末对账完整。

问: 工具箱里的爆款视频拆解次数怎么扣除和退回？
答: 已被平台内任意用户拆解过的公开 TikTok 视频会共享拆解结果，直接打开查看不扣次数；提交新视频若因解析失败未生成结果会自动退回额度，只有首次成功拆解或点击「重新拆解」时才扣 1 次。

## TK运营指南｜TikTok账号管理、团队与带货结算方法（2026）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 带货团队怎么管账号和结算？可以照这里的 49 篇 TK运营指南一步步做：这套 TK运营指南按 6 大板块覆盖 60 个常用带货术语、账号矩阵与老号盘活、转化漏斗与美墨巴多站点时区、团队分权与 7 天新人带教阶梯提成、商家分层寄样与月末关账、大促黑五备战与短播联动拆解，以及 TikTok Shop 平台规则（佣金比例、结算提现、橱窗与联盟准入）。每篇 TK运营指南先讲通用方法，再讲星队长里怎么做，另有 34 篇带截图的分步使用教程可对照操作。

问: 49 篇 TK运营指南按什么顺序读最高效？
答: 建议先读顶部的 3 篇精选 TK运营指南（TK 管理系统选型、带货利润公式、团队日报模板），再按 6 大运营板块查找对应运营指南：新团队建账先看第 1 组运营指南「带货术语、账号矩阵与老号盘活」（9 篇运营指南，含 60 个常用术语表）；排查播放与出单看第 2 组运营指南「出单漏斗、短播大促与跨国时区」（8 篇运营指南）；管人与分权看第 3 组运营指南「团队分权、新人带教与提成周会」（10 篇运营指南）；算账与对账看第 4 组运营指南「商家分层、多国结算与月度关账」（9 篇运营指南）；选品与拍片看第 5 组运营指南「选品测款、实拍素材库与爆款二创」（7 篇运营指南）；查平台费率与准入看第 6 组运营指南「TikTok Shop 平台规则」（6 篇运营指南）。

问: TK运营指南和使用教程有什么区别？
答: 49 篇 TK运营指南回答「日常运营方法与管理口径怎么定」（例如回本周期公式、退货冲抵规则、7 天新人带教排期、黑五提前 30 天备战清单），每篇 TK运营指南先讲通用运营方法，再讲星队长里怎么落地这套运营指南；而 34 篇使用教程回答「工作台具体按钮在哪点」，每篇按分步流程配真实界面截图，运营指南与使用教程在文内互相链接。

问: 刚开始搭团队，哪几篇 TK运营指南能直接拿来当内部规矩？
答: 最常被直接当作团队日常运营 SOP 的有 6 篇 TK运营指南：《TikTok带货术语表》（统一 60 个运营指标口径）、《TikTok带货团队怎么分组设权限》（搭好三级数据隔离运营指南）、《TikTok新人剪辑和运营怎么带》（7 天运营带教与首周考核运营指南）、《TikTok带货团队提成阶梯与奖金怎么定》（实收净佣金提成运营指南）、《带货团队日报怎么写》（16:30 五段式运营日报指南）以及《TikTok带货机构月末关账清单》（每月 1～5 号关账运营指南）。

问: 做美区、墨西哥、巴西多国站点的团队应该重点看哪几篇 TK运营指南？
答: 跨站点运营重点看第 2 组 TK运营指南的《美区订单的「昨天」是哪天》《TikTok美区墨西哥巴西多站点管理》这两篇运营指南，第 4 组运营指南的《TikTok多国达人合作与外币结算怎么做》，以及第 5 组运营指南的《TikTok带货脚本翻译本地化怎么做》，照这几篇运营指南把 GMT-8、GMT-6、GMT-3 三个换天时点、原币对账单与英西双语脚本运营一次理顺。

问: TK运营指南里的表格、公式和检查清单可以直接复制给团队用吗？
答: 可以。全部 49 篇 TK运营指南里的台账字段、核算公式、周会 60 分钟运营议程、样品管理四步运营指南表和商家 ABC 分级运营指南表，都是按真实 TikTok Shop 达人机构的日常运营流程编写的，可以直接复制运营指南清单到团队群或配合星队长工作台使用。

问: 指南里的平台规则与工作台功能多久更新一次？
答: 每篇 TK运营指南顶部都标注了最近更新日期。当 TikTok Shop 联盟结算规则、支持站点（目前已开通美国、墨西哥、巴西、英国及东南亚 6 国共 10 个国家站点，全球 16 个市场其余 6 个陆续开通）或星队长工作台运营功能更新时，编辑团队会同步修订运营指南正文、运营指南清单与配套教程。

## 多个TikTok账号怎么管理？怎么同时管几百个号，先把六项信息统一。
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/manage-multiple-tiktok-accounts?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

怎么同时管几百个号？先把 6 项信息统一：账号标识、地区、负责人、状态、作品和交接记录。每个号一条台账，业务状态和数据状态分开记，出了问题才知道该找谁。本文按这 6 项给出一份可以照着建的台账清单。

问: 多个TikTok账号怎么管理才不乱？
答: 先把 6 项字段统一到一张台账：唯一标识、地区、负责人、业务与数据状态、作品记录和交接时间，每个号只挂一个负责人。

问: 一个人能同时管理多少个TikTok账号？
答: 只做数据巡检可管 20 到 50 个号；若要独立完成拍摄和原创剪辑，一人通常深度维护 5 到 15 个号。

问: 账号改名后历史数据怎么对上？
答: 用平台唯一标识（UID）做主键，不靠可改的用户名。改名只更新显示名称，历史作品和订单仍归原记录。

问: 为什么不能在共享表格里放账号密码？
答: 共享表格无查看留痕，易泄露。密码和 2FA 密钥应放进加密号库，按权限查看并记录查看人。

问: 授权过期和账号被封怎么区分？
答: 授权过期只是系统连接失效，重扫即可恢复；账号或橱窗被封需在 TikTok Seller Center 查看平台违规通知。

问: 什么时候该从表格换成管理系统？
答: 当团队超 3 人共管、账号超 20 个，或每天核对出单和掉车超半小时，就值得用星队长自动同步。

## 团队业绩怎么统计、怎么排名？先把这四个口径说明白。
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-team-performance?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

团队业绩怎么统计、怎么排名？先把 4 个口径说明白：用哪个日期和时区、账号归谁、哪些订单状态算数、佣金按什么算。口径统一了，同一场复盘里的数字才对得上，排名也才服人。本文给出一份口径清单，复盘前逐项对一遍。

问: TK团队怎么统计业绩才不会月底扯皮？
答: 月初先定死 4 条口径：按哪个时区切日（如 GMT-8）、换人按哪天切业绩、退款怎么扣、提成按佣金还是利润算。

问: 员工业绩应该按GMV算还是按佣金算？
答: 建议按佣金算。GMV 大头归商家，按线上联盟佣金加确认后的线下佣金核算，才贴近团队真实收入。

问: 美区订单为什么和北京时间表格对不上？
答: 因为美区比北京时间慢 15 或 16 小时。按固定 GMT-8 口径，北京时间每天 16:30 后前一天美区订单才收齐。

问: 账号中途换了负责人，历史业绩算谁的？
答: 按交接生效日期切分：交接日前归原负责人，交接日后归新负责人；或统一在月初调整归属。

问: 投流单和自然流单要分开算业绩吗？
答: 要分开。商家投流广告单和自然流单的成本与佣金率不同，分开算才能看清真实的剪辑和选品产出。

问: 退款订单在业绩表里怎么处理？
答: 将已退款、部分退款和取消单单独标注并扣减有效佣金；已确认冻结的月报不再回头涂改。

## TK账号管理工具推荐：先按这 8 个问题对比，再用真实账号试
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/choose-tk-account-management-tool?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK账号管理工具推荐，先用自己的真实流程试一遍，看 4 件事：支持哪些账号和地区、数据口径对不对、团队权限够不够细、日常用起来顺不顺。产品介绍里出现某个平台名，不代表你的账号都已支持。

问: TK账号管理工具怎么选才不踩坑？
答: 拿 3 到 5 个真实账号试跑一周，重点核对 4 件事：官方安全授权、美区订单时区口径、按角色隔离利润数据、支持导出原始明细。

问: 账号管理工具和指纹浏览器是一回事吗？
答: 不是。指纹浏览器管登录环境；星队长这类工具管授权后的数据同步、订单归属、团队协作和经营核算。

问: 试用时怎么验证订单和佣金数据准不准？
答: 挑一个已结束的美国日期（如前天），对齐 GMT-8 或太平洋时区，比对总单数和 GMV，再抽查 5 笔退款或投流订单。

问: 要交出TikTok密码的工具能用吗？
答: 需谨慎评估。合规工具走官方扫码或 OAuth 授权读取数据，无需明文密码；号库保存密码也应加密并留查看记录。

问: 怎么测试工具的团队权限够不够细？
答: 分别用老板、组长、剪辑三个角色登录，确认老板看全盘利润、组长看本组出单、员工只看自己账号和工资。

问: 如果以后停用工具，历史业务数据怎么办？
答: 选型前确认支持按账号、订单、结算单导出 Excel 明细，正式切换前保留原台账两到三周即可平滑迁移。

## TK 管理系统怎么选？先核对账号、订单、权限与核算
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tk-management-system?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK管理系统怎么选？先用已获授权的真实账号，核对账号资料、订单口径、成员权限、佣金与成本，再跑一遍日常协作和交接流程。评估依据是记录能否对上、问题能否追溯，不是功能名称有多少。

问: TK管理系统和TikTok管理系统是一回事吗？
答: 是一回事，只是叫法不同。TK 是 TikTok 的行业简称，TK管理系统、TikTok管理系统、TK账号管理系统一般都指给 TikTok 带货团队用的账号与经营管理软件，管账号、订单、团队和利润，不是发视频工具或防关联浏览器。

问: 用TK管理系统需要交出TikTok账号密码吗？
答: 要看产品。星队长走 TikTok 官方授权，安全合规，不需要你的账号密码；授权后账号资料和订单自动同步。如果某个系统要求你把账号密码交给它，建议先评估安全风险，再决定是否使用。

问: TK管理系统能防止账号被封吗？
答: 不能。管理系统的作用是更早发现异常，比如橱窗被封、作品掉车、授权失效、长时间没发作品，让你尽快处理和止损；账号会不会被限流或封禁取决于平台规则和你的运营方式，任何系统都不应承诺防封。

问: 小团队有必要用TK管理系统吗？
答: 看号和人的数量。一两个人、三五个号用表格就够；号到二三十个以上、开始有员工或线下佣金时，表格容易漏单、对不上，就值得用系统。星队长有免费版，账号不限，可以先把号授权进来试一试再决定。

问: 星队长是TikTok官方的产品吗？
答: 不是。星队长是独立的 TK账号管理与经营管理系统，和 TikTok 没有隶属关系，也没有官方背书；产品介绍里提到 TikTok 只是说明使用场景。账号数据通过你本人的授权同步。

问: 星队长免费版能做什么？
答: 免费版不收费（最多 3 人，不用绑卡）、管理 TikTok 账号数不限，可以用订单自动同步和出单汇总、员工账账号来源品排行、账号分析、爆单掉车封号提醒、基础成员设置与账号归属、视频发布与草稿（需官方授权）、每月导出 3 次订单，以及每天自动刷新播放和作品，已开通美国、墨西哥、巴西、英国及东南亚 6 国共 10 个国家站点。商家结算、账号回本、品库样品、发布登记、定时与批量发布和订单不限次导出在基础版起，选品 2 席、收支流水、净利润、工资核算、人效看板、基础打卡与 1 个实时办公室在专业版起，选品 5 席、多部门管理、派单审片、正式考勤与请假补卡审批、日报周报和号库发号在企业版，以价格页为准。

## TikTok 矩阵号是什么？从账号分工到起步复盘
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-matrix-accounts?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok矩阵号是什么？它是团队按内容方向、市场或合作项目组织多个账号的一种工作方式。起步时先确认账号来源与授权、明确内容分工和负责人，再建台账、安排巡检，并根据订单与工作量决定后续投入。

问: TikTok矩阵号管理最重要的是什么？
答: 最重要的是每个号有唯一负责人、有统一台账、有每日巡检。先把号按品类、负责人、阶段分好组，再每天只盯在出单、在涨和有异常的号，其余的号每周复盘一次。工具只是让这套流程自动跑起来。

问: 一个人能管多少个TK矩阵号？
答: 没有固定数字，取决于每个号每天要发几条、内容要不要单独拍。只做巡检和数据管理，一个人管几十个号问题不大；如果每个号都要原创剪辑，一个人通常只能深度运营十几个号。先按产出定，再按回本调。

问: 做TK矩阵号会不会被平台判定违规？
答: 运营多个号本身不等于违规，关键在于怎么做。每个号要真实运营、内容有差异，不批量注册、不刷量、不互刷、不搬运重复内容、不绕过平台风控。具体以 TikTok 和 TikTok Shop 当前规则为准。

问: 批量管理TK账号每天要看哪些数据？
答: 每天看两样：异常和出单。异常包括橱窗被封、作品掉车、授权失效、长时间没发；出单看哪些号、哪些品在卖。播放、粉丝这些数字每周复盘时再看，避免被单日波动带偏。

问: TK矩阵号的密码应该怎么保管？
答: 密码、2FA 密钥和邮箱密码不要写进共享台账，也不要发在群里，应单独加密保存，只给需要的人查看，并记录谁在什么时候看过。星队长的号库就是这样做的：密码加密保存，每次查看都留记录，负责人能看到查看记录。

问: 星队长批量刷新会刷所有账号吗？
答: 不会。每天北京时间 9 点会自动刷新一次全部正常账号；手动批量刷新时，只刷在发、在涨、在出单和你标了监控的号，不浪费刷新次数。刷新次数按版本给，订单同步不占刷新次数。

## TK 橱窗号和渠道号有什么区别？收入、门槛、数据一次讲清
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/showcase-vs-channel-accounts?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK 橱窗号和渠道号的区别，要按实际账号角色判断。官方店铺号只可自营销售；美区营销号至少 5,000 粉并申请联盟权限后，还可推广其他商家商品。对比佣金与订单数据前，先核对市场、授权和数据来源。

问: TK橱窗号和渠道号最大的区别是什么？
答: 先分清实际角色：联盟达人可推广符合条件的多店商品；官方店铺号只可自营销售。美区营销号至少 5,000 粉并获联盟权限后，也能推广其他商家商品。不要用「渠道号」口语标签推断没有联盟佣金。

问: 0粉渠道号能直接挂车吗？
答: 不能只看粉丝数。美区官方号和营销号绑定店铺做自营销售无最低粉丝要求，但还需满足身份、绑定和商品权限条件；营销号推广其他商家商品须至少 5,000 粉并申请联盟权限。

问: 橱窗号和渠道号哪个好？
答: 没有绝对的好坏，看合作模式。想自己选品、同时做多家供应链，橱窗号更灵活；和少数供应链深度合作、商家提供店铺和货，渠道号起步更快。很多团队两类号都做，关键是分开记账、分开算佣金。

问: 渠道号有联盟佣金吗？
答: 取决于实际角色和交易。官方号只做店铺自营销售；美区营销号达到至少 5,000 粉并申请联盟权限后，可推广其他商家商品并按规则赚取联盟佣金。机构另签的服务费或补充佣金另记。

问: 渠道号会被检测成橱窗封禁吗？
答: 在星队长里不会。橱窗封禁的自动检测只针对橱窗号，判断依据是以前有过橱窗、现在没了；渠道号本来就没有达人橱窗，系统不做这项检查，不会因为没有橱窗而误报。

问: 橱窗号和渠道号的数据可以放在一起统计吗？
答: 不建议直接相加。橱窗号有逐单的联盟订单，渠道号多是按账号汇总的经营数据，口径不同。正确做法是分开统计、分开算佣金，到利润层面再合起来；星队长里渠道号的汇总数据也不会混进橱窗号的逐单明细。

## 供应链线下佣金怎么对账？从订单归属到首款尾款
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-affiliate-commission-settlement?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

供应链线下佣金怎么对账？先确认每笔订单归属、合同费率、退款处理和结算期间，再按双方确认的记录出对账单，跟进首款、尾款及逾期。平台联盟佣金与商家另行约定的补佣分开记，确认金额与实际到账也要分开。

问: TK佣金结算的线上佣金和线下佣金有什么区别？
答: 线上佣金由 TikTok Shop 联盟按商品佣金率结算给达人，走平台；线下佣金是带货团队和供应链私下约定的额外佣金或服务费，不经过平台，需要团队自己按订单算、自己对账、自己收款。TK佣金结算的难点主要在线下这部分。

问: TikTok线下佣金怎么算才准确？
答: 按订单逐单算。先把店铺绑到供应链让订单自动归属，再按单笔、商品、店铺、供应链四层费率取值，投流订单单独用投流费率；混合流量或没配费率的订单列为待确认，不估算也不当成 0，最后按周期汇总对账。

问: 供应链对账总是对不上怎么办？
答: 先查三个口径：日期是按美国日期还是北京时间、退款单怎么扣、汇率按哪个算。绝大多数差异都出在这三处。建议合作开始时就把这三条写进约定，每期对账前双方按同一口径出数，确认后冻结不再回头改。

问: 首款尾款一般怎么约定？
答: 常见做法是周期结束、对账确认后几天内先付首款（比如 80%），两周左右再付尾款，具体比例和天数由双方约定。星队长默认首款 80%、周期结束 3 天后到期、尾款 15 天后到期，每家供应链都可以单独改。

问: 星队长的结算单和利润有什么关系？
答: 两者分开管。经营核算的收入直接用商务中心逐单算出的佣金，按订单确认，不等钱到账；结算对账只管钱有没有收到、首款尾款是否逾期。这样每天都能看到经营情况，又不会把应收和实收混在一起。

问: 员工能看到商务中心的结算数据吗？
答: 目前不能。商务中心只有机构负责人和有商务权限的人能看，供应链的费率、结算条件不会在团队里随意流传。员工只看自己负责账号的佣金和到账的功能正在开发中。

## TK 橱窗封禁怎么看？先核对权限与平台通知
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-showcase-ban-check?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK橱窗封禁怎么看？先确认账号以前是否有橱窗，再查看平台通知和当前电商权限，分别核对视频商品链接与系统授权状态。橱窗消失是待核查信号，不能仅凭没有橱窗就断定账号被封。

问: TK橱窗封禁怎么看？
答: 看这个号以前有没有橱窗、现在还有没有。以前见过商店入口、挂过车或出过单，现在主页的商店入口没了、视频也挂不上商品，基本就是橱窗被封。从来没开过橱窗的号或渠道号，没有橱窗是正常的，不算封禁。

问: 橱窗封禁和TK封号有什么区别？
答: 橱窗封禁是账号还在、还能发视频，但不能再挂车卖货；封号是整个账号被封，主页无法正常使用。对带货团队来说两者都意味着这个号不能再出单，但封号影响更大，作品和粉丝都受影响。

问: TikTok挂车掉车是什么意思？
答: 掉车是指视频原来挂着的商品链接不见了，账号和橱窗可能都还在。常见原因有商品下架、店铺问题、商品被移出橱窗或视频被处理。判断掉车的前提是确认这条视频以前挂过车，从没挂过车的视频不算掉车。

问: 橱窗被封以后之前的订单还能看吗？
答: 能。在星队长里，账号标成橱窗封禁后 48 小时内照常同步订单，之后 30 天里每天同步一次，收完之前订单的退款、退货和结算变化，满 30 天才停，方便把这个号的账收尾算清。

问: 星队长多久能发现橱窗被封？
答: 通常最晚第二天。系统每天北京时间 9 点自动刷新全部正常账号，每次刷新都会检查橱窗还在不在，手动刷新时也会检查；新发现的封禁会出现在当天北京时间 16:30 推送的文字日报和员工的「我的账号」里。

问: 怎么建立TK账号异常预警？
答: 每天固定时间出一张异常清单，只列要处理的事：橱窗封禁、封号、在出单视频掉车、授权失效、7 天没发作品。每一项落到负责人、限定处理时间，处理完关掉，没处理的第二天继续提醒并上报组长。

## TikTok 带货利润怎么算？先算佣金，再扣完整成本
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-affiliate-profit?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok带货利润怎么算？利润 = 佣金收入 − 各项成本。先分清平台佣金、合作商家佣金、退款扣回和实际收款，再计入账号启动投入、设备、网络、人工及日常开支；成本按一致口径分摊，账号回本与月度利润分别查看。

问: TK带货利润怎么算？
答: 利润 = 佣金收入 − 各项成本。收入是线上联盟佣金加线下佣金，扣掉退款，按汇率换成人民币；成本包括账号投入、设备、网络、工具、工资提成、房租水电、样品物流、投流等。一次性大额成本要按天摊，公共开支要分摊到人和号上。

问: GMV可以当作带货团队的收入吗？
答: 不可以。GMV 是买家付的成交额，大部分是商家的钱；带货团队真正的收入是佣金，包括平台结算的线上佣金和供应链给的线下佣金，还要扣掉退款。用 GMV 算利润，会把经营情况严重高估。

问: 账号成本应该怎么算进利润？
答: 按天摊销，而不是全算在买入那天。常见做法是按 30 天摊，比如 ¥300 的号每天摊 ¥10，这样每天的利润才平稳真实。被封号没赚回来的部分要单独算成封号亏损，不能当作没发生。

问: TK账号多久能回本怎么算？
答: 预计回本天数 = 还差的钱 ÷ 最近 30 天日均收入。例如号成本 ¥300、已赚回 ¥180、最近 30 天日均 ¥15，还差 ¥120，大约 8 天回本。最近 30 天没有收入的号算不出回本天数，说明需要处理了。

问: 利润应该按订单算还是按到账算？
答: 经营核算建议按订单确认收入，这样每天都能看到真实的经营情况；钱有没有到账单独在结算对账里跟踪。按到账算利润要等一两个月，中间的经营变化都看不见，也容易把应收和实收混在一起。

问: 员工能看到公司的利润吗？
答: 在星队长里不能。利润和成本只给老板看，部门负责人收到的日报也不显示利润和成本；员工只能看自己的工资明细，包括底薪、提成、奖金和扣款。这样既保护经营数据，又让员工清楚自己的收入怎么来。

## TK 号库管理怎么做？记录账号来源、权限与交接
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tk-account-library?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK号库管理怎么做？为团队合法控制的账号集中记录来源、唯一标识、启动成本、授权范围和负责人，再把入库、申请、分配与交接串起来。登录资料按权限保管，账号变动留下记录，成本只登记一次。

问: TK号库管理要记哪些信息？
答: 至少记账号名、登录邮箱或手机、密码、账号类型、站点地区、来源渠道、账号成本、入库日期、分组和 UID，以及 2FA 密钥、绑定邮箱等辅助登录信息。成本和入库日期要入库时就记，后面算回本和利润都要用。

问: 团队里的TikTok账号密码怎么保管才安全？
答: 加密存、少人看、看了留记录。密码不要写在共享表格或群里，只让管号库的商务、负责人和领号的员工本人能看，每次查看都记录是谁、什么时候看的。号发给员工后，号库这边不再保留密码。

问: 员工申请账号的流程应该怎么设计？
答: 分三步：员工提申请，写清数量、类型、站点和原因；组长、部门负责人或商务审批，不同意要写原因；商务从号库发号，员工在自己的页面查看登录信息并授权。每一步都留记录，方便追溯。

问: 员工离职时TK账号怎么交接？
答: 先列交接清单，核对每个号的状态和待办；再把号的负责人改成接手的人并记下生效日期，之前的业绩算交出人、之后的算接手人；登录信息有变化要同步更新到号库。离职员工的系统账号停用，但历史记录保留。

问: 账号成本录在号库里，还需要在成本台账再记一次吗？
答: 不需要，也不应该。同一笔钱记两次会让利润被低估。在星队长里，号库录的成本会在员工授权同名账号后自动写到这个 TK 账号上，经营核算按天摊销，成本台账里不用再单独记账号投入。

问: 星队长的号库哪个版本能用？
答: 号库管理、员工在线申领与审批发号在企业版提供；免费版起支持已授权账号的负责人归属与交接，基础版起支持记录每个号的账号成本和算回本。号库只有商务和机构负责人能管理，员工通过申请或商务直接分配拿到号，具体以官网价格页的版本对比为准。

## TikTok视频掉车怎么排查？先分清四类原因，再盯住正在出单的作品
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-product-link-removed-check?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok视频掉车怎么排查？带货视频为什么会掉车、怎么及时发现，先看同一账号下其他视频的黄车还在不在，再按 4 类原因逐项排查：商家商品断货下架、定向或公开佣金计划关闭、单条视频挂车违规、店铺被限制。每天在星队长作品分析里筛「已掉车」，按播放量和近 7 天出单数优先补救正在跑量的作品。

问: TikTok视频掉车怎么排查最快？
答: 先看同账号其他视频黄车还在不在，区分单条掉车与整号封橱窗；再看同款商品在其他账号上是否全掉——全掉找商家查库存和佣金计划，单条掉查视频违规。

问: TikTok已发布视频掉车后还能在原视频上重新挂车吗？
答: 通常不能。商品锚点因下架或违规被移除后，平台不支持在原视频直接换绑新商品 ID，需用验证过的脚本重新剪辑发布并挂上有效链接。

问: 商家补货重新上架后，原来掉车的视频黄车会恢复吗？
答: 若商家在原商品 ID 上补库存且未关推广计划，部分视频链接会随商品上架恢复；若商家删了旧链接新建商品 ID，原视频挂车不会恢复。

问: 为什么没有收到违规通知，视频黄车也突然不见了？
答: 多为商家端变动：SKU 缺货、商品下架、定向或公开佣金计划关闭，或店铺被限制，这类变动不会给达人发违规通知。

问: 正在投流的视频突然掉车怎么办？
答: 立即暂停该视频广告消耗，核实商家库存或替换链接，等新视频挂上有效链接过审后再切投流预算。怎么看今日出单可见[《怎么看今天哪个号在出单》](/tutorials/see-which-accounts-sell-today)。

问: 星队长怎么帮团队发现视频掉车？
答: 账号扫码授权后，在「账号分析 → 作品分析」点「已掉车」即可筛出所有挂车失效的视频，并按播放量和出单数排序优先处理。

## TikTok 账号多久回本？用净佣金和启动投入估算
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-account-payback-roi?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok账号多久回本？用未收回的启动投入除以近期平均每日净佣金，得到估算的剩余天数；投入、收入为零或缺失时分别标注，不能硬算。停用账号保留原始投入和历史佣金，累计回本、月度利润与实际收款分开核对。

问: TikTok账号多久回本，公式怎么算？
答: 预计剩余回本天数 = 未收回启动投入 ÷ 最近 30 天平均每日净佣金。分母为零或缺失时不估算；已经回本的账号剩余天数为零。

问: 账号没回本就停用了，未收回投入怎么记？
答: 保留该号的投入和已赚回净佣金，单列未收回差额；批次回本仍包含这笔原始投入，不要删除记录或重复扣减。

问: TikTok账号一般多久能回本？
答: 没有适用于所有账号的固定天数。先核对启动投入、净佣金和近期开支，再做动态估算；内容表现与平台限制都会影响结果。

问: 手机折旧和网络费用要不要加进账号回本？
答: 单独看启动投入回本时，设备和网络另列；看完整经营利润时再计入。若已分摊到启动投入，就不要重复计费，并注明采用的口径。

问: 换运营人后，账号回本记录会重新算吗？
答: 账号历史投入和佣金继续跟随原账号；员工绩效按交接生效日期切分，两套口径不要混用。

问: 星队长能自动估算回本进度吗？
答: 登记成本并授权同步数据后，可查看账号及批次回本进度和估算天数。缺失成本或收入不足时先核对资料，估算不能代替平台结算与实际收款。

## TikTok美区带货怎么选品？带货团队挑出能挂车、易出单商品的四步法
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-product-selection-method?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok美区带货怎么选品？TikTok带货团队每天挑出能挂车、易出单的商品，按 4 道筛子过一遍：账号与商品资格及履约库存、近期短视频成交、原创拍摄能力、扣除退款与成本后的佣金。美区联盟达人考察期只能推广店铺表现至少 95% 的商品，选好后再派给剪辑测款。

问: TikTok美区带货怎么选品最稳妥？
答: 先核对账号类型、商品权限与店铺履约；美区联盟达人考察期要求店铺表现至少 95%。再看库存、短视频成交证据、原创拍摄能力和扣除退款后的佣金，不能把自定评分当成平台门槛。

问: 为什么选了热销榜前十的商品，自己发短视频却不出单？
答: 总榜前十常靠头部直播间低价秒杀或大额投流冲量，且同质化视频已达数千条；短视频团队应挑近 7 天短视频出单正在爬坡、达人还未挤爆的成长期商品。

问: 没有实物样品能做TikTok美区带货选品测款吗？
答: 测款初期可用商家授权素材或混剪测试脚本转化，一旦跑出首单应尽快向合作商家申领样品做真实开箱与痛点实拍，转化更稳。

问: 选品时佣金率多少才算及格？
答: 自然流短视频建议选总佣金率（线上加线下）15% 以上的商品；若要上付费投流，通常需总佣金率 25% 以上且客单价在 $20 以上才算得过账。

问: 选好的商品怎么派给剪辑团队才不会拍偏？
答: 不要只丢商品链接。将商品入品库时附上 1 到 2 条已拆解的对标视频分镜、核心卖点与禁语说明，让剪辑照着验证过的结构剪。

问: 星队长怎么把选品和后续剪辑出单连起来？
答: 在星队长选品中心筛品并收藏后，可一键拆解对标视频脚本、入品库派剪辑任务、按帧审片，并在订单页直接看该商品的出单归因。

## TikTok工作手机和网络管理怎么做？建好资产台账、到期提醒与成本摊销
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-work-phone-and-network-management?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok工作手机和网络管理怎么做？几十台TikTok工作手机和网络线路建台账、记到期和算摊销，核心抓好 4 件事：机身贴唯一编号签、记清设备用途与保管职责、给网络线路设提前 7 天到期提醒，以及将工作手机按 180 天折旧、网络按 30 天月费自动分摊进团队利润表。

问: TikTok工作手机和网络管理最核心的四件事是什么？
答: 编号贴签、明确保管人、到期提醒、成本分摊：每台手机和每条网络线路编唯一编号，记清保管员工与关联账号，网络提前 7 天提醒续费，费用自动分摊进利润表。

问: 工作手机或网络线路在小组之间调拨后，成本算在哪个组？
答: 按当前绑定的保管员工和所属小组归集。在台账里改绑给新小组员工后，后续按日折旧的硬件成本和网络月费自动计入新接收小组。

问: 闲置备用或维修中的工作手机，在台账里怎么登记管理？
答: 将设备状态从「使用中」改为「空闲备用」或「维修中」，解绑原保管人并收回设备柜；新员工入职时直接从「空闲备用」列表挑号领用。

问: 为什么工作手机成本要按 180 天分摊，而不是采购当月一次性扣完？
答: 工作手机通常连续使用半年以上。按 180 天按日折旧分摊，能让每个月、每个小组承担的硬件成本与当月佣金产出匹配，月度利润更真实。

问: 员工离职时，怎么快速清点他手里的工作手机和关联资产？
答: 在台账里按该员工姓名筛选，即可拉出他保管的手机编号、网络订阅和未完成资产交接事项，逐台核对实物标签并一键改派。

问: 星队长怎么提醒我们哪些网络线路快到期了？
答: 在「账号管理 → 设备网络」填好到期日后，系统会自动统计并高亮显示「7天内即将到期」和「已过期」的线路，提醒行政及时续费或停用。

## TikTok带货退货退款怎么对账？线上与线下佣金扣减及跨月冲抵规则
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-refund-rate-reconciliation?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok带货退货退款怎么对账？TikTok带货订单发生退款退货后，线上和线下佣金按 2 条线扣减对账：线上联盟佣金由平台按最终完结状态自动扣回或按部分退款净额重算；商家线下佣金按唯一订单号逐单比对售后状态，预留 20% 尾款冲抵跨月退货。

问: TikTok带货退货退款怎么对账最不容易出错？
答: 线上佣金以平台完结状态为准；线下佣金与商家约定固定拉表日（如周期后第 7 天），按唯一订单号逐单比对正常、已退款、部分退款与售后中状态。

问: 买家申请了部分退款，达人佣金会全部扣光吗？
答: 不会。无论平台线上佣金还是线下结算，部分退款都应按「原实付金额 − 已退款金额」后的剩余有效成交额乘以佣金费率计算，不应整单清零。

问: 上个月已经结清线下佣金，这个月买家才退货怎么办？
答: 采用跨期冲抵：商家提供跨月退货的原订单号与退款记录，核对属实后在预留的 20% 尾款或当月新结算单中专项扣减。

问: 为什么线下佣金结算通常首款收 80%、留 20% 尾款？
答: 预留 20% 尾款正是为了覆盖对账时尚未完结的在途售后与跨期退货，等退货期过后再按扣除真实退款后的净额结清尾款。

问: 投流订单发生退货退款，佣金怎么扣、广告费能退吗？
答: 投流单退货后达人佣金同样会扣回，但已消耗的广告费不退；建议在订单页叠加筛选「投流 + 已退款」严控高退货投流品。

问: 星队长怎么帮商务核对商家的退货扣款？
答: 星队长每 10 分钟同步真实售后状态，支持按「已退款 / 售后中」筛选并导出带订单号、退款金额与净佣金的 Excel 明细表逐单核对。

## TikTok带货团队怎么分组设权限？管好组长权限范围与三级数据隔离
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-creator-team-roles-and-permissions?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok带货团队怎么分组设权限？TikTok多小组带货团队管好组长权限、不泄露全公司底盘，靠「部门与小组」加 3 级权限隔离：老板看全公司账号、商家底价与净利润；组长只管本组成员、本组账号、本组审片与 16:30 本组日报；员工在个人中心只看本人账号、任务与工资条。

问: TikTok带货团队怎么分组设权限最合理？
答: 按「部门 → 小组」搭好组织树，执行老板、组长、普通成员三级隔离：老板看全公司与净利；组长只管本组成员、本组账号、本组审片与本组业绩；员工只在个人中心看自己的账号、任务和工资条。

问: 几十人的TikTok带货团队，每个小组配几个人最合适？
答: 常见赛马小组配置是 1 名组长带 3 到 6 名组员，全组共管 20 到 50 个活跃橱窗号。超过 8 人时组长每日按帧审片和巡检异常号会忙不过来，建议裂变出新小组。

问: 组长能看到其他小组正在跑什么爆款商品和账号吗？
答: 不能。做好分组隔离后，一组组长只能看到一组名下的账号、作品和订单，看不到二组、三组的账号列表和出单商品，避免核心选品外泄与跨组误操作。

问: 组长能看到公司和商家谈的线下高佣底价或公司净利润吗？
答: 默认不能。商务结算单、四层佣金底价及全公司成本利润默认仅对老板（及授权的商务/财务）开放，组长只看本组的出单产出与完成率。

问: 员工从一组调到二组后，上个月在一组出的单算哪个组的业绩？
答: 按历史归属生效日期切分：调组前产生的订单和佣金仍归一组历史业绩，调组生效日起新产生的订单归入二组。

问: 星队长怎么让组长只看只管自己组？
答: 在星队长团队管理里建好部门或小组，把成员划入并将某位成员设为负责人，系统会自动把他的账号视野、派活审片和 16:30 日报限制在该组范围内。

## TikTok 投流单和自然流单怎么区分？分清了，才知道单是怎么来的
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-ads-vs-organic-orders?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 投流单和自然流单怎么区分？看订单的流量来源：投流、自然流和混合 3 类分开记，GMV 和佣金也分开算；投流佣金率不同时按各自的规则结算。本文讲清判断依据，以及在星队长里筛选、导出的方法。

问: TikTok投流单和自然流单怎么区分？
答: 看每个商品的佣金归因。店铺广告佣金大于 0 的是投流，标准佣金大于 0 的是自然流，两类都有是混合单，都没有有效数值是来源未明确。这是佣金归因口径，不代表用户实际刷到视频的路径。

问: 混合订单应该算投流还是自然流？
答: 都不算，应该单独列出。一张订单里同时有投流归因和自然流归因的商品时，整单 GMV 无法可靠拆分，硬算进任何一边都会让数字失真。星队长把它放进「其他订单」，线下结算时列为待确认 GMV。

问: 退款后订单的流量来源会变吗？
答: 不应该变。退款后实际佣金可能变成 0，但预估佣金里的归因证据还在。星队长同时参考实际佣金和预估佣金判断来源，退款单仍保留原来的投流或自然流标记，退款情况另外标注。

问: 投流单的佣金率和普通单不一样，怎么结算？
答: 给投流单单独设佣金率。在星队长商务中心打开「投流订单单独算佣金」，在店铺上填投流佣金率，投流单就按这个比例逐单计算；留空则继承普通规则，混合单和没配费率的单列为待确认 GMV。

问: 自然流出单占比多少算正常？
答: 没有统一标准，要和自己的历史比。不同品类、不同商家的投放力度差别很大，建议按周看投流、自然流、其他订单三者的占比变化，结构突然变化时，先问清商家的投放情况再下结论。

问: 星队长免费版能区分投流和自然流吗？
答: 能。星队长每个版本都提供实时出单和投流、自然流区分，订单可以按流量来源筛选；免费版每月可导出 3 次订单，基础版及以上支持订单不限次数导出及商家投流单单独算线下佣金。各版本的具体功能以价格页为准。

## TikTok 美区订单日期怎么算？把时差讲清楚，数字就对得上
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-us-order-date?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 美区订单日期怎么算？卖家后台按美国太平洋时间统计，跟着夏令时变，比北京时间慢 15 或 16 个小时；TikTok App 数据页和星队长按固定的 GMT-8 统计，北京时间每天 16:00 换天。本文讲清换算、对不上的常见原因和对账步骤。

问: TikTok美区订单日期按什么时间算？
答: TikTok 卖家后台按美国太平洋时间算，会跟着夏令时变：冬令时比北京时间慢 16 小时，夏令时慢 15 小时，所以后台在北京时间下午 4 点（冬令时）或 3 点（夏令时）换天。TikTok App 数据页按固定的 GMT-8 算，北京时间每天 16:00 换天。

问: 为什么上午看到的昨天订单，下午又变多了？
答: 因为北京时间上午，美国的「昨天」还没结束，订单还在进来。等美国那天结束（按 GMT-8 是北京时间 16:00）、订单同步完（星队长 16:30 收齐），看到的才是完整数字。另外退款、取消也会让数字在之后几天继续变化。

问: 订单和后台对不上，先查什么？
答: 先查日期和时区。确认双方都按美国日期、同一个时区（美西时间还是 GMT-8）统计，并挑一个已经结束的日期来对；然后依次核对账号范围、订单状态口径、订单总数和单号。大部分差异出在日期口径上。

问: 星队长的订单日期和TikTok后台一致吗？
答: 星队长按 GMT-8 统计，和 TikTok App 数据页一致，北京时间每天 16:00 换天。卖家后台按美西时间，冬令时两边完全一样；夏令时后台早 1 个小时换天，零点附近个别订单会归到不同日子。结算单可以选「按商家时间」（和卖家后台一致）或「按系统时间」（GMT-8），默认按商家时间。

问: 美区带货团队的日报应该什么时候发？
答: 在美国那天结束、订单收齐之后发。星队长按 GMT-8 统计，北京时间每天 16:00 换天，16:30 收齐后推送前一天的文字日报，全年不变。

问: 员工考勤也要按美国时间算吗？
答: 不用。员工按北京时间上下班，剪辑、发布、出勤按北京日期统计更合理；只有订单、GMV、佣金和利润按美国日期。两套日期各管各的，在日报里分开写清楚即可。

## 带货团队考勤工资怎么算？底薪、提成与考勤怎么算才不吵架
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-team-attendance-salary?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

带货团队考勤工资怎么算？3 块加起来：底薪按出勤折算，提成按业绩算（可以设阶梯），再加岗位薪资。本文给出可以直接照着定、不容易吵架的考勤和工资规则，以及用星队长打卡、自动算工资的具体做法。

问: 带货团队考勤工资怎么算？
答: 一般拆成三块：底薪按出勤折算，提成按员工名下账号的佣金算，再加全勤奖、奖金、补贴，减去考勤扣款和其他扣款。公式是应发 = 底薪 × 出勤天数 ÷ 应出勤天数 + 提成 + 奖金补贴 − 扣款。

问: 剪辑员工的考勤怎么管？
答: 出勤和产出分开管。出勤看打卡，影响底薪折算和全勤奖；产出看每日目标和完成条数，用在日报和绩效面谈上。不建议把剪辑条数直接折成扣款，容易让员工为凑数量牺牲质量。

问: 员工提成按GMV还是按佣金？
答: 建议按佣金。GMV 里大部分不是团队收入，按线下佣金、线上佣金或两者合计提成，更贴近团队实际赚到的钱。是否先扣账号投入等成本可以按岗位决定，基数定下后至少一个季度不要改。

问: 阶梯提成怎么算？
答: 按分段累进算，每一段用自己的比例。举例：基数 2 万元，0 到 1 万按 5%、1 万以上按 8%，提成是 500 + 800 = 1,300 元，跨档时不会出现多卖反而少拿的情况。星队长最多支持 10 档阶梯。

问: 岗位薪资和个人薪资冲突时以哪个为准？
答: 以个人单独设置为准。常见顺序是个人设置优先于岗位模板，岗位模板优先于默认金额。按岗位定模板、个别人单独调，调整整个岗位只要改一处，特殊情况也不会被覆盖。

问: 星队长的考勤能导入钉钉数据吗？
答: 可以。工资表的考勤可以导入钉钉、企业微信导出的表；某个月没有导入、且考勤规则已开启时，会自动用星队长打卡的结果算底薪折算和考勤扣款。

## TK 剪辑团队怎么管？把派品、交片、审片、发布串成一条线
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-video-editing-workflow?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK 剪辑团队怎么管？把派品、领任务、交片审片、发布登记和数据回看串成 1 条线。本文给出完整流程和管理节奏，讲清任务池、按帧审片、实时办公室怎么用，适合几个人到几十人规模的 TikTok 带货剪辑团队。

问: TK剪辑团队管理的核心是什么？
答: 核心是让每条视频的状态看得见。把派品、领取、剪辑、交片、审片、发布、登记固定成一条流程，每一步有记录、有负责人，卡住的事情能被及时发现，而不是靠群消息和口头汇报。

问: 派品用指定还是任务池好？
答: 两种结合用。重点品、需要特定风格的品指定到人或小组；量大、要求不高的品放进任务池，定好名额和可领取的小组，谁有空谁领。派出后都要跟进领取情况和截止日期。

问: 审片意见怎么写才有用？
答: 意见要具体到时间点和问题。比如「00:03 字幕挡住了商品」，比「节奏不对」有用得多。再配一份固定的审片清单，检查开头、卖点、字幕、音乐、合规和结尾引导，审片标准就不会因人而异。

问: 为什么要做发布登记？
答: 因为员工报的发布数需要能核对。发布登记记录哪个账号发了几条、剪的什么品，再用账号同步到的作品核对；同步还没到的标为还没同步，不当成没发。它还能把剪的品和后续出单连起来复盘。

问: 星队长审片的视频会一直保存吗？
答: 视频文件不会一直保存。通过或被新版本替换 7 天后删除视频文件，打回后 30 天没再上传也会删除；审片意见和记录一直保留。通过的成片建议及时下载并发布。

问: 实时办公室会不会让员工觉得被监控？
答: 关键看怎么用。状态由员工自己点，用来协作和了解进度，而不是打分。建议提前和团队说明用途，只对持续落后的情况沟通，偶尔休息不必追究，大家才愿意如实更新。

## 带货团队日报怎么写？五块内容，一份模板
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-team-daily-report?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

带货团队日报怎么写？按 5 块写：整体情况、亮点、各部门、员工明细、需要处理的事。本文附一份 TK 团队可以直接复制的日报模板和周报写法，并讲清订单按美国日期、出勤按北京日期这两个统计口径。

问: 带货团队日报怎么写？
答: 按五块写：整体情况（利润、出单、剪辑、发布、出勤、账号）、亮点、各部门情况、员工明细、需要处理的事。结论放在前面，数字有来源，每个问题都写明谁来处理，比员工各自报数清楚得多。

问: 美区带货团队的日报什么时候发合适？
答: 北京时间下午 4 点半以后再发前一天的日报。按 GMT-8（TikTok App 数据页和星队长的口径），美国的一天在北京时间每天下午 4 点才结束，上午发的出单数字不完整，下午还会涨。

问: 团队日报里要写利润吗？
答: 老板版要写，负责人版不写。利润、成本属于经营信息，通常只给老板看；部门负责人看自己部门的出单、剪辑、出勤和问题就够了。分版本写，既保证信息完整，也控制敏感数据的范围。

问: 周报和日报有什么区别？
答: 周报要回答变化、排名和下周动作。它用本周合计和上周对比，列出部门和员工排名，并把没解决的问题带到下周、写明负责人。周报建议周一下午出，那时上周的美国订单已经收齐。

问: 星队长的日报可以复制发群吗？
答: 可以。星队长的文字日报支持一键复制全文，复制出来是纯文本，按整体情况、亮点、各部门情况、员工明细、需要处理五块排好，直接粘贴到群里或文档里即可。

问: 星队长日报里的数据从哪来？
答: 来自系统里已有的记录。出单和利润与经营核算同一套口径，剪辑完成来自员工的完成 +1 和每日目标，出勤来自打卡，发布来自同步到的作品和发布登记，员工不需要另外填报。

## 爆款视频怎么拆？按开头、卖点、转化拆开看
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-viral-video-breakdown?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

爆款视频怎么拆？按开头、卖点、转化 3 段拆：先选视频，再逐段看它怎么抓人、怎么讲清卖点、怎么促成下单。本文附一份带货视频脚本模板，以及用星队长工具箱识别台词、翻译、整理可复用模板的方法。

问: TikTok爆款视频拆解拆什么？
答: 拆逻辑，不拆画面。重点看三段：开头前 3 秒用什么留人，中间用哪些卖点和证据讲清商品，结尾用什么引导下单。最后整理成能照着拍的脚本模板，换成自己的商品和素材再做。

问: 带货视频脚本一般怎么写？
答: 常用五段结构：开头说痛点或展示结果，放大痛点，讲两到三个卖点并配演示，用效果或细节建立信任，最后一句话说清为什么现在买并引导点击商品。每段秒数按视频长度调整。

问: 选哪些爆款视频来拆比较好？
答: 选同品类、近期发布、明显在带货、播放达到门槛的视频。播放和成交都不错的最值得拆；只靠娱乐性爆的视频适合学开头，不适合学转化。每个品选 3 到 5 条拆透就够了。

问: 星队长的爆款拆解支持哪些视频？
答: 支持 TikTok 视频链接，也支持上传本地视频文件。系统会识别台词并翻译，再拆成开头、主体、行动引导三段，给出卖点、爆的原因和可复用模板，拆过的记录都会保存。

问: 爆款拆解能预测我的视频会不会爆吗？
答: 不能。星队长的拆解基于视频台词整理，不包含画面分析，也不代表播放或成交预测。它的作用是帮你看懂别人的视频为什么有效，最终效果还要靠自己的发布数据来验证。

问: 照着爆款视频拍会不会违规？
答: 学逻辑一般没问题，搬运才有风险。可以借鉴开头类型、卖点顺序和转化方式，但素材、台词、演员要用自己的。直接下载重发或盗用素材，可能被判定为非原创，也可能侵犯原作者权利。

## TikTok带货样品管理怎么做？每个月几百件商家寄样怎么管才不漏拍丢件
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-sample-management?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok带货样品管理怎么做？每个月几百件商家寄样怎么管才不会漏拍、丢件，核心是把寄样放进「申领登记、物流签收、72小时交片、出单核销」4步台账，绑定商家、商品ID与领用人，盯紧到样交片率≥85%与平均3天出片时长，区分免费寄样与自购样品成本。

问: TikTok带货样品管理最核心的考核指标是什么？
答: 核心看两项：一是「到样交片率」（已签收样品在规定时间内产出挂车视频的比例，建议及格线定在 85% 以上）；二是「平均到样出片时长」（从包裹签收到首条视频发布的天数，建议控制在 72 小时以内）。

问: 商家寄来的样品太多，前台签收后怎么避免找不到人领？
答: 要求商务在商家寄出时就把物流单号、商品名和指定领用人录进样品台账；包裹到件搜单号核对后，当场在包装盒贴上「领用人 + 签收日」标签并通知本人领走。

问: 运营领了样品超过 3 天还没拍视频怎么办？
答: 台账标出「已签收超 72 小时未交片」提醒后，组长在早会核实原因：若是排期忙不过来，当天把实物样品转派给组内其他剪辑；若是商品本身有问题，由商务反馈商家结案。

问: 团队自己花钱买的测款样品，怎么和商家免费寄样区分记账？
答: 在台账里将来源标为「自购样品」并填入采购金额与归属小组，计入该小组当月经营成本；商家免费寄样记成本为 0，重点考核交片履约率。

问: 同一个爆款样品，多个小组都想拿来拍实拍视频怎么排？
答: 首轮由申领人所在小组在 48 小时内完成拍摄，随后将样品放入「公共爆款样品架」，其他小组按半天为单位登记借用实拍，拍完归位。

问: 星队长怎么帮团队跟进样品从寄出到出片的全过程？
答: 在星队长商务中心登记寄样与物流单号后，可实时切换待寄出、运送中、已签收、已出片状态，到样后衔接团队品库派发剪辑任务，并统计每件样品后续带来的真实订单。

## TikTok美区墨西哥巴西多站点管理：对齐三国时区、币种与团队分工
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-multi-country-operations?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok美区墨西哥巴西多站点管理怎么做？同时做美区、墨西哥和巴西站点，时区、币种和团队分工管理按3条规则对齐：美区（GMT-8，北京时间16:00换天，USD）、墨西哥（GMT-6，14:00换天，MXN）、巴西（GMT-3，11:00换天，BRL）分站点建组看数，大盘折算美元汇总，对账保留本币。

问: TikTok美区墨西哥巴西多站点管理时，三个站点的换天时间分别是北京时间几点？
答: 美区（US，固定 GMT-8）是北京时间每天 16:00 换天；墨西哥（MX，GMT-6）是北京时间每天 14:00 换天；巴西（BR，GMT-3）是北京时间每天 11:00 换天。复盘某站点昨天的完整数据，建议等该站点换天半小时后再看。

问: 墨西哥和巴西的订单金额是比索（MXN）和雷亚尔（BRL），怎么跟美区一起看业绩？
答: 日常盯单站点运营时看该站点的订单数与折算美元 GMV，横向对比各组人效和大盘总业绩时统一按美元（USD）口径汇总；跟当地店铺商家核对线下结算单时，则按店铺原始结算币种逐单核对。

问: 美区已经跑爆的带货视频，可以直接搬到墨西哥站点发吗？
答: 不能原片直接重发。但可以复用美区验证过的「前 3 秒视觉痛点 + 中段演示结构」，重新剪辑画面并把口播配音与字幕改写成地道的拉美西班牙语，在墨区测款成功率很高。

问: 同一个运营员工适合同时管美区号和墨西哥号吗？
答: 初期试水可由 1 到 2 名骨干兼管；一旦单站点账号超过 15 个，建议拆分为独立的美区组和墨区组，因为两地的出单高峰、语言字幕和选品价格带完全不同，专人专站效率更高。

问: 星队长顶栏切到墨西哥后，美区的爆单提醒还会弹出来干扰吗？
答: 不会。星队长的爆单预警按国家分开拉取与统计，顶栏切到墨西哥就只显示墨西哥的爆单战报与未读数，切回美区才显示美区记录。

问: 怎么在星队长里把美区英文视频快速改成墨西哥西语脚本？
答: 在星队长「工具箱 → 声音转文字与翻译」或「爆款拆解」里粘贴美区视频链接，目标语言选「拉美西班牙语」，系统会自动识别英文原声并输出带时间轴的西语译文。

## TikTok带货脚本翻译本地化怎么做？转写原声并改写成地道英语和西语
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-multilingual-script-localization?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok带货脚本翻译本地化怎么做？国内剪辑团队不懂外语，把带货脚本准确改写成地道英语和西班牙语按4步走：先用声音转文字提取3条本土爆款原声，对齐开头、卖点、引导3段中文语义，换算美制（英寸/盎司）与公制单位，再用6到10词短句改写并逐帧校对字幕。

问: TikTok带货脚本翻译本地化最忌讳什么？
答: 最忌讳拿中文商品详情页的长句子直接字对字机翻。机翻出来的书面长句不口语、单位没换算，母语买家前 3 秒就会划走；应先转写本土爆款原声，再用 6 到 10 个词的短句改写。

问: 剪辑完全不懂英语和西班牙语，怎么保证剪出来的视频音画对得上？
答: 用带中英文、中西文对照的声音转写与拆解工具，把每一句外语台词对应的中文意思和需要配的画面动作（如「00:04 展示防水测试」）标在脚本上，剪辑看中文备注就能精准卡点。

问: 做美区和做墨西哥站点的脚本，在单位和用词上有什么区别？
答: 美区用美式英语和英制单位（英寸 inch、盎司 oz、磅 lb、华氏度 °F）；墨西哥用拉美西班牙语（第二人称复数用 ustedes）和公制单位（厘米 cm、克 g、毫升 ml）。

问: 可以直接拿竞争对手英文爆款视频的原声台词一字不改照读吗？
答: 不建议一字不差照搬。可以保留对方验证过的「痛点切入角度 + 卖点顺序 + 常用口语短语」，但更换具体场景数字、调换句式并用自己的实拍镜头与配音重新演绎。

问: 星队长的声音转文字与翻译支持哪些语言和文件格式？
答: 支持直接粘贴 TikTok 视频链接，或上传本地音频、视频文件（如 mp3、mp4、mov 等），自动识别视频原声并翻译为简体中文、英语或拉美西班牙语。

问: 在星队长里拆解或转写过的视频脚本，团队成员能共享复用吗？
答: 可以。拆解和转写记录会自动保存在工具箱历史里，组长在品库派发剪辑任务时还可把爆款参考视频的台词与翻译直接附在任务单上，全组剪辑打开任务即可查看。

## TikTok运营离职账号交接怎么做？先停用保历史，再一键移交账号与手机
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-agency-member-offboarding-handover?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok运营离职账号交接，按任务、权限、设备和历史记录逐项核对。账号权限和工作设备按公司规定交接，明确接收人与生效日期，再停用原成员登录；保留历史业绩与提成，不用永久删除代替交接。

问: TikTok运营离职账号交接时，为什么推荐「停用」而不是「永久删除」？
答: 「停用」会立即关闭该员工的登录权限、不占在职席位，同时完整保留他过去的订单归属、绩效和工资条记录；而「永久删除」无法撤销，历史记录只剩名字后带「（已删除）」，不利于月底算清离职薪资与跨月对账。

问: 离职时，账号权限和工作设备怎么交接？
答: 按公司规定分别核对账号负责人、授权权限、未完成任务和设备保管人；指定接收人，记录交接日期，再停用原成员登录，保留历史记录。

问: 如果暂时还没招到接手的新运营，离职人手里的账号怎么处理？
答: 在交接时选择「留作未分配」。账号保留历史作品与订单，由组长安排临时负责人或稍后分配；工作设备由行政按公司规定核对收回或重新领用。

问: 账号移交给新运营后，之前那个员工在岗时出的订单算谁的业绩？
答: 按交接生效时间切分：移交之前已经产生的历史订单和佣金仍保留在原员工的历史业绩里；移交生效之后新产生的订单自动计入新接手运营名下。

问: 要离职的人还是某个小组的组长，直接点离职会怎样？
答: 系统会提示该成员仍是某分组的负责人，需先在「管理分组」里为该组指定新的负责人，再执行离职停用，防止整个小组的日常审片和审批断档。

问: 停用移入「已离职」的员工，如果后来返聘还能恢复吗？
答: 可以。在「团队 → 成员」切换到「已离职」列表，找到该成员点击「恢复」，选择要恢复到的现有分组或新建分组，即可重新开启登录权限。

## TikTok商家定向链接与佣金管理：配好三级佣金率与改价降佣预警
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-partner-brand-targeted-links-and-commission?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok商家定向链接与佣金管理怎么做？同时对接几十家合作商家和定向链接、管好多店铺佣金率并防止商家暗中降佣，靠2道防线：在品库给商品绑死定向链接与加橱窗二维码扫码挂车，在商务中心按「投流佣金率 > 单品佣金率 > 店铺默认佣金率」3级优先级自动算账并开启改价与佣金下调提醒。

问: TikTok商家定向链接与佣金管理最核心的两件事是什么？
答: 一是管住入口：在品库给商品绑好定向链接和加橱窗二维码，让运营扫码挂车不挂错店；二是管住算法：按「投流佣金率 > 单品佣金率 > 店铺默认佣金率」三级规则自动计算每笔订单的线下补佣，并开启降佣提醒。

问: 运营怎么避免在 TikTok 挂车时误挂成低佣的公开计划？
答: 禁止运营自己在手机选品广场盲搜商品名挂车。统一由商务把定向短链和「加橱窗二维码」上传到星队长品库，运营在领到的任务详情里直接用工作手机扫码加橱窗。

问: 十几张商品的加橱窗二维码图片，怎么一次快速传进品库？
答: 把电脑上的二维码图片文件名改成对应的「商品 ID」或「商品名」，在星队长品库点「批量传二维码」拖入图片，系统会自动按商品 ID 或名称对上号，点保存即可。

问: 同一个商家既有自然流订单又有投流订单，线下佣金率不一样怎么设？
答: 在合作商家店铺设置里填好常规佣金率和投流佣金率，并在结算设置开启「投流订单单独算佣金」，系统会自动把自然流单和投流单按各自费率分开核算。

问: 商家在半夜悄悄把佣金率调低了或者涨价了，怎么及时发现？
答: 在星队长「偏好设置 → 早报和提醒」里开启「商家改价」和「佣金下调」开关，系统检测到变动后会主动发消息提醒负责人与商务（23:00–08:00 期间静默进站内消息）。

问: 新加进合作商家档案的店铺，以前出的历史订单能自动补算线下佣金吗？
答: 能。在星队长里把店铺或商品绑定到合作商家并设好佣金规则后，可对历史订单执行自动匹配重算，把此前漏归属的订单纳入对账单。

## TikTok有播放不出单怎么诊断？看懂播放中位数与三层带货转化漏斗
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-account-conversion-funnel-diagnosis?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok有播放不出单怎么诊断？橱窗号视频有播放但不出单，用播放中位数和带货转化漏斗找卡点分2步：先对比「播放中位数（全部作品）」与最高单条占比排除虚假场均，再查「商品曝光、商品点击率（CTR≥2%）、成交转化率（CVR）」3层漏斗，缺点击改前3秒钩子与引导，有点击零成交查售价、运费与库存。

问: TikTok有播放不出单怎么诊断最快？
答: 分两步：先看单号详情页的「播放中位数（全部作品）」和「播放分布」，确认近期带货视频是真的有播放，还是被一条老爆款拉高了平均数；若近期挂车视频真有播放，再看「商品曝光 → 点击率 → 转化率」漏斗，点黄车的人少改视频开头和引导，点进去不买查商品价格、运费和库存。

问: 为什么账号「平均每条播放」有上万，但最近发的视频每条才几百播放？
答: 因为单条几十万播放的历史爆款会把算术平均数大幅拉高。查看「播放中位数（全部作品）」才能滤掉极端爆款的干扰，看清该账号目前发一条普通视频的真实流量水平。

问: 带货视频的商品点击率（CTR）和成交转化率（CVR）怎么算？
答: 在星队长单号详情页里，点击率 = 商品点击次数 ÷ 商品曝光次数（反映视频内容对商品的种草吸引力）；转化率 = 成交件数 ÷ 商品点击次数（反映商品详情页的价格、运费与评价承接力）。

问: 商品点击率很高，但成交转化率几乎为 0，是什么原因？
答: 说明观众已经被视频种草并点开了黄车，但在下单页被劝退了。常见原因包括商家涨价、高额门槛运费、主力颜色尺码断货、评分过低，或者视频里口播的价格优惠与实际结算价不一致。

问: 怎么在同一账号下快速核对某位剪辑员工做的视频效果？
答: 让剪辑在发布标题里加上固定个人代号前缀（如 zy11.04），在星队长单号详情页作品列表的「标题或关键词」框输入 zy，即可筛出该员工在这条号上发的所有视频并对比播放与销售额。

问: 单号详情页里的「持续监控」按钮有什么用？
答: 长期不发新作品的老号在日常批量刷新时默认会降低刷新频率；如果某个老号虽然断更，但以前发的爆款视频每天还在持续出长尾订单，点上「持续监控」后每次批量刷新都会照常带上它。

## TikTok 新号前 30 天发片排期怎么做？四阶段起号节奏、测款配比与避坑清单
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-new-account-first-30-days-content-schedule?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 新号前 30 天发片排期，先查 Creator Pilot Program 状态和当前额度，再按建档、测款、复盘、稳定产出四阶段安排原创内容。日／周额度因考察期类型而异；四阶段与内容配比只是团队建议，不代表官方推荐规则，也不预示出单结果。

问: 新号第一天就可以挂商品吗？
答: 先确认电商权限、考察期状态、可用商品和当前额度。没有统一要求先发几天无挂车视频的规则，也不能只看粉丝数推断已获全部权限。

问: 新号每天最多能发多少条带货视频？
答: 美区普通联盟达人考察期最多每天 3 条商品推广视频、每周 3 场带货直播；延长考察期是最多每周 3 条商品推广视频、1 场直播。最终按账号内当前状态与额度安排。

问: 新号没有出单，要立即换号吗？
答: 先核对授权、平台通知、商品链接、点击与成交漏斗，以及素材和商品页。缺少订单不等于账号被限制，不按固定视频数量武断换号。

问: 新号首轮测款要看哪种店铺门槛？
答: 美区联盟达人考察期可推广的店铺表现须至少 95%，具体以选品广场可见商品和账号权限为准。商品星级、五分制 SPS 与该门槛不能混用。

问: 怎么跟踪新号前 30 天有没有回本？
答: 为账号登记启动投入与入库日期，按账号查看累计净佣金和回本进度；结合退款和实际到账核对，收入不足或缺失时不承诺预计天数。

问: 7:3 挂车比例和四阶段排期是官方要求吗？
答: 不是。四阶段和内容配比属于团队排期示例，必须服从账号实际额度与内容政策，不能当作平台推荐规则或出单保证。

## TikTok 带货团队提成阶梯与奖金怎么定？三类岗位提成模型与防刷单条款
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-team-commission-tiers-and-bonus-models?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 带货团队提成阶梯与奖金怎么定？必须以“扣除退货、投流与平台费后的实收净佣金”为唯一基数，按 3 类岗位分层设计：达人主播拿底薪加 8%～20% 三档净佣金提成，账号运营拿回本后 10%～18% 阶梯分红，剪辑编导拿基础合格计件费加单视频净佣金超 $200 的爆款悬赏。

问: TikTok带货团队提成阶梯应该按 GMV 算还是按净佣金算？
答: 必须按扣除退货退款、付费投流广告费与平台扣点后的「实收净佣金」计算。按账面 GMV 提成会导致员工盲目冲高退货、低佣金甚至亏本投流的虚胖流水，导致公司账面热闹却实际亏损。

问: 账号运营、达人主播和视频剪辑三类岗位的提成模型有什么区别？
答: 账号运营采用「扣减账号与设备成本后的净佣金超额累进提成（10%～18%）」；达人主播采用「底薪 + 三档净佣金提成（8%～16%）+ 开播达标系数」；视频剪辑采用「审片合格基础计件费 + 单视频净佣金破 $200 阶梯爆款奖」。

问: 一个出单爆款视频由运营选品、主播实拍、剪辑成片，提成怎么分才不打架？
答: 不要让三个人去抢同一个百分比池子。运营按所管账号月度总净佣金拿阶梯提成（10%～18%），主播按出镜账号净佣金拿达人提成（8%～12%），剪辑拿合格计件费加单条爆款悬赏，三者之和控制在公司总净佣金的 25%～32% 以内。

问: 上个月已经发了提成的订单，这个月买家退货了怎么扣回？
答: 在薪酬制度中明确「跨月退货滚动冲抵」规则：每月 5 号算上月提成时，系统以最新结算状态为准，上月已发提成但本月发生退货退款的负向佣金自动并入当月净佣金池抵扣。

问: 小组长的管理提成怎么设才不会让他只顾自己的号、不管组员？
答: 把「全组月度净佣金达成率 ≥ 80%」和「组内活跃出单账号占比 ≥ 70%」同时设为组长管理津贴的解锁条件，逼着组长帮组员诊断断更号和不出单号。

问: 怎么在星队长里自动生成带阶梯提成和考勤扣款的工资条？
答: 在星队长「团队 → 薪资配置」为成员设好底薪、考勤规则与净佣金提成阶梯，系统会自动关联打卡出勤天数与名下账号净佣金产出，一键生成明细工资条。

## TikTok 带货机构月末关账清单：核对订单、成本、薪资与收款
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-agency-month-end-closing-checklist?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok带货机构月末关账清单，按订单口径、退款与商家对账、成本、薪资、利润与收款逐项核对。文中的五天安排是团队流程示例；先明确数据来源、时区和同步状态，再锁定已确认记录，不把应收佣金当作已经到账。

问: TikTok带货机构月末关账的 5 天标准流程是怎样的？
答: 每月 1 号冻结上月 GMT-8 订单快照并清洗退货单；2 号核对商家定向佣金并签发对账单；3 号归集账号投入、工作手机、网络、样品与投流五大成本；4 号锁死考勤并按净佣金阶梯出工资条；5 号输出机构、小组与单号三张月度利润表。

问: 月底最后一天产生的订单，还没发货也没过退货期，关账时怎么算？
答: 采用「当月预估 + 次月冲抵」机制：月底在途订单先按该类目历史平均退货率（如美区服饰预扣 15%、家居预扣 8%）计提退货准备金算入当月预估净利；次月 1 号关账时再按实际完结状态多退少补。

问: 商家线下补佣在每月 5 号还没打款到账，算不算当月利润？
答: 利润表建议采用「权责发生制」与「收付实现制」双行展示：只要 2 账号来源家书面确认了对账单金额，即可计入当月「应收经营净利」评估团队业绩；同时单独列示「实收现金流净额」，大额线下提成待商家实际回款后发放。

问: 账号投入花的钱和工作手机采购费，在月度利润表里是一次性扣完还是分月摊销？
答: 建议在星队长里按资产周期分摊：工作手机按 180 天折旧、网络线路按 30 天月租自动计入每日成本；账号成本则在「账号回本」模块逐日用该号产生的净佣金对冲，未回本即封禁的差额记入当月封号亏损。

问: 为什么每月关账前必须先跑一遍「未归属商家订单」检查？
答: 因为运营当月可能测爆了某家合作商家的其它链接或新品，如果商务忘了把新商品 ID 绑进合作商家档案，系统只会按线上公开佣金算账，漏掉 10%～15% 的线下补佣。

问: 5 号出完月度利润表后，老板最应该看哪三个数字？
答: 一看「全团净利率（净利润 ÷ 总佣金收入）」是否守住安全线；二看「人效净贡献」揪出亏损小组；三看「账号投入批次存活回本率」决定下个月如何安排账号、内容和人员投入。

## TikTok 带货团队周复盘会怎么开？60 分钟议程、数据看板与跟进动作
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-team-weekly-review-meeting-agenda?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 带货团队周复盘会怎么开？控制在 60 分钟内，按 4 段议程推进：看组别净佣金达成（15 分钟）、拆爆单样本与断更异常（20 分钟）、审商家寄样履约与逾期账单（15 分钟）、定本周排期与账号换绑动作（10 分钟）。会前从工作台拉好 4 张同源表，会中不念流水账。

问: TikTok带货团队周复盘会60分钟怎么分配时间最合理？
答: 按四段计时：第 0～15 分钟看各小组净佣金达成率与出单号占比；第 15～35 分钟拆解上周 TOP 2 爆款视频基因与断更掉量账号；第 35～50 分钟核对商家寄样交片进度与逾期未回款账单；第 50～60 分钟敲定本周排期与账号换绑动作。

问: 开周复盘会前，组长必须提前准备好哪 4 张表？
答: 会前 30 分钟从星队长拉好 4 张同源视图：部门与小组周度达成表、上周爆款视频与高转化商品榜、账号断更与低产掉车预警清单、商家寄样滞留与逾期账单表。

问: 周复盘会应该定在周五下午还是周一上午开？
答: 建议实行「周五下午 15 分钟收数预审、周一上午 60 分钟正式拍板」。经过周末两天的订单转化与退货沉淀后，周一上午拉出的整周 GMT-8 净佣金与出单数据最完整，最适合直接拍板新一周排期。

问: 运营在周会上总把不出单归咎于「平台最近没流量」，主管怎么回应？
答: 用星队长里的组内横向数据回应：把同周期、同类目下依然正常出单的兄弟账号拉出来，并排对比两者的「周发片条数、播放中位数、商品点击率与成交转化率」，把讨论拉回具体的改开头钩子或换选品动作上。

问: 3 到 5 人的小型带货团队也需要按这 4 段议程开周会吗？
答: 小团队可把时长从 60 分钟压缩到 30 分钟，但「看净佣金达成 → 拆爆款与断更 → 核对样品与账单 → 定本周动作」四个模块一个都不能少，越早养成只看同源工作台数据的习惯，后续扩组越顺畅。

问: 周会上拍板的账号换绑和爆款跟拍，怎么确保散会后不落空？
答: 会后 1 小时内直接在星队长「账号」页完成低效号换绑，在「团队 → 品库与任务」把二创脚本派发到人，并在周三中午结合每日 16:30 自动日报做 10 分钟进度点检。

## TikTok 多国达人合作与外币结算怎么做？汇损控制、汇率锁定期与对账单规范
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-multi-country-partner-settlement-and-currency?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 多国达人合作与外币结算怎么做？核心是在合同中锁死 3 项汇率与费用规则：按站点原币种（USD、GBP、MYR 等）生成业务对账单，明确折算汇率基准日与银行牌价来源，约定跨境电汇或平台通道手续费承担方，并在工作台按站点隔离对账与实收核销。

问: TikTok多国达人合作与外币结算最核心的3条规则是什么？
答: 第一，业务明细与对账单严格按各站点原币种（USD/MXN/BRL/GBP/MYR 等）独立核算；第二，合同写死折算汇率基准日（如每月出账确认日央行中间价）与牌价来源；第三，明确跨境电汇或平台通道手续费承担方，并在工作台登记实收金额。

问: 同一个品牌同时委托我们做美区和墨西哥区，能合并成一张人民币对账单吗？
答: 可以出一份汇总封面方便老板审批，但对账单明细必须按「美区（USD）分表」和「墨西哥（MXN）分表」拆开列示各自的代表订单、退货扣减额与对应币种折算汇率，切忌在明细行里直接把美元和比索混加。

问: 商家确认对账单那天汇率是 7.20，拖了半个月打款时跌到 7.05，差价谁出？
答: 只要合同锁死了「以每月对账确认日的银行中间价作为唯一折算基准」，折算后的人民币应收总额在确认日就已经固定，商家晚打款不能要求重算汇率；若按原币种美元收款，则应在合同约定逾期滞纳金对冲晚到账损失。

问: 跨境收款平台扣除的 0.5%～0.7% 提现结汇手续费怎么记账？
答: 商家打款路径上的电汇中间行扣费应要求商家足额覆盖；机构自己从跨境收款平台提现回国内银行卡的结汇费，可在星队长「核算 → 日常开支」中单独记入通道手续费科目，并在前期报价时包入服务费水位。

问: 给海外本地达人或兼职模特发外币佣金分成时，什么时候结算最安全？
答: 基础视频拍摄费（Flat Fee）可在成片发布验收后按周或半月结，但挂钩带货额的佣金分成（Commission Share）必须等订单确认收货且度过无理由退货期后，在次月关账时按实收净佣金结算。

问: 怎么在星队长里冻结多国商家的对账单汇率并跟踪首尾款？
答: 在星队长「商务中心 → 结算单」生成周期账单时，订单、GMV、佣金和当期约定汇率会一起冻结；首款、尾款什么时候到账、有没有逾期都会在一张表里自动标示。

## TikTok爆款视频跑出单后怎么快速二创放量？黄金 48 小时衍生矩阵打法
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-viral-video-follow-up-and-remake-workflow?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok爆款视频跑出单后怎么快速二创放量？在出单后的黄金 48 小时内执行 4 步衍生流程：第 1～6 小时置顶评论区痛点问答并提取转化结构，第 6～24 小时按“锁死中间转化演示、仅换前 3 秒钩子或场景”拆出 5 条变体脚本，第 24～48 小时分发给同组矩阵号实拍上线。

问: TikTok爆款视频跑出单后的黄金48小时应该分哪几步跟进？
答: 分四步：第 1～6 小时置顶评论区痛点问答并在星队长工具箱提取三段式母本；第 6～24 小时按「锁死中间核心演示、仅换前 3 秒钩子或场景」拆出 5 条变体脚本；第 24～48 小时分给矩阵号真机实拍错峰上线；48 小时后按点击率与转化率赛马留强。

问: 原视频还在持续出单涨播放，同一个账号能立刻发第二条同款商品的二创视频吗？
答: 完全可以。只要第二条视频是重新拍摄的独立镜头（如用回复第一条视频热门评论的方式开场），不仅不会抢原片流量，反而会在买家点进账号主页时形成连环种草效应，拉高整体转化率。

问: 团队手里只有 1 件样品，怎么让 3 个账号在 24 小时内都拍出原创视频？
答: 采用「分时段轮拍 + 强场景隔离」：规定 A 运营上午在办公桌拍开箱实测，B 运营中午在阳台自然光下拍细节微距对比，C 运营下午在居家角落拍痛点解决反差。2 小时轮转一次，一天即可产出 3 套画面帧完全不同的纯实拍素材。

问: 什么是「1 拆 5」控制变量二创法？为什么不能把整条视频全部重改？
答: 把整条视频推翻重拍很容易删掉原片最能促单的核心演示镜头。控制变量法要求锁死中间 5～18 秒已被验证高转化的产品演示逻辑，只分别替换前 3 秒视觉钩子、拍摄场景、评论区回复切入角、人设语气或倒叙结构。

问: 什么样的视频才算达到了值得全组跟拍的触发标准？
答: 看两档信号：一是播放量 2,000～5,000 但已出 5 单以上、商品点击率超 3.5% 的高转化潜伏款，先在原号换开头重拍；二是 24 小时破 2 万播放、出单超 20 单的起量爆款，立即启动全组 3～5 个矩阵号跟拍。

问: 什么时候应该果断停止围绕同一个爆品继续拍二创？
答: 当新发变体视频的商品点击率与千次播放成交额连续 3 条跌破原片一半、商家库存断码或暗降佣金、或者商品差评与退货率明显抬头时，应立即停拍并切向下一款测款商品。

## TikTok带货术语表：60个带货团队常用黑话、指标与结算口径一次讲清
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-creator-agency-glossary?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok带货术语表把 TikTok Shop 达人带货团队每天都在用的 60 个高频词按「账号权限、视频选品、订单时区、商务结算、成本回本、团队管理」6 大板块整理成册（每板块含核心词与日常口语黑话）：从橱窗号、挂车、掉车、播放中位数、起号、卡播、暗降佣金，到自然流与投流单、线上线下佣金、首尾款、回本率与三级权限隔离，每个词用大白话讲透定义与计算口径。

问: 为什么带货团队内部要先统一这份TikTok带货术语表？
答: 很多团队月底对账吵架、复盘鸡同鸭讲，是因为有人把 GMV 当收入、把平均播放当中位数、把美西时间当北京时间。先把这 60 个核心词的口径定死，运营、剪辑、商务和财务才能拿着同一把尺子说话。

问: GMV、线上佣金、线下补佣和结算净佣金有什么区别？
答: GMV 是买家付给商家的总货款；线上佣金是平台按联盟比例结给达人的钱；线下补佣是合作商家另外单独补给机构的钱；结算净佣金则是线上加线下佣金扣掉退货退款和机构自掏广告费后的真实净收入。

问: 看账号流量健不健康，为什么要用「播放中位数」而不是「平均播放量」？
答: 因为一条几十万播放的老爆款会把算术平均播放量拉高十倍，掩盖最近 20 条带货视频只有两三百播放的事实；播放中位数取正中间那条作品，能真实反映今天发片的基础流量池。

问: 「掉车」和「橱窗封禁」怎么快速区分？
答: 点开同一个账号下其他挂车视频：如果其他视频的小黄车还在，只是单条视频商品链接没了，属于「掉车」（多因商家断货或单视频违规）；如果全号所有小黄车和主页商店入口同时消失，属于「橱窗封禁」。

问: 什么叫「首尾款分批结算」和「跨期退货冲抵」？
答: 为防范美区 15～30 天退货窗口带来的坏账，机构通常在对账确认后先收商家 80% 首款，留 20% 尾款；上期已结清订单若在本期发生退货，凭原订单号在尾款或本期结算单中专项扣回，称为跨期退货冲抵。

问: 在星队长工作台里，这些术语指标需要在表格里自己写公式算吗？
答: 不需要。星队长已将播放中位数、点击率（CTR）、转化率（CVR）、投流/自然流归因、四层线下佣金、账号回本周期和分段阶梯提成全部内置算好，团队打开对应页面即可直接查看或用[《怎么用星队长助手问数据》](/tutorials/ask-star-captain-assistant)随时查询。

## TikTok大促与黑五怎么备战？带货团队提前 30 天锁佣、囤样与排片清单
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-seasonal-campaign-and-bfcm-preparation?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok大促与黑五怎么备战？提前 30 天按「4 周倒计时」推进：T-30 到 T-21 商务锁定核心商家的黑五专属定向高佣与安全库存（≥1,000 件）；T-20 到 T-11 完成寄样签收并按每个主推品储备 5 套差异化脚本；T-10 到 T-4 铺发预热测款视频筛出点击率（CTR）≥ 3.5% 的种子视频；爆发期盯紧爆单提醒与掉车巡检。

问: TikTok大促与黑五怎么备战，提前多久开始最合理？
答: 建议至少提前 30 天启动：前 10 天（T-30～T-21）商务锁主推品、谈专属高佣与查库存；中间 10 天（T-20～T-11）收齐样品并拍好备片；大促前 10 天（T-10～T-4）发片测款筛出高点击率种子视频；大促爆发周全力二创放量。

问: 大促选品时，商家库存至少要有多少才敢安排矩阵号主推？
答: 核心主推 SKU（主力颜色和尺码）真实可售库存建议不少于 1,000 件，普通测款品不少于 300 件。大促一旦跑出爆款视频，几百件库存几小时就会卖空导致视频掉车，白白浪费后续推荐流量。

问: 为什么要提前 7～10 天发大促预热视频，而不是等到黑五当天再发？
答: 短视频推荐算法需要 3～7 天逐步放大流量池，且美区买家习惯在大促前先把心仪商品加购或点进橱窗比价。提前 7～10 天发片测款，才能让跑出来的种子视频正好在大促降价当天迎来流量与转化的双高峰。

问: 大促期间某条视频突然爆单但商家马上要断货了，怎么紧急处理？
答: 立即做两件事：一是联系商家紧急把预留库存加进该 PID，或确认同店同款备用链接；二是用原爆款脚本快速换新链接重剪发布，并在原视频评论区置顶引导买家去主页新置顶视频下单。

问: 大促期间商家加大了广告投流，和自然流订单怎么分开算佣金？
答: 在星队长「实时出单」与「商务中心」开启投流订单单独算佣金，系统会按 SKU 佣金归因自动区分自然流单与店铺广告投流单，分别套用大促自然流费率与投流费率，避免月底对账扯皮。

问: 大促结束后什么时候跟商家对账结款最稳妥？
答: 建议在大促结束第 7～10 天拉取首轮对账单先收 80% 首款（此时发货前取消单已基本出清），预留 20% 尾款在大促后 15～30 天退货窗口稳定后再按净成交额结清。

## TikTok新人剪辑和运营怎么带？7天入职带教排期与首周转正考核标准
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-creator-team-new-hire-7-day-onboarding-sop?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok新人剪辑和运营怎么带？执行标准化的 7 天入职带教 SOP：第 1 天开通最小权限员工账号、领用备用手机并熟读 60 个带货术语；第 2～3 天在工具箱拆解 5 条本组历史出单爆款掌握三段式脚本；第 4～5 天认领成熟爆品并经历组长按帧批注审片；第 6～7 天独立完成日产 3～4 条合格成片与发布登记，按首周一次过审率（≥60%）定级。

问: TikTok新人剪辑和运营怎么带，前三天最忌讳做什么？
答: 最忌讳第一天就丢给新人一堆生僻新品让他自己盲剪。前三天必须先搞懂带货术语、在工具箱拆透 5 条本组已出单爆款的三段结构，并用本组已经在出单的成熟商品练手，才能快速建立正向反馈。

问: 新人完全不懂英语或西语，怎么教他剪出符合海外习惯的带货视频？
答: 让他使用星队长工具箱的音视频台词提取与双语翻译功能：把同行爆款拆成「外语原句 + 中文释义 + 对应画面动作」的双语脚本，剪辑只需盯住动作关键词卡点，并用组长的 60 秒字幕核对清单检查即可。

问: 新人刚入职第一周，应该分给他什么样的 TikTok 账号？
答: 第 1 周建议先分 2～3 个测试号或次主力号练手，并要求在视频标题加上个人前缀（如 zw11.04）。等第 7 天验收确认审片一次过审率 ≥ 60%、挂车操作无误后，再从号库正式增配主力橱窗号。

问: 组长每天自己也要管号看数，怎么避免带新人占掉太多时间？
答: 靠标准化清单和按帧审片省时间：Day 1～3 让新人照着术语表和工具箱历史拆解记录自学练手，组长每天只花 15 分钟在审片台停在具体帧写修改批注，不用坐在新人工位旁手把手盯一整天。

问: 新人试用期前两周还没跑出爆单，怎么判断他到底适不适合留下来？
答: 前两周先看过程指标与前置漏斗：看他能否按时完成每日 3～4 条合格交片、审片被打回的地方第二次还会不会犯、发出的视频播放中位数与商品点击率（CTR）是否达到组内基线。执行力与点击率达标，出单只是时间问题。

问: 新人转正后，底薪和提成在星队长里怎么从试用期切到正式岗？
答: 在「经营核算 → 工资设置」里为试用期和正式剪辑/运营设好岗位薪资模板，新人转正生效当月将其套用正式岗位模板或调整个人覆盖比例，月底即可一键生成带考勤和阶梯提成的工资条。

## TikTok老号没流量怎么盘活？7天重测流程与「救号还是停更」决策标准
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-dormant-account-revival-and-repositioning?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok老号没流量怎么盘活？按「3 步体检 + 7 天重测」走：先查账号橱窗权限与违规记录，再看历史作品近 7 天是否仍有长尾出单（有则开启「持续监控」保住老品收益），最后用 7 天同垂类痛点重测法连发 10～14 条已验证爆品视频。第 7 天播放中位数回到 500 以上且 CTR ≥ 2.5% 即盘活成功，否则停更止损收回设备。

问: TikTok老号断更半个月没发视频了，重新发片前要把以前低播放的视频删掉吗？
答: 不要批量删除或隐藏。只要旧视频没有违规通知，保留原样即可；批量删片不仅会损失潜在的长尾搜索出单，还会破坏账号既有的历史数据连续性。直接按原垂直类目连发高质量新片就能逐步恢复推荐。

问: 怎么判断一个没流量的老号是「被平台限流」还是「选品和内容不行」？
答: 先去 TikTok Seller Center 与达人后台查违规记录，再去单号详情页看近 10 条视频的数据：如果后台 0 违规，且偶尔有一两条视频能跑到 800～1,500 播放但点击率很低，说明账号权重完全正常，纯粹是商品或前 3 秒钩子没吸引力。

问: 老号以前发的爆款视频现在每天还能出三五单，但新发的视频只有 200 播放，怎么处理？
答: 首先在星队长单号详情页给这个号开启「持续监控」，保护老爆款不掉车；其次不要乱改账号类目，围绕那条还在出单的老爆款商品做「评论区痛点答疑视频」或同场景升级款实拍，顺着老爆款的精准买家画像接力起量。

问: 老号原来的类目彻底做不动了，可以直接换个完全不相关的类目发吗？
答: 不建议跨大类目硬切（比如从宠物用品直接切到女装）。如果必须转型，优先切到受众人群高度重合的相邻类目（如厨房小工具切到家居清洁收纳），否则原粉丝和历史标签的极低完播率会拖累新视频推荐。

问: 一个老号重测多久还没起色就应该果断放弃？
答: 以 7 到 10 天（连续发布 12～15 条高质量原创实拍视频）为硬分水岭。若换了本组已验证爆品、重拍了前 3 秒钩子后，播放中位数仍卡在 200 以下且 0 出单，应立即停更止损，把人力和手机转给新号或高潜号。

问: 在星队长里停用一个救不活的老号后，它以前花掉的账号成本和历史订单还在吗？
答: 全部保留。停用老号只是停止日常排片与手动批量刷新消耗，它的账号成本、历史累计净佣金与未回本差额依然完整保留在「经营核算 → 账号回本」表里，确保团队月度利润账真实可查。

## TikTok短视频和直播怎么配合带货？「以短测品、以播切条」双向放量SOP
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-short-video-and-livestream-combo-workflow?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok短视频和直播怎么配合带货？建立「以短测品、以播切条」的 3 步双向飞轮：第一步用矩阵短视频低成本赛马测款，只把商品点击率（CTR）≥ 3.5% 的出单品排进直播间做主推品；第二步在开播前 2 小时发同款预热挂车短视频引流进直播间；第三步在下播后 12 小时内截取主播高转化演示片段，用工具箱提取台词后重剪成 5～8 条短视频分发矩阵号。

问: TikTok短视频和直播怎么配合带货效果最好？
答: 走「以短测品 → 视频预热引流 → 直播切片反哺矩阵」的三步闭环：先用短视频筛出商品点击率（CTR）≥ 3.5% 的好品送进直播间；开播前 2 小时发同品短视频加热人群标签；下播后把主播高转化实测片段重剪成挂车短视频分发矩阵号。

问: 新买来的商品，应该先给主播上直播间测，还是先让剪辑做成短视频测？
答: 优先用短视频测款。拍 3 条 20 秒测试短视频成本极低，48 小时就能看出点击率和转化率；把短视频已经验证能出单的商品再排进直播间黄金档，主播的场均产出和转化率会稳得多。

问: 把直播间录像切成短视频发到矩阵号上，会被平台判定搬运或低质录屏吗？
答: 如果直接截取粗糙录屏原样群发会被判同质化。正确做法是：只截取主播现场硬核演示商品的 8～12 秒精华动作，搭配新拍的 3 秒痛点特写开头、重新用工具箱生成双语字幕卡点，做成节奏紧凑的二创视频。

问: 开播前多久发预热挂车短视频最容易把人推进直播间？
答: 建议在正式开播前 2 小时和前 30 分钟各发一条同主推品的痛点短视频。此时短视频正好进入首波推荐流量池，刷到视频并对商品感兴趣的买家看到头像直播呼吸灯，点进直播间的购买意向极强。

问: 短视频剪辑把直播间切片剪爆了出单，提成算主播的还是算剪辑和运营的？
答: 按角色分段激励、互不抢池子：直播间当场成交的订单计入主播与场控的直播净佣金提成池；下播后剪辑切成短视频发在矩阵号上挂车产生的订单，归属该矩阵号运营与对应切片剪辑的单条爆款奖金。

问: 星队长工具箱能直接拆解直播录像里的外语口播台词吗？
答: 可以。把截取下来的高转化直播片段（mp4 / mov）上传到星队长「工具箱 → 视频拆解 / 台词提取」，系统会自动识别英语或拉美西语台词并翻译成中文，提炼出三段式脚本供剪辑快速成片。

## TikTok合作商家怎么评估分层？用动销、掉车、退货与回款四维指标做ABC分级
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-partner-merchant-tiering-and-kpi-evaluation?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok合作商家怎么评估分层？按商品动销、库存与掉车、推广资格与退货、结算回款四类记录复盘。S/A/B/C 是团队内部管理示例，不是平台评级；美区联盟达人考察期选品须满足店铺表现至少 95%，不能混用商品星级与五分制 SPS。

问: TikTok合作商家怎么评估分层，最核心的四个考核指标是什么？
答: 每月看四项硬指标：商品测试动销率与单视频净佣金、库存稳定度与掉车频次、综合退货退款率（含发货前取消与签收后退货）、以及线下补佣对账与首尾款准时到账率。

问: 新接洽的合作商家承诺给 30% 超高佣金，可以直接列为 S 级主推吗？
答: 不能。新商家无论口头承诺多高的佣金，一律先归入 B 级观察池：先核查其商品推广资格、履约记录和真实库存，用 3×3 规则小规模测款，等跑完第一个结算周期确认不暗降佣金、不无故断货且首款准时到账后，再升为 A/S 级放量。

问: 如果某家商家的商品很好卖，但退货率高达 28%，还要继续主推吗？
答: 必须降级或叫停。28% 的退货率意味着近三分之一的订单会被扣回线上与线下佣金，如果叠加了投流广告费更是直接倒贴钱；同时高差评与高退货极易引发平台对商品链接甚至达人橱窗的风控。

问: 合作商家的线下佣金逾期多久就应该暂停给它拍新视频？
答: 建议把红线设在逾期 7 到 15 天：到期后第 3 天由商务提醒对账打款；逾期满 7 天停止接收该商家的新品寄样；逾期满 15 天仍未支付首款或尾款的，立即在品库冻结该商家所有商品的派活权限。

问: 商家中途偷偷关掉高佣定向计划，导致订单按低佣公开计划结算怎么办？
答: 在星队长「商务中心」可以将协议约定费率设为「线上加线下合计比例」（如合计 20%）。即使商家在线上把定向计划降成了 10% 公开计划，系统出线下结算单时也会自动按 20% 减去线上实际 10% 补足另外 10% 应收差额，拿着逐单明细找商家补齐。

问: 怎么用星队长防止商务继续给逾期欠款的商家派剪辑任务？
答: 在星队长「商务中心」的结算单列表里，所有超过到期日未登记收款的账单都会自动标红显示「已逾期」及逾期天数；每周一例会核对标红名单，直接将逾期超标的商家商品从品库任务池移除即可。

## TikTok带货团队怎么搭实拍场景和素材库？20平米5个高转化实拍角与原片归档规矩
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-in-house-shooting-studio-and-raw-footage-library?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok带货团队怎么搭实拍场景和素材库？抓好「5 角场景 + 4 段分镜 + PID 编码归档」3 件事：在 20 平米办公区布置厨房水槽、浴室镜柜、原木书桌、客厅地毯与车内驾驶座 5 个海外高频生活角；每件样品按「痛点特写、暴力实测、微距细节、前后对比」4 类分镜各拍 3 个机位；原片按商品 PID 与景别命名入库，供多名剪辑交叉调用组合出原创成片。

问: TikTok带货团队怎么搭实拍场景和素材库最省钱出片？
答: 不需要租专业影棚。在办公室利用墙角布置 5 个 1.5 米宽的局部生活台面（厨房水槽、浴室镜前、原木书桌、客厅地毯、车内驾驶座），每件样品到货后按「痛点、实测、微距、对比」四类分镜各拍 3 个机位，按商品 PID 编号归档供剪辑交叉组合。

问: 国内办公室实拍美区或拉美带货视频，最容易穿帮的细节有哪些？
答: 最常见的四处穿帮是：墙上露出国内五孔插座、背景出现中文快递箱或矿泉水瓶、演示温度/容量尺子时露出摄氏度或厘米（美区应优先用华氏度与英寸/盎司，见[TikTok带货脚本翻译本地化](/guides/tiktok-multilingual-script-localization)），以及窗外出现明显的中文招牌。

问: 只有 1 件商家寄样，怎么让 5 个剪辑各自做出符合平台原创要求的视频？
答: 不要拿同一条完整视频让多人重复使用。正确做法是「分镜原子化采集」：对同一件样品在 3 个不同实拍角（如书桌、车内、阳台）、用 3 种机位（俯拍、正拍、第一视角手持）拍出 15 段独立短镜头，5 个剪辑分别抽取不同机位的开头钩子与演示段组合配音，让每条视频都是原创内容、符合 TikTok 的原创要求。

问: 原片素材库里的视频文件越积越多，硬盘满了怎么清理？
答: 建立「30 天分级归档制」：正在热卖的 S/A 级主推品原片保留在高速共享盘；测款失败已淘汰的商品原片满 30 天直接清理；注意星队长审片台的成片文件在通过后保留 7 天，过审成片应同步归入商品成片文件夹。

问: 怎么知道我们拍的这几个实拍场景里，哪个场景最能带货出单？
答: 让剪辑在发布作品标题或内部前缀里标上场景代号（如厨房角标 kt、车内角标 car），一周后在星队长单号详情页的作品列表按前缀筛选，直接对比两个场景的平均播放量、商品点击率（CTR）和出单件数。

问: 搭实拍角买的灯具、背景板和拍摄手机，在星队长里怎么算进成本？
答: 拍摄手机在「账号管理 → 设备网络」登记购入价，系统默认按 180 天按日折旧；灯具、背景板与拍摄道具在「经营核算 → 花销账本」按「拍摄道具」分类记账，自动汇入当月真实利润表。

## TikTok 佣金比例详解：2026 各国站点平台抽成与达人带货分佣标准
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-commission-rate?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 佣金比例是多少？要分两层看：平台按类目向商家收的平台佣金（美国站常规 6%、五类珠宝与二手商品 5%、收藏品与二手超 $10,000 的部分 3%），以及商家给达人的联盟佣金（每笔订单 GMV 的 1%～80%，公开合作、定向合作与店铺广告各自设定）。本文按各国站点官方正文列出费率表，并讲清投流与自然流的佣金差异。

问: 美国站 TikTok 佣金比例是所有类目都收 6% 吗？
答: 不是。美国站绝大多数常规类目按 **6%** 收取平台佣金（Referral Fee），但有三项官方例外：一是钻石、黄金、翡翠、铂金/K金、红蓝宝石与祖母绿这 **5 个珠宝子类目按 5%** 收取；二是所有**二手商品（Pre-Owned）子类目按 5%** 收取；三是**收藏品（Collectibles，基础费率 6%）与二手商品（基础费率 5%）单笔售价超过 $10,000 的超出部分仅按 3%** 收取。

问: 达人带货的 TikTok 佣金比例允许设置多少？店铺广告佣金率有什么限制？
答: 商家可在每笔订单 GMV 的 **1%～80%** 之间设定公开合作与定向合作佣金率。对于开启「店铺广告佣金率（Shop Ads commission rate）」的受邀商家，该费率同样在 **1%～80%** 之间，但在公开合作中**店铺广告佣金率不得低于标准佣金率的 30%（墨西哥和巴西站点除外）**。

问: 平台佣金比例是按商品原价算，还是按折后价算？
答: 按扣除商家折扣后的价格计算，但不同站点的官方公式存在差异：· **美国站**：平台佣金 = 类目佣金率 × (买家付款金额 + 平台折扣 - 税费)，其中买家付款金额含买家支付的运费（扣除商家或平台运费折扣），销售税与零售配送费不计入基数；· **马来西亚、新加坡、菲律宾站**：平台佣金 = (商品原价 - 商家折扣) × 平台佣金率，运费与 TikTok Shop 平台折扣不计入佣金基数；· **巴西站**：销售费用 = (商品零售价 - 商家折扣) × 平台佣金率 + 每件售出固定费（R$4 或 R$6）。

问: 新入驻 TikTok Shop 的商家有平台佣金比例减免吗？
答: 部分站点提供官方新手佣金豁免：根据菲律宾站 Seller Academy 官方规定，新入驻商家可享 **90 天 0% 平台佣金豁免**（条款脚注写明在 Seller Center - Growth Center - My Mission 完成相关卖家任务的商家可获平台费减免；表现良好的卖家 Good Performing Sellers 完成 Diligence Mission 还可享 **30 天**平台费减免）；根据巴西站官方费用页规定，新商家完成新手任务可享 **60 天限时佣金豁免（上限 R$17,000）**。

问: 同一个商品同时设置了公开合作、定向合作和店铺广告佣金率时，按哪个比例结算？
答: 根据 TikTok for Business 官方规则：第一，当同一商品同时存在公开合作与定向合作时，**定向合作佣金率始终优先于公开合作佣金率**；第二，当受邀商家开启了店铺广告佣金率时，买家通过自然流量（非广告）直接购买按标准佣金率（公开或定向）结算，直接通过 TikTok 店铺广告（Shop Ads）点击购买则按店铺广告佣金率结算。

## TikTok 佣金结算规则：计算公式、5 档到账周期与提现手续费
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-payout-schedule?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 佣金结算规则怎么算、多久到账？订单妥投且无进行中的退货退款后进入结算，美区和英区各分 5 档妥投后到账周期（1 天、3 天、5 天、8 天、31 天），退款按 20% 退款管理费封顶 $5/SKU 扣回；达人与商家提现门槛、手续费和 30 天储备金规则也一并讲清。

问: 按照 TikTok 佣金结算规则，买家刚下单付款的佣金能马上提现吗？
答: 不能。根据官方结算规则，订单必须先完成物流妥投（Delivered to the customer），且没有正在处理中的退货或退款申请（no active/processing refund or return request），在度过店铺对应的妥投后结算周期（如标准档妥投后 8 个自然日）后，资金才会结算进入可打款或可提现余额。

问: 怎么把店铺的结算周期从妥投后 8 天缩短到加速档或极速档？
答: 结算档位按月自动评估更新：在美国站，平台在每月 1 日评估店铺绩效分（**SPS**，需过去 90 个自然日内至少完成 30 笔订单）与前 15～45 天妥投单量（按 2025 年 4 月官方博客标准，出新手期且 **SPS ≥ 3.5** 进入 5 天加速档、**SPS ≥ 4.0** 进入 1 天极速档，实时要求以 Seller Center > Finances 当前政策为准）；在英国站，每月初评估出新手期且 **3.0 ≤ SPS < 3.5** 及 GMV > $4,500 进入 3 天加速档，**SPS ≥ 3.5** 及 GMV > $30,000 进入 1 天极速档。

问: 一笔订单里有多个 SKU 发生退货，5 美元的退款管理费封顶是怎么算的？
答: 按**每个独立 SKU 类型分别计算并分别封顶 $5**。例如美国站官方政策页示例中：同一笔订单包含 1 件 $500 的 SKU A 和 1 件 $10 的 SKU B，全额退货时，SKU A 的退款管理费原本为 $$500 × 6% × 20% = $6$（触发封顶按 **$5.00** 收取），SKU B 为 $$10 × 6% × 20% =$ **$0.12**，两件合计收取 **$5.12**。

问: 达人提现时提示「身份认证失败」或收不到原手机号验证码怎么办？
答: 根据美国站《Withdraw Rules》官方说明：若原手机号无法接收 OTP 验证码，可在 TikTok App 内依次点击 Profile → Settings and privacy → Manage account → Phone number → Change phone → 选择 Use email 通过已绑定邮箱更换手机号；若身份验证（ID Verification）失败且页面无申诉按钮，可准备好有效美国政府签发证件（美国驾照、州 ID、绿卡或美国护照）照片，通过 TikTok Shop Creator Center → Settings → Help Center 联系客服处理。

问: 如果商家把每月的自动打款日设在 30 号，2 月份没有 30 号会什么时候打款？
答: 根据美国站《Scheduling your payouts》官方说明，若每月固定打款日超出了较短月份的实际天数（如 2 月份设了 30 日），系统会自动在该月的**最后一天（2 月 28 日或闰年 2 月 29 日）**处理打款。

## TikTok 橱窗开通条件：三种官方橱窗号门槛、试点期规则与开通流程
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-showcase-requirements?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 橱窗开通条件是什么？取决于账号的三种官方电商身份：店铺官方号与店铺营销号推广绑定店铺自营商品 0 粉即可开橱窗；独立联盟达人号在美区需年满 18 岁、完成实名认证并满 1,000 粉丝，还要经历至少 30 天试点期（每日 3 条挂车视频）。本文按官方正文讲清粉丝门槛、试点配额与开通步骤。

问: 同一张身份证件可以认证几个满足 TikTok 橱窗开通条件的账号？
答: 根据美国站 Seller Academy 官方规定，**1 张有效身份证件最多可用于验证 5 个 TikTok Shop 创作者账号**。在实名身份验证进行期间，视频中的商品链接可能会对观众隐藏；若未能通过实名身份验证，则无法从 TikTok Shop 提现佣金。

问: 0 粉丝可以满足 TikTok 橱窗开通条件吗？
答: 如果你是入驻商家，通过卖家中心将账号绑定为**店铺官方号（Official Shop Creator）**或**店铺营销号（Marketing Creator）**来推广该店铺自营商品时，**无最低粉丝要求（0 粉可绑）**，新绑定账号会进入为期 30 天的早期试点（每日最多发布 3 条带货推广视频，按日刷新，满 30 天且满 1,000 粉丝毕业）。若营销号需要开通选品广场带其他商家的商品，则须达到 **5,000 粉丝**。

问: 为什么从 30 天试点计划毕业后，每天能发的挂车视频数量还是受限？
答: 原因有两项：第一，自 **2026 年 5 月 11 日**起，美国站对所有商家与创作者统一执行全站每日上限——每天最多发布 **30 条挂车短视频** 和 **60 条挂车图文**；第二，若账号存在违规记录导致创作者健康分（CHR）下降，也会触发额外发帖频次限制，可在 Creator Health Rating 页面查看并申诉。

问: 在试点期内把挂车视频删掉或设为仅自己可见，会退回发帖配额吗？
答: **不会退回**。根据美国站官方规定，任何已发布的挂车视频（含发布后设为私密）、定时发布的挂车视频（在设定定时那一刻即计入配额）、发布后删除或因违规被下架的挂车视频，以及给已发布旧视频补挂商品链接，都会扣减当期配额；只有未发布的草稿（Drafts）或上传失败的视频不扣配额。

问: 商品橱窗里最多可以放多少件商品？商品卖光了会自动下架吗？
答: 根据英国站 Seller Academy《TikTok Shop Showcase》官方说明，单个商品橱窗最多可添加 **2,000 件商品**。当某件商品失效下架或售罄（Sold out）时，系统会自动将其从橱窗中移出。

## TikTok 带货开通条件：个人达人与商家准入标准、联盟选品及 30 天起步步骤
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/join-tiktok-shop-affiliate-program?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 带货开通条件是什么？创作者端在 TikTok Studio 里申请加入达人联盟，美区需符合社区规范、年满 18 岁、满 1,000 粉丝并通过账号风险评估；商家端登录 Seller Center 的联盟菜单即可开启公开合作或定向合作，按每笔订单 GMV 的 1%～80% 设置佣金。本文给出两端的分步申请路径与前 30 天起单节奏。

问: 满足 TikTok 带货开通条件后，创作者和商家分别在哪里提交申请？
答: 个人做**独立联盟达人（Affiliate Creator）**需主动在 TikTok App 内依次点击 Profile → TikTok Studio → Monetization → TikTok Shop for Creator → Join now 提交申请；入驻商家开启联盟带货则登录 TikTok Shop Seller Center 网页端，点击左侧菜单 Affiliate（联盟） → Get Started 创建公开合作或定向合作计划。

问: 实名认证没通过会影响 TikTok 带货开通条件审核吗？怎么申诉？
答: 在实名身份验证进行期间，商品链接可能会对观众隐藏；若未通过实名身份验证，将无法从 TikTok Shop 提现佣金。首次验证未通过可点击 Resubmit Now 重新提交（最多 **10 次**提交机会）；若最终失败，可点击拒绝页的 Appeal 按钮上传手持有效政府身份证件正面的实时自拍（最多 **2 次**申诉机会）。官方规定 **1 张有效身份证件最多可验证 5 个 TikTok Shop 创作者账号**。

问: 创作者账号（Creator Account）和佣金账户（Commission Account）是一回事吗？
答: 不是。创作者账号审核通过（通常只需几分钟）代表解锁选品与挂车权限；而在产生带货佣金后，创作者还必须单独提交个人与税务信息以设立**佣金账户（Commission Account）**，才能将已结算佣金提现到银行卡或 PayPal。

问: 在新加坡站，成为联盟创作者（Affiliate Creator）后如果粉丝数跌破最低要求，会退回仅限链接分享（Link-Share Only）吗？
答: 不会。根据新加坡站 Seller Academy《How to Apply as an Affiliate Creator》（knowledge_id=7996132844111617）官方规定，一旦账号获批升级为新加坡站的 **联盟创作者（Affiliate Creator）**，后续即使粉丝数量跌破最低门槛，也不会被降级回仅限链接分享（Link-Share Only）状态。

问: 为什么官方严禁在带货视频里使用「AB 帧（AB frames）」剪辑？
答: 根据美国站 Seller Academy《What You Need to Know Before Becoming a TikTok Shop Creator》官方规定，在剪辑视频帧中隐藏违禁商品、违规内容或虚假宣传（例如使用 AB 帧或画面篡改掩盖违规内容），或将曾因违规被移除的内容修改格式后重新上传，属于高影响违规（High Impact Violations），会直接扣除创作者健康分（CHR）并可能导致永久吊销电商带货权限。

## TikTok MCN机构怎么申请：官方准入条件、达人分佣与入驻流程
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-mcn-application?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok MCN 机构怎么申请？先分清四类服务商角色（MCN、美区 CAP、TAP、TSP），再登录 TikTok Shop Partner Center 注册账号，角色选 TikTok Shop Partner、业务类目选 Creator management，上传营业执照、法人证件、30 MB 以内的 PDF 公司介绍和运营能力证明后提交审核，马来西亚站审核周期为 7 至 14 个工作日，同一公司主体在美国站最多可注册 3 个服务商后台登录账号。机构与达人的管理费分佣协议可在后台设为 1% 到全额佣金之间的比例，官方入驻与绑定文档中未列出平台申请费或押金。

问: TikTok MCN机构怎么申请需要向官方交纳押金或入驻年费吗？
答: **Partner Center 官方入驻与分佣文档中未列出任何平台申请费、押金或入驻年费（具体以 Partner Center 后台实时公示为准）。** 企业通过 TikTok Shop Partner Center（partner.tiktokshop.com 或 partner.us.tiktokshop.com）提交资质审核时，成本主要来自企业自身的工商注册、直播间硬件搭建或可选的第三方代办服务费（来源：[美区机构入驻指南](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/683f1353f979330480b82080)、[合作伙伴注册申请要求](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/64f19899cb677b0286e75d67)，核对日期 2026-11-08）。

问: 中国大陆或香港公司研究 TikTok MCN机构怎么申请时，可以申请哪些国家站点？
答: **中国大陆及中国香港注册的跨境服务商可选择英国、马来西亚、越南、泰国、菲律宾、新加坡 6 个目标市场。** 根据跨境卖家大学官方规定，当地本土服务商只能选择当地单一市场（如美国本土公司申请美区 CAP），而台湾和澳门注册主体目前暂不支持入驻跨境服务商（来源：[跨境卖家大学服务商注册指南](https://seller.tiktokglobalshop.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=2496344989255425&default_language=zh-CN)、[跨境伙伴入驻指南](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/6746be6cebbeff030f7c5805)，核对日期 2026-11-08）。

问: 美区 MCN（CAP）机构每天最多可以邀请多少个达人绑定？分佣比例能设多少？
答: **美区机构每天最多可向达人发送 100 个绑定请求，管理费分佣比例（Fee Agreement rate）可在 1%–100% 之间设定。** 机构首次与达人绑定的最长期限为 **2 个月**，后续续期或再次绑定最长可设为 **1 年**；绑定请求发出后达人若 **7 天**内未接受则自动过期（来源：[美区达人数据授权与分佣指南](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/660357886d72f402e3b598fe)，核对日期 2026-11-08）。

问: 达人加入 TikTok MCN 机构后如果不想继续合作，可以申请解绑吗？
答: **可以发起解绑，但不同站点的审批权限不同：英国站由 MCN 机构决定是否批准解绑，而美国站对达人第 2 次解绑请求设有自动批准保护机制。** 达人可在 App 内 Partnerships > View details > Unlink（英区为 TikTok Shop > Partnership > Unlink 或 Inbox）提交解绑申请；在英国站，MCN 机构拥有是否批准解绑的决定权；在美国站，若机构拒绝了首次解绑，达人可再次发起，一旦达人第 **2 次**发起解绑请求且机构点击拒绝（declines it）或在 **7 天**内未响应，系统将自动批准解绑（来源：[美区达人数据授权与分佣指南](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/660357886d72f402e3b598fe)、[英区解绑指南](https://seller-uk.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=7634562663040770)，核对日期 2026-11-08）。

问: TikTok MCN 机构申请通过后，如果长期不出单会被官方清退吗？
答: **会，平台对已入驻机构实行定期绩效考核。** 以马来西亚站官方规定为例，若机构处于不活跃状态或**单季度 GMV ≤ $1,000**（或旗下达人出现严重合规封禁），平台将发送书面警告（机构可在 **30 个自然日**内申诉，平台在 **14 个工作日**内回复）；若连续第 2 个季度考核仍未达标，将被正式终止 MCN 资格（给予 **30 个自然日**清退期），且被清退主体禁止使用同一营业执照重新注册（来源：[马来西亚 Seller Academy 机构入驻与清退准则](https://seller-my.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=4598309088610065&lang=en)，核对日期 2026-11-08）。

## TK运营是什么：日常工作内容、单人负责账号工作量与带货团队分工
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-account-manager?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK 运营是什么？是负责 TikTok 带货账号选品、原创内容企划、排期跟进与成交数据复盘的电商运营岗位，零基础新人按标准 SOP 带教通常 7 天左右可独立上手，第 1 周先跟进 2～3 个测试号、日均排 3～4 条视频。10 人团队的常见配比是 1 名组长 + 3～4 名运营 + 2～3 名剪辑，熟手剪辑每天交付 6 条左右，约 1 名剪辑配合 1～1.5 名运营。

问: TK运营是什么？零基础转行做 TikTok 运营难吗？
答: **TK运营是负责 TikTok 带货账号选品、原创内容企划、排期跟进与成交数据复盘的电商运营岗位，零基础新人按标准 SOP 带教通常 7 天左右即可独立上手。** 在分工明确的带货团队里，新人不需要自己同时搞定复杂的视频特效和商务谈判，入职第 1 周通常先跟进 **2～3 个测试号**的内容与数据，在组长指导下完成选品拆解与日均 **3～4 条**达标视频排片，一次过审率达到 **60% 以上**即可转入日常正式运营（详见[TikTok 团队新人 7 天带教流程](/guides/tiktok-creator-team-new-hire-7-day-onboarding-sop)）。

问: 了解 TK运营是什么之后，达人本人在美国站最多能用一张证件实名几个达人号？
答: **在美国站，达人本人使用 1 张政府签发的有效身份证件最多可实名验证 5 个 TikTok Shop 达人账号。** 根据 TikTok Shop 官方《What You Need to Know Before Becoming a TikTok Shop Creator》与《Creator Eligibility Policy》，实名核验支持美国驾照、州立 ID 或护照（仅限个人信息页）等证件，每个账号最多有 **10 次**证件提交机会与 **2 次**实时自拍申诉机会，且不得与高违规风险的 TikTok Shop 账号共用相同或相似的登录信息；该 5 号上限是针对达人本人的实名规则，而非运营人员的工作量配额——每个达人号均须由达人本人完成实名，运营人员仅在合作授权下负责选品、脚本企划与数据复盘（来源：[美区达人入驻须知](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=7608640301074219&lang=en)、[美区达人资格政策](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=6939143037667118&lang=en)，核对日期 2026-11-08）。

问: TK 运营跟进的美国站账号每天最多能发多少条带货视频？
答: **美国站 30 天新手村账号每天最多发 3 条带货短视频；而全站所有美国商家和达人账号自 2026 年 5 月 11 日起每日上限为 30 条带货短视频及 60 条带货图文（两篇官方文档表述存在差异，以 Seller Center 当前显示为准）。** 具体而言，处于 30 天新手村的联盟达人及新绑定未满 30 天的店铺官方号/营销号每日均限发 **3 条**带货视频（新手村达人若想提前解除限制，需通过 Pilot Quiz、保持 **CHR ≥ 176 分**，并在 30 天内满足至少 6 条 ≥8 秒带货视频、1 场 ≥5 分钟直播或 ≥10 笔订单中的任意一项）；对于非新手村配额，《Creator Eligibility Policy》规定所有美国商家与达人每日最高可发 **30 条**带货短视频与 **60 条**带货图文，而《What You Need to Know Before Becoming a TikTok Shop Creator》仍写毕业后可发不限数量（unlimited）带货视频，实操中请以后台实时配额为准（来源：[美区达人资格政策](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=6939143037667118&lang=en)、[美区达人入驻须知](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=7608640301074219&lang=en)，核对日期 2026-11-08）。

问: TK 运营在选品挂车时，公开计划（Open Collaboration）和定向计划（Target Collaboration）佣金冲突按哪个算？
答: **始终按定向计划（Target Collaboration）的佣金率优先结算。** 根据 TikTok 官方规则，商家可在 **1%–80%** 范围内设置标准佣金率（受邀卖家还可设置 **1%–80%** 的 Shop Ads 广告佣金率）；当某件商品同时开启了全网公开计划与针对特定达人的定向计划时，无论定向佣金率高于还是低于公开计划，系统一律优先执行定向计划佣金率，因此运营在挂车前务必核对定向邀约里的实际比例（来源：[TikTok Business Help Center 定向计划规则](https://ads.tiktok.com/resources/help/article/about-target-collaborations-in-seller-center)，核对日期 2026-11-08）。

问: 10 人左右的 TikTok 带货团队，运营和剪辑的人数比例怎么配比较合理？
答: **团队实践中常见的配比是「1 名组长 + 3～4 名 TK 运营 + 2～3 名专职剪辑」（即约 1 名剪辑配合 1～1.5 名运营）。** 熟手剪辑通常每天可交付 **6 条左右**模块化原创视频，2～3 名剪辑每天产出的 **12～18 条**成片通常能较好满足 3～4 名运营所跟进的重点动销账号与新手村账号（每日 3 条上限）的排片需求，避免运营把高价值的选品与数据复盘时间耗在基础剪辑软件操作上。

## TikTok 封号了钱还能提现吗？3 类账号资金冻结与申诉流程
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-banned-account-withdraw-money?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok 封号了钱还能提现吗？看账号类型：美国站商家店铺因一般违规被停用，资金可能暂扣 45 天、90 天或 365 天，期满扣除退款、拒付与负余额后发放剩余货款；带货达人被冻结佣金，须在处罚生效日起 30 个自然日内申诉，通过后解冻提现；被禁用的 TikTok Ads 广告账号需申请关户退款，由风险与合规团队审核，可能收取不超过剩余预付资金 10% 的服务费。判定存在欺骗、滥用、欺诈或违法行为的，平台可永久扣留全部或部分资金。

问: TikTok 封号了钱还能提现吗？如果不申诉会怎么样？
答: 需要看账号类型：如果是 TikTok Shop 美国站**商家店铺**且不属于欺诈或违法行为，即使不申诉或申诉失败，资金在暂扣 **45 天、90 天或 365 天**期满并抵扣买家退款、拒付和平台费用后，剩余部分仍会发放给商家；但如果是美国站**带货达人**被冻结佣金，官方《TikTok Shop Creator Enforcement Policy》规定必须在处罚生效日起 **30 个自然日内**提交申诉且获批才能解冻，未按时申诉或申诉被拒可能会导致被冻结的佣金被没收（forfeited）。

问: TikTok Shop 商家店铺为什么还没被封店，却突然不能提现了？
答: 常见原因包括账户健康评分（AHR）触及限制阈值、处于平台安全核查期或存在负余额等未结款项：根据美国站 2026 年 11 月更新的《AHR Requirements》，当店铺 AHR 降至 **50 分**时，即使尚未触发 0 分封店，店铺也**可能在 30 天内无法提现资金**；同时，当平台对店铺开展安全核查或调查疑似高风险销售行为时，可能暂停提现或将店铺划入妥投后 **31 天**的延迟结算档位（Deferred Settlement Period）；此外，根据《Violation & Appeal Guide》与《Seller Enforcement Policy》，暂扣资金也可能用于抵扣账户**负余额（negative balances）**等未结款项，平台也可能从账户余额中扣款以弥补损失。

问: TikTok 达人带货号没扣完 200 分，为什么突然被关掉电商权限并冻结佣金？
答: 因为可能触发了「90 天同项违规满 6 次」规则。根据美国站《TikTok Shop Creator Enforcement Policy》，如果达人在 **90 天内犯下同一种政策违规满 6 次**，无论当前达人健康评分（CHR）还剩多少分，都**可能会被立即移除电商带货权限并冻结佣金**。

问: TikTok 禁用广告账号申请退款时，为什么显示无法处理退款？
答: 根据 TikTok for Business 官方《如何为禁用广告账号申请退款》说明，以下三种支付方式无效的情况会导致无法处理退款：① 原银行账号或银行卡已过期或已关闭；② 广告主在账号被禁用后移除或更改了原支付方式；③ 同一个支付方式下有多个账号导致支付 API 返回 0。遇到此类情况需直接联系 TikTok 商业客户支持协助处理。

问: 商家店铺和带货达人违规后，分别有几次申诉机会？
答: 在美国站，**商家店铺（Seller）**针对每条违规记录最多有 **2 次申诉机会**（首次须在收到违规通知后 **30 个自然日内**提交，被驳回后可在 **15 个自然日内**提交第二次申诉）；而**带货达人（Creator）**针对每条具体违规记录**仅有 1 次申诉机会**（须在收到通知后 **30 个自然日内**提交，平台目标在 **7 个工作日内**给出结果）。

## TikTok GMV 是什么？官方公式、4 大后台口径与 GMV Max
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/guides/tiktok-shop-gmv-meaning?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok GMV 是什么？GMV 即 Gross Merchandise Value（商品交易总额），美国站卖家中心定义为统计周期内买家为订单支付的总金额，公式为 GMV =（商品标价 × 售出件数）+ 运费 − 商家承担折扣 − 平台承担折扣 − 税费。TikTok Shop 的 GMV 在买家付款时即计入，且包含后来取消和退款的订单；实际到手还要在妥投并过完 1、5、8 或 31 天结算周期后，扣掉退款、平台佣金、达人分佣和 30 天储备金。

问: TikTok GMV 是什么意思？包含买家取消和退货退款的订单吗？
答: **TikTok GMV（Gross Merchandise Value，商品交易总额）** 是指所选周期内买家为订单支付的总金额。根据 TikTok Shop 美国站卖家大学《How to navigate Shop analytics in Seller Center》官方说明，GMV 按**买家付款时间**统计，且**明确包含已取消和已退款的订单（including canceled and refunded orders）**；商家需要结合 Refunds（退款金额）和 Items canceled and returned（取消与退货件数）才能看出真实留存成交额。

问: 为什么 TikTok Ads Manager 广告后台的总收入（Gross Revenue）和卖家中心的 GMV 不一样？
答: 因为两者的计算公式以及两篇官方文档对 Seller Center GMV 的口径定义存在差异：在卖家大学《How to navigate Shop analytics in Seller Center》（knowledge_id=813364865828654）中，官方公式为 GMV = (商品标价 × 售出件数) + 运费 - 商家承担折扣 - 平台承担折扣 - 税费；而在 TikTok for Business 帮助中心《关于 TikTok Shop 广告的总收入》中，官方原话写的是「在 Seller Center 中，GMV = 客户付款」，在 TikTok Ads Manager 中 总收入（Gross Revenue）= 客户付款 - 销售税 + 平台价格折扣 = GMV - 销售税 + 平台价格折扣，并说明「**如果你广告的总收入高于店铺的 GMV，Seller Center 可能会将某些平台补贴排除在 GMV 计算之外**」。

问: 美国站达人中心（Creator Compass）里的 GMV 包含样品单和赠品单吗？
答: 不包含。根据美国站卖家大学 2026 年 11 月 4 日更新的《How to Use Earnings Analytics》，美区 Creator Compass 已取消旧版独立的 Commission 标签页，统一展示单一口径 GMV——**仅统计实际产生达人佣金的已付款订单**，明确剔除赠品单（gift orders）、样品单（sample orders）以及店铺自营售出的订单。

问: 开启商品 GMV Max 后，达人自然流带货出的单会被算进 GMV Max 广告报表吗？
答: 会被算进去。根据 TikTok for Business 官方《关于 GMV Max 的归因》（2026 年 6 月更新），在商品 GMV Max 推广系列运行期间，被推广商品产生的所有付费订单与自然流量订单（**包含达人带货订单 affiliate orders**），无论买家是否观看或点击过广告，都会归因给该商品 GMV Max 推广系列。

问: 达人带货的间接成交（Indirect GMV）与直播/短视频归因窗口期是怎么规定的？
答: 两篇官方文档分别规定了不同维度的口径：在 2026 年 4 月 28 日更新的《Sales Metrics Breakdown Logic Upgrade》（knowledge_id=6494954580231950）中，官方规定 **Indirect GMV（间接 GMV）** 采用**末次触点归因（last-touch attribution）**，统计买家观看内容并点击商品链接后**「一段时间内（within a certain period of time）」**从 TikTok Shop 搜索或商城页（Shop tab）等其他入口完成购买的订单（文中未写固定天数，官方示例为买家点击短视频商品链接后 1 天内在 TikTok Shop 搜索该商品下单，或通过商城页 Shop tab 下单）；而在 2025 年 11 月 12 日更新的旧页《How to navigate Shop analytics in Seller Center》（knowledge_id=813364865828654）中，**Affiliate LIVE GMV**（达人直播 GMV）与 **Affiliate Video GMV**（达人短视频 GMV）被定义为买家点击直播或短视频商品链接后 **14 天内（within 14 days of clicking product links）**付款的订单金额（该页未提末次触点）。具体归因窗口天数请以 Seller Center 当前生效规则为准。

## TikTok带货工具：免费在线TK带货利润与账号回本计算器
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tools?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长TikTok带货工具提供 2 款免费在线带货工具：TK带货利润计算器（按美区 6% 平台佣金、20% 退款管理费且单件封顶 $5、达人佣金与成本算净利）和TK账号回本计算器（按账号成本、设备网络月费、工资分摊与日出单算回本天数），无需注册，本地运算。

问: 这两款在线带货工具需要注册或付费才能用吗？
答: 不需要。[TK带货利润计算器](/tools/tiktok-profit-calculator)与[TK账号回本计算器](/tools/account-payback-calculator)完全免费，免注册，打开即算。

问: 我在带货工具里填的售价和佣金数据会被保存吗？
答: 不会。公式在浏览器前端运算，不调接口、不存数据。

问: 平台佣金和退款管理费数字有官方依据吗？
答: 有。美区 6% 佣金、20% 退款管理费（封顶 $5）、达人佣金 1%–80%，均据 [TikTok Shop Seller University](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/)、[TikTok for Business](https://ads.tiktok.com/) 与 [SBA 标准](https://www.sba.gov/) 核实。

问: 为什么中文版显示人民币和美元，英文版只显示美元？
答: 国内带货团队收入按美元（$）、成本按人民币（¥），双币对照（默认汇率 6.8）免手算；英文版直接按美元展示。

问: 什么时候该升级到星队长工作台自动核算？
答: 账号超 10 个或需按净佣金算提成时，可用星队长[经营核算](/features/profit-accounting)自动归集，见[价格页](/pricing)。

## TK带货利润计算器：免费在线算TikTok佣金、退款与净利润
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tools/tiktok-profit-calculator?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK带货利润计算器按 1 个核心公式实时测算：净利润 = 扣除退款后的成交额 − 平台佣金（美国站常规类目默认 6%，退款部分另收原佣金 20% 的退款管理费、每单每 SKU 封顶 $5） − 达人佣金 − 商品成本 − 运费 − 投流花费 − 账号设备分摊。这款免费在线工具无需注册，数据仅在浏览器本地运算，支持美元与人民币（默认汇率 6.8）双币显示。

问: TK带货利润计算器算出来的净利润准吗？
答: 计算公式与美区官方扣费规则完全一致，准确度取决于你填入的退款率、商品成本与分摊费用是否完整。工具严格还原了美区 6% 平台佣金及退款部分 20% 退款管理费（单 SKU 封顶 $5），建议按近 30 天真实妥投退款率填数。

问: tiktok佣金怎么算？平台佣金和达人佣金是叠加扣的吗？
答: 是的，对自营带货商家来说两笔都要扣。平台佣金（美区常规类目 6%）由 TikTok 平台按「买家付款 + 平台补贴 − 税费」抽取；达人佣金（1%～80%）按商家设定的联盟比例付给带货达人，商家算净利时需把两项都减掉。

问: 买家退款后，TikTok 平台佣金和达人佣金还会收吗？
答: 已退款部分的平台佣金和达人联盟佣金都会退回，但美国站会对退款部分另收原平台佣金 20% 的退款管理费（每单每 SKU 封顶 $5）。例如 $105 基数的美区订单全额退款后，6% 原佣金 $6.30 全退，平台仅收 $1.26 退款管理费。

问: 账号成本、工作手机和网络月费怎么填进利润计算器的分摊项？
答: 按这批订单消耗的运营天数折算后填入「账号 / 设备 / 网络分摊」即可。常见内部核算口径是新号投入成本（如 ¥300 约 $45）按 30 天摊、工作手机（如 ¥1,800 约 $270）按 180 天折旧、网络（如月费 ¥60 约 $9）按 30 天摊，换算成美元填进分摊框。

问: 自然流订单和 Shop Ads 投流订单佣金率不同时怎么用计算器？
答: 建议把自然流批次和投流广告批次分开填数测算，或者按两类订单的占比算出加权平均达人佣金率填入。如果需要在工作台自动拆分自然流与投流单并分别套用佣金率，可看[《TikTok投流单和自然流单怎么区分》](/guides/tiktok-ads-vs-organic-orders)。

## TK账号回本计算器：免费在线算账号日净利、回本天数与回本日期
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tools/account-payback-calculator?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TK账号回本计算器用 2 个核心公式实时算清账号投入产出：日净利 = 每天出单数 × 客单价 × 扣除退款后的综合佣金率 −（设备网络月成本 + 员工工资分摊）÷ 30；预计回本天数 = 账号成本 ÷ 日净利（向上取整）。这款免费在线工具无需注册，全部在浏览器本地计算，支持人民币与美元双币对照。

问: TK账号回本计算器里的回本天数是怎么算出来的？
答: 预计回本天数 = 账号成本 ÷ 日净利（结果向上取整到整天），其中日净利 = 每天出单数 × 客单价 × 综合佣金率 −（设备网络月成本 + 员工工资分摊）÷ 30。当每天赚到的佣金还不够覆盖每日设备与工资分摊（即「日净利 ≤ 0」）时，计算器会直接提示当前出单量下无法回本。

问: 算单号回本时，设备和员工工资分摊一定要填吗？
答: 取决于你要看哪个管理指标。如果只想看「新号投入成本本身收回了没有」（即指南里的单号直接回本率），可以把设备网络月成本和员工工资分摊都填 0；如果想看这个账号扣除人力与硬件后是不是真正在帮公司赚钱，就需要把两项月成本填进去。

问: 为什么不能直接用 TikTok 后台显示的 GMV 来算账号回本？
答: 因为 GMV 是买家的付款总额，大头归商家所有，带货团队真正能拿到的只有线上联盟佣金和线下商家补佣。如果按 15% 综合净佣金率算，$1,000 的 GMV 实际只有 $150 净佣金，用 GMV 算回本会把回本时间严重算短。

问: 如果同一批里有账号还没回本就停用了，成本怎么填进计算器？
答: 用「整批账号总花费 ÷ 仍在正常运营的账号数」算出摊入停用亏损后的真实单号成本，再填入计算器的「账号成本」框。例如总花费 ¥3,400（约 $500）投入 10 个号，若有 2 个号零产出停用，剩下 8 个号每个需赚回 ¥425（约 $62.50）才算整批回本。

问: 计算器显示的回本日期是固定不变的承诺日期吗？
答: 不是，它是按你当前填入的日均出单数、客单价和佣金率线性推算的预计日期。实际带货中视频爆单会大幅缩短回本天数，断更或掉车则会拉长周期，建议每周按近 7 天或近 30 天真实日均数据重算一次。

## 星队长使用教程：新团队怎么快速上手？
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长使用教程共 34 篇，按新团队从接号到算清利润的顺序分为 5 组：上手接号与管号（9 篇）、团队与日常管理（10 篇）、订单与商家结算（6 篇）、成本工资与利润（5 篇）、选品拆片与助手（4 篇）。每篇星队长使用教程只讲一件事：先用一句话直接回答在哪点，再按分步流程配工作台真实界面截图，最后附上常见问题，新员工照着就能走通。

问: 第一次用星队长，34 篇星队长使用教程先看哪一组？
答: 这 34 篇星队长使用教程就是按新团队搭建工作台的顺序分成 5 组的：先看第 1 组「上手接号与管号」（9 篇），把 TikTok 账号扫码绑进系统、批量入库新入库的账号并分给员工、登记手机与网络、配置账号分组与爆款线、查看账号表现与单号转化漏斗，以及恢复误删账号和查操作记录；接着看第 2 组「团队与日常管理」（10 篇）建部门、加成员、设每日目标、派剪辑任务按帧审片、登记发布核对人效，以及用个人中心、待我处理和日报协同；开始出单后看第 3 组「订单与商家结算」（6 篇）盯今日出单、查看工作台业绩排行榜、按来源和售后筛选导出订单、做订单归属、跟合作商家对账与登记到账；月底算账看第 4 组「成本、工资与利润」（5 篇）看总账、查看每日利润与团队利润排行、核对账号回本、日常花销和一键出工资表；日常找品、管收藏夹与爆款视频、拆脚本或查数据则看第 5 组「选品、拆片与助手」（4 篇）。

问: 星队长使用教程截图里的数据是真实客户的吗？
答: 不是。34 篇星队长使用教程截图里展示的账号、订单、金额、员工姓名、设备和合作商家，全部是专门编造的演示数据，不含任何真实客户信息。你登录自己的工作台后，看到的才是你团队自己的真实数据。

问: 中英文星队长使用教程里的工作台界面一样吗？
答: 操作流程、按钮位置和步骤顺序完全一样。中文星队长使用教程配的是中文工作台界面截图，英文教程配的是英文工作台界面截图，方便按你习惯的语言对照操作。

问: 星队长使用教程和截图多久更新一次？跟实际界面有出入怎么办？
答: 工作台界面有改动时，我们会同步修订星队长使用教程文字和截图，每篇教程顶部都标有最近更新日期。部分左侧菜单名与页面内标题有简称差异（例如左侧菜单叫「订单归到哪家」、页面标题叫「订单归属」），教程里已同时写明两边名称，照着对应位置点即可。

问: 免费版可以照着星队长使用教程操作吗？
答: 可以。免费版 ¥0 起步（最多 3 人，管理的 TikTok 账号数不限），扫码绑号、看实时订单、设置成员角色与消息通知等基础流程都可直接照着星队长使用教程在工作台操作；涉及商家结算、账号回本、实时办公室、派品审片与考勤算工资的步骤，页面上也会标清适用版本范围。

问: 星队长使用教程和 49 篇使用指南怎么配合看？
答: 34 篇星队长使用教程讲的是「工作台里每个按钮在哪点、每一步怎么走」，适合边开工作台边照着做；49 篇使用与运营指南讲的是「业务方法、核算公式与管理规矩怎么定」，每篇指南底部都挂着对应的星队长使用教程入口，两边可以随时互跳。

## 怎么扫码绑定 TikTok 账号到星队长
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/bind-tiktok-account?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能扫码绑定 TikTok 账号到星队长：在星队长顶部导航点「账号」，再点页面上蓝色的「新增授权账号」，弹出授权二维码后用手机 TikTok 扫码，在 TikTok 官方页面点「同意」，即可把 TikTok 账号绑进星队长，全程不用填密码。

问: 扫码绑定 TikTok 账号到星队长要填密码吗？
答: 不用。授权在 TikTok 官方页面完成，扫码后点「同意」就行。星队长是独立的第三方软件，不是 TikTok 官方产品，所以授权这一步交给 TikTok 自己的页面来做。

问: 绑定后能做什么？
答: 授权成功后，可同步账号基础信息和运营数据，获取联盟订单（含直播）和视频成交，还能做橱窗管理、样品、发布作品。播放和作品每天北京时间 9 点自动刷新，也可手动刷新（次数按版本不同）。订单和利润按美国太平洋时间（GMT-8）统计，北京时间 16:00 换天。

问: 扫码后提示授权未完成怎么办？
答: 看到「授权未完成，请重新扫码。」，一般是在 TikTok 页面没有点完「同意」，重新扫一次就行。二维码放久了会过期，在二维码窗口点「重新生成」再扫。

问: 提示「账号已到上限」怎么办？
答: 说明账号数已经到了当前版本的名额。加购加号包或者升级版本后，就能继续添加。

问: 授权过期了怎么办？
答: 授权不是一直有效的，过期后会提示「授权过期了」。按上面的步骤重新扫码授权即可。

## 怎么把账号分给员工
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/assign-accounts-to-staff?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能把账号分给员工：新入库还没授权的账号，在左侧「账号 → 账号库」点「录入新号」或「批量导入」存进号库，勾选后点「分配给员工」即可把账号分给员工，员工到「个人中心 → 我的账号」看密码并扫码授权；已扫码接入的号，直接在「账号」页点「批量操作 → 换运营人」。

问: 把账号分给员工后，号库里的密码谁能看到？
答: 密码和 2FA 加密保存。把账号分给员工后，密码交给领号员工，员工随时能看，每次查看留记录，号库里不再留密码。

问: 号发错了能收回或改发给别人吗？
答: 还没扫码授权的号，在「账号库」点进该号「详情」，点「改发给…」换人，或点「收回」放回库存。

问: 已经授权进系统的号怎么换人？
答: 直接到「账号」页改运营人。账号成本跟着账号走，不会算两次。

问: 员工能看到别人的号吗？
答: 看不到。员工只看自己负责的号，全部账号和成本数据只给负责人看。

## 怎么看今天哪个号在出单（今日出单账号）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/see-which-accounts-sell-today?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能看今天哪个号在出单、查今日出单账号：打开左侧「首页」把时间切到「今天」，顶部显示今天有几个「出单账号」，下方「经营排行 → 账号排行」按 GMV 排出今日出单账号；想看每单明细，点「实时订单」看「账号出单排行」和「实时出单」，也能在「账号」页筛「在出单」。

问: 「今天」按北京时间还是美国时间算？
答: 美国站订单按美国时间（GMT-8）统计，北京时间每天 16:00 换天，16:30 收齐前一天。墨西哥按 GMT-6、巴西按 GMT-3 算。订单卡片可切显示「美国时间（GMT-8）」或「北京时间（GMT+8）」，不改哪天算哪天。

问: 订单多久同步一次？
答: 订单约 10 分钟自动更新一次，历史订单每天补一次。着急看可在「实时订单」点「刷新订单」。

问: 橱窗号和渠道号出单展示有什么不同？
答: 橱窗号有逐单明细和流量来源。渠道号只接官方授权时，按官方视频成交每天同步一次（T+1），只给每天每商品卖了几件；点「开启成交同步」扫码后，会自动同步当天成交。

问: 手机上能看今天哪个号在出单吗？
答: 可以。微信扫码打开星队长小程序就能看成交、订单和账号，关注服务号还能收爆单提醒。

## 怎么让订单自动归到合作商家（订单归属）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/auto-attribute-orders-to-merchants?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能完成订单归属，让订单自动归到合作商家：在左侧「账本 → 跟商家收钱」里，先去「合作商家」点「添加合作商家」，再点「添加店铺」绑店并填线下佣金率；也可去「订单归到哪家」（「订单归属」页）把已出单的店铺或商品批量「归到合作商家」，之后订单自动归到合作商家并算好佣金。

问: 绑好店铺后，旧订单也会自动归到合作商家吗？
答: 会的。店铺或商品归到合作商家后，已同步的订单自动归到合作商家，并按设好的比例重算预计线下佣金。

问: 投流单和自然流单佣金率不同怎么设？
答: 在「添加店铺」或编辑店铺弹窗填好默认「线下佣金」后，关掉「投流单和普通单一个比例」，单独填「投流单线下佣金」保存。

问: 中途改了佣金率，怎么不影响旧订单？
答: 在商家详情「店铺」列表点「调整」，或在下方「佣金调整记录」点「按日期调佣金」，填生效日期和新比例，前后订单各按各的算。

问: 谁能修改合作商家和佣金率？
答: 只有负责人和有商务权限的成员能改，修改都会留记录。

## 怎么跟商家对账、导出对账表
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/reconcile-with-merchants?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能跟商家对账、导出对账表：在左侧点「账本 → 跟商家收钱 → 对账」进「结算对账」页，点卡片下载按钮或右上角「导出对账表」导出 Excel 明细；商家发回表格后，在「核对」步骤点「商家发来了对账单 → 上传 .xlsx / .csv」找出差异单，打款后在「登记到账」收尾。

问: 为什么跟商家对账前要先做「订单归属」？
答: 系统靠订单归属知道哪笔单归哪家商家、按百分之几算佣金。有「未归属」店铺时，顶部会提醒先去归属，免得漏算。

问: 商家分首款和尾款两次打钱怎么记？
答: 同一张单可在「登记到账」里切「首款」「尾款」分开记。卡片实时更新已收和待收，直到结清。

问: 结算单的时间口径怎么算？
答: 美国站订单默认按 GMT-8 统计；出结算单时可选「按商家时间」（美国太平洋时间）或「按系统时间」（GMT-8）拉账。

问: 导出对账表里看得到退款单吗？
答: 看得到。汇总列出总单数、有效单、退款单及佣金，明细表也标出每笔单的状态。

## 怎么算每个号回本没有
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/account-payback?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能算每个号回本没有：在左侧点「账本 → 账号回本」进「账号回本」页，只要给号填过账号成本（或在「账号库」录入新号填了「每个成本（¥）」），系统就会拿该号赚回的佣金对比账号成本，自动算每个号回本没有、每批号回本没有、还差多少和约几天回本。

问: 怎么算每个号回本没有，赚回的钱怎么算？
答: 系统把该号出单的线上佣金和预计线下佣金汇总折算成人民币，跟「账号成本（元）」对比，自动算每个号回本没有、回本进度和差额。

问: 账号换了运营人，账号成本会算两次吗？
答: 不会。账号成本跟着号走，在「账号」页换负责人，账号成本和累计赚回的钱都跟着原号，不会算两次。

问: 号被封了还会算进账号投入总成本吗？
答: 只要填了账号成本，被封的号也会算进该批次和全公司账号投入总成本里，并标为「已封」，整批投产才真实。

问: 员工能看到账号成本和回本数据吗？
答: 看不到。员工只看自己负责的号，成本和利润数据默认只给机构负责人看。

## 怎么添加成员、开登录、设角色
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/add-members-and-roles?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能添加成员、开登录、设角色：进入「团队 → 成员」，点「管理分组」建好小组，点「添加成员」填好姓名、分组、登录账号、初始密码与角色（运营 / 商务 / 组长），点「复制这段话发微信」把登录信息发给员工，最后在「角色权限」里按岗位设置能看谁的数据和能用哪些功能。

问: 员工用什么方式登录？支持手机吗？
答: 员工用管理员分配的「登录账号」和「初始密码」即可在电脑网页、手机网页和微信小程序登录。

问: 运营、商务、组长三个角色有什么区别？
答: 「运营」负责日常剪辑、发视频和看自己名下账号出单；「商务」使用「商务中心」管供应链、店铺佣金、号库发号与结算对账；「组长」默认看本小组数据，负责给组员派品、审片和批考勤。

问: 员工离职后，他名下的 TikTok 账号和历史订单会丢吗？
答: 不会。在成员抽屉设为「已离职」或「停止登录」后，该员工无法再登录，但名下 TikTok 账号、历史订单和审片记录全部保留，可在「账号」页改派给其他人。

问: 怎么不让普通运营看到线下佣金和公司成本？
答: 公司的成本与利润默认只给机构负责人看；订单佣金可在「角色权限」里把运营的「佣金怎么显示」设为「不看佣金」或「按比例看佣金」。

## 怎么让员工打卡、看考勤
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/staff-clock-in-and-attendance?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能让员工打卡、看考勤：进入「团队 → 考勤」点「考勤规则」开启考勤，选好排班模板、上下班时间、迟到扣款与休息日，设好打卡范围和补卡上限并保存，员工每天在「个人中心」点「上班打卡」和「下班打卡」，负责人在「团队 → 考勤」批请假补卡并查看「月度汇总」。

问: 员工在外面拍素材，不在公司位置或 Wi-Fi 能打卡吗？
答: 可以。在「考勤规则 → 高级规则 → 打卡范围」里勾选「不在公司位置或网络范围内时，允许打卡但标为『外勤 / 异地』」，员工外拍也能正常打卡并留下异地标记。

问: 团队是轮休、每个月休 4 天，不是固定周末，怎么设？
答: 在「休息日怎么安排」选「自由调休」并填「每月可休…天」（如 4 天）。员工在「个人中心」点「申请调休」选休息日，获批后当天自动算正常休息。

问: 员工忘打下班卡，负责人能直接帮他改吗？
答: 可以。在「团队 → 考勤」的「今天」列表或月度日历格子里点该员工行的「调整」，就能直接补填「上班」「下班」时间或修改状态。

问: 考勤汇总的数据怎么进月底工资表？
答: 月底去「账本 → 工资」点「用团队打卡生成」，系统会自动按出勤天数折算底薪并扣减迟到、缺卡等考勤扣款。

## 怎么记花销、看每月利润
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/record-expenses-and-monthly-profit?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能记花销、看每月利润：进入「账本 → 花销」查看已自动同步的账号投入、设备、网络与工具账号费用，点「记一笔」录入房租、投流或寄样等手动开支，选好「每月固定」或「一次性」及分摊对象，在「账本 → 设置」设好账号投入和设备的摊销天数，最后在「账本 → 总账」查看每月利润、成本去向和账号盈亏。

问: 设备、网络和 AI 工具的费用要去哪里改？
答: 设备价钱、网络月费和 AI 工具费用来自「账号 → 设备与网络」，账号成本来自账号资料或「号库」，回原登记页面修改即可自动同步。若某项不想算进利润，可在「账本 → 设置 → 成本怎么算」里取消勾选。

问: 利润是等供应链打款到账才算，还是出单就算？
答: 按订单确认算。账号同步到有效订单后，系统即按佣金规则和汇率算出收入并减去成本，方便每天看清真实经营情况；钱有没有到账在「商务中心 → 结算对账」里管。

问: 没指定团队的全公司房租怎么分摊到各个组？
答: 「记在谁身上」选「全公司（按账号数分到各团队）」时，系统按各团队名下管理的 TikTok 账号数比例自动分摊到各组和对应员工。

问: 普通运营员工能看到公司的成本和每月利润吗？
答: 不能。花销台账、工资总额和公司利润默认只对机构负责人开放，普通员工看不到。

## 怎么设工资、一键出工资表
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/set-payroll-and-payslip?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能设工资、一键出工资表：进入「账本 → 工资」，点「新岗位」设好底薪、提成方式和全勤奖，给员工指定岗位或设个人与团队提成，点「用团队打卡生成」带入本月出勤和迟到扣款，点开员工行核对「提成怎么来的」与奖金扣款，最后点「确认工资表」冻结金额并标记已发放。

问: 员工提成是怎么跟 TikTok 账号订单挂钩的？
答: 系统按「账号负责人」自动汇总该员工名下所有 TikTok 账号当月产生的线上与线下佣金（折算成人民币），再乘以岗位或个人设定的提成比例，不用人工导订单表求和。

问: 怎么设置「先回本再提成」（扣掉账号投入和设备成本再算提成）？
答: 点开员工的「编辑…的薪资」弹窗（或在「账本 → 设置 → 工资规则」开启全局规则），勾选「先扣掉他账号的成本再算提成」，系统就会先扣除账号投入、设备和网络分摊成本，只对净佣金算提成。

问: 确认工资表后，员工能看到别人的工资吗？
答: 看不到。每位员工只能在「个人中心 → 工资条」查看自己的底薪、提成明细、全勤奖与考勤扣款，看不到他人薪资。

问: 每月几号发工资、每月标准应出勤天数在哪里改？
答: 打开「账本 → 设置」，在「工资规则」里即可设置「工资什么时候发」、是否开启「底薪按出勤天数折算」以及标准应出勤天数。

## 怎么拆解一条爆款视频
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/teardown-viral-tiktok-video?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能拆解一条爆款视频：进入「个人中心 → 爆款拆片」，粘贴 TikTok 视频链接或分享文案并点「开始拆解」，等待 1–3 分钟完成按秒截帧与台词翻译，在结果页先看「为什么能卖」和「前 3 秒」留人钩子，再看「逐段分镜」的画面、双语台词与改拍建议，最后照着「照着拍（3 步）」或点「复制整份」发给剪辑翻拍。

问: 直接粘贴 TikTok 手机端复制出来的整段分享文案能识别吗？
答: 可以。不用手动删标题和话题，把整段分享文案粘进输入框，系统会自动提取里面的视频链接。

问: 贴链接拆解和「上传视频文件（只拆台词）」有什么区别？
答: 贴 TikTok 链接会下载原视频按秒截帧，由 AI 结合画面与台词输出带帧图的「逐段分镜」、景别运镜和画面证明点；本地上传文件则专门提取「原始台词」「翻译结果」与基于台词的「脚本结构」，不含视频截帧。

问: 团队其他人想看已经拆过的视频，用不用重新提交？
答: 不用。机构最近拆过的视频都保存在下方的「最近拆过的」列表里，团队成员点开就能直接看。

问: 提示「当前员工角色未开放该工具」怎么办？
答: 让管理员进入「团队 → 成员 → 角色权限」（或「团队 → 权限」），在对应角色或该员工的「能用哪些功能」里勾选开放爆款拆片即可。

## 怎么登记设备和网络、到期提醒
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/register-devices-and-networks?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步登记设备和网络：打开「账号 → 设备与网络」，按用途、保管人与购入成本登记工作设备；切换「网络」记录订阅月费、到期日和二维码；在「AI 工具」登记工具订阅；关注「7 天内到期」并在续费后登记；最后核对费用是否进入账本。设备使用安排依据工作量和职责，不作为账号配置规则。

问: 网络的二维码和连接密钥、AI 工具密码存在系统里安全吗？
答: 安全。连接密钥与 AI 工具密码均加密保存，页面不显示明文；二维码只对有「设备与网络」页面权限的成员可见。

问: 点「登记续期」会自动扣费买网络吗？
答: 不会。弹窗说明了「只记到期日和月费，不会付款或自动续费」，先在服务商处续完费，再回系统点「登记续期」更新到期日。

问: 一条网络绑了几个号是怎么算出来的？
答: 当你在「设备」里把手机绑上「主要账号」并选好「使用网络」，或给网络选了「直接关联账号」，系统就会自动统计并在「绑定账号」列展示数量。

问: 删掉一台设备或一条网络，会把对应的 TikTok 账号删掉吗？
答: 不会。只删除这条设备或网络档案，不会删 TikTok 账号，只是账号资料上不再显示该绑定。

## 怎么用选品中心找能带的商品
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/find-products-in-selection-center?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能用选品中心找能带的商品：进入「选品中心」查看顶部「今日概况」与「今日为你选」，切到左侧「热卖榜」按「按卖出 / 按匹配度 / 按增长」排序并用「筛选」浮层过滤，点开商品详情看「为什么推给你」「这个品怎么拍」与「能不能挂」，点「☆ 收藏」或「不适合」整理候选品，最后点「派给员工」下发拍摄任务。

问: 商品详情里的「能不能挂」是怎么判断的？
答: 系统会读取该商品所在店铺的评分与 TikTok 挂车门槛，并和你团队已接入账号的粉丝数逐一比对，直接告诉你团队里有几个号现在就能挂车、哪几个号粉丝还不够。

问: 我点「☆ 收藏」存下来的商品，团队其他人看得到吗？
答: 看得到。左侧栏「我的 → 收藏」（页面标题「我的收藏」，标注「团队里的人收藏的商品，大家都能看到」）是全团队共享的，负责人或选品同事收藏的商品，运营和剪辑打开选品中心都能直接查看。

问: 不小心把某个商品点成了「不适合」，怎么找回来？
答: 点击左侧栏「我的 → 不适合的」，点开那件商品，在右侧详情底部点「恢复推荐」，商品就会重新回到推荐和榜单里。

问: 在商品详情看到好的带货视频，可以直接拆解或改写脚本吗？
答: 可以。详情抽屉内置了「这个品怎么拍」卡片：已有拆解视频时可直接查看分镜要点并点「迭代这条脚本」即时生成改写版，也可点「看完整拆解 ›」；若该品爆款视频还没拆过，直接点卡片里的「拆解这条」即可提交拆解。

## 怎么出结算单、登记商家到账（逾期提醒）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/issue-statements-and-record-payments?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步即可学会怎么出结算单、登记商家到账：在「商家结算 · 设置」配好结算周期与首尾款比例，到「对账」选商家与日期生成对账单，用「对账调整与差额处理」对齐双方金额，商家打款后点「＋ 登记到账」录入首尾款，最后通过「要处理的」逾期提醒跟进未结清账单。

问: 同一个合作商家名下有多家店铺，其中一家想单独出对账单怎么弄？
答: 在「商家结算 · 设置」里把那家店铺设为「单独结算」。之后在「对账」页处理怎么出结算单、登记商家到账时，选「出账范围」即可单独选这家店铺出账，其余店铺仍按整家合作商家合并出账。

问: 商家第一次打款没打够首款金额，能先登记吗？
答: 可以。每次点「＋ 登记到账」都会新增一条流水，系统会自动累加已收金额并算出剩余待收，直到全部收齐或手动选「按实际到账结清」。

问: 登记到账之后发现填错了金额，怎么改？
答: 展开对账单卡片的「到账记录」，删掉填错的那条流水，再重新点「＋ 登记到账」录入正确金额即可。

问: 在这里登记的商家到账，还要去「利润」里再记一遍收入吗？
答: 不用。对账单里的应收佣金和实收到账会自动接入「利润」板块，无需重复手工记账。

## 怎么在号库批量录入新账号
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/bulk-import-accounts-to-inventory?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能在号库批量录入新账号：进入「账号 → 账号库」点「批量导入」，在「1 · 粘贴账号资料」里粘入账号信息自动识别成表格行，在「2 · 这批号统一填」设好分组、账号来源、每个成本和入库日期后点「存进号库」，再去「未分配」把号分给员工或用「补录漏掉的号」补齐旧号成本。

问: 在这里填了「每个成本（¥）」，还要去「利润 → 花销」里再记一笔账号投入支出吗？
答: 不用。号库里填好的买入单价，等员工把号扫码授权进系统后会自动挂到那个 TikTok 账号上，并自动计入「利润」的账号成本和「账号回本」，不会重复记账。

问: 账号来源给的 2FA 是一串密钥字母，员工登录时还要找第三方工具算验证码吗？
答: 不用。把密钥填进「2FA 密钥」列后，系统会自动每 30 秒生成当前的 6 位「2FA 验证码」，员工和负责人在看密码时点一下就能复制验证码。

问: 把号分配给员工之后，谁看过这个号的密码有记录吗？
答: 有。所有密码和 2FA 密钥都加密保存，每次点击查看都会记入「查看记录」，在账号详情里随时能查到是谁在什么时间看过的。

问: 一次买了超过 50 个号怎么导入？
答: 单次最多保存 50 个号。超过 50 个时分两次保存即可；只要「入库日期」填同一天，系统会自动把它们合在同一天入库批次里。

## 怎么建部门和小组，让组长只管自己组
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/set-up-departments-and-team-leads?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能建部门和小组，让组长只管自己组：在「团队 → 成员」点「管理分组」新建上层部门和下级小组，在「负责人」列指定各组组长并点「保存」，把组员批量「调组」进对应小组，到「权限」核对组长「看本小组、管本小组」的范围，组长登录后即可只看只管自己组。

问: 要把某个普通运营提拔成组长，是去改他的角色，还是去改分组的负责人？
答: 直接去「管理分组」里把他选为那个小组的「负责人」即可。系统写明「组长不用单独设：分组选了负责人，TA 自动是组长」，保存后权限会自动切换。

问: 想把原来的组长调去别的组，为什么批量「调组」时提示没调过去？
答: 因为他还挂着原小组的「负责人」身份，系统会提示「还是负责人，先在分组设置里换负责人再调」。先在「管理分组」把原小组「负责人」换成新组长或「暂不设置」，保存后就能调组了。

问: 删掉某个小组时，里面的组员会被一起删掉吗？
答: 不会。在「管理分组」里点有人的分组旁边的「删除」时，系统会弹出「这 N 个人调到哪个组？」，让你先选一个接收分组，组员和他们名下的账号、历史业绩都会安全转移。

问: 能不能让某一位组长除了管自己组，还能使用选品中心？
答: 可以。在「团队 → 权限」里把看法切到「按人」，找到那位组长，点亮他那一行的「选品中心」格子（标蓝点表示「单独改过」），他就能用选品中心，同时账号和订单依然只看本小组。

## 怎么用星队长助手问数据（比如问「昨天哪个号出单最多」）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/ask-star-captain-assistant?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能用星队长助手问数据：点顶栏「问星队长」（或按 `Ctrl+K`）唤出抽屉，直接输入「昨天哪个号出单最多」等问句查实时数据，说一句话让助手替你调号派任务并点「确认」执行，点「帮我核对账单」上传表格逐单对账，或点底部技能按钮一键拆爆款、写脚本。

问: 普通运营员工用「星队长助手」问数据，能问出全公司的利润或别人的出单吗？
答: 不能。助手严格遵守登录账号的数据范围：普通运营只能查自己名下账号的出单和自己的任务考勤，小组长只能查本小组数据，只有机构负责人或全机构管理员才能查公司利润与全员排行。

问: 让助手改运营人或派任务时，万一说错了名字会直接改乱吗？
答: 不会。所有修改操作都会先生成「要我这样做吗？」确认卡，只有你点击「确认」后才会生效；点「取消」不会改动任何数据。

问: 上传商家对账表时，表格列名必须按固定模板改好才能传吗？
答: 不用。助手会自动识别常见的订单号列和佣金/结算金额列；若单个文件超过 5MB，拆成两个小文件分次拖入即可。

问: 关掉助手抽屉或者刷新网页后，刚才问出来的回答还在吗？
答: 在。每次对话都会保存在抽屉右上角的「历史」里，点开即可按「今天」「昨天」「更早」重新查看或接着往下问。

## 星队长消息通知设置：铃铛、爆单预警与早报提醒怎么开
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/manage-notifications-and-alerts?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长消息通知设置只需 5 步：点顶栏铃铛和火苗按分类查看消息与爆单，在「爆单预警设置」调好几分钟几单算爆单，在「早报和提醒」勾选商品异动与账号异常开关，扫码「绑定服务号」把爆单推到微信并设好免打扰，或在「团队 → 发通知」向员工发公告并查谁读了。

问: 机构里单子多，一天刷几十条爆单提醒太吵怎么办？
答: 让负责人在「爆单预警设置」里把「多快算爆单」门槛调高，或在你自己的微信设置里设好「每天最多推几条」上限；到了上限当天微信不再推，站内消息照常保留。

问: 为什么绑了微信服务号，后来收不到微信爆单推送了？
答: 通常是微信里取消了关注服务号，设置行会提示「你在微信里取消了关注，重新绑定才能收到」。点击「重新绑定」再扫一次码关注即可恢复。

问: 普通员工能自己改「多快算爆单」的几分钟几单规则吗？
答: 不能。「多快算爆单」是整个机构共用的规则，由机构负责人设置；但每位成员都能自己开关「首页显示爆单提醒」、绑定本人微信，并单独设自己的「免打扰时段」和「每天最多推几条」。

问: 发出去的「团队通知」发现写错了字，怎么撤回？
答: 打开「团队 → 发通知」切到「已发的」页签，找到那条通知点「撤回这条」确认，所有成员的电脑端铃铛和小程序里都会立刻移除。

## 怎么在实时订单页筛选来源、售后并导出 Excel
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/filter-and-export-live-orders?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能在实时订单页筛选来源、售后并导出 Excel：进入「订单」页切换「实时出单」「商品出单」或「退款分析」视图，在「订单筛选」按「流量来源」区分自然流与投流订单，按「订单状态」筛选退款、退货或已取消订单，用搜索框和「展开高级筛选」定位具体账号或商家，最后点「导出订单」下载含 4 张表的 Excel。

问: 订单页的日期和下单时间按哪个时区显示？
答: 美区订单默认按美国日期（固定 GMT-8，北京时间每天 16:00 换天）分组统计，与 TikTok App 数据页一致；墨西哥按 GMT-6、巴西按 GMT-3。每笔订单的具体「下单时间」可在个人中心切换按美国时间或北京时间显示。

问: 导出的 Excel 文件里包含哪些内容？
答: 导出的 Excel 默认包含 4 张工作表：说明、订单明细、账号汇总、团队汇总（按「部门 → 大组 → 小组 → 员工」展开），把逐单明细、流量来源归因、售后状态和团队业绩放在同一份文件里。

问: 为什么有些投流订单没有按投流佣金率计算线下佣金？
答: 只有在合作商家店铺单独设置了投流佣金率，且在商家结算设置里开启了「投流订单单独算佣金」时，投流订单才会按投流佣金率计算；未单独设置时默认沿用该商品或店铺的常规佣金率。

问: 后台生成的 Excel 导出文件保留多久？
答: 后台生成的导出任务一般不到 1 分钟完成，Excel 文件在「导出记录」保留 24 小时，支持查看操作人和任务进度；超过 24 小时显示「已过期」，重新点导出即可。

## 怎么用账号分析看账号评分、排查停更与掉车号
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/analyze-account-performance-and-health?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能用账号分析看账号评分、排查停更与掉车号：进入「账号 → 账号分析」看顶部「账号盘点」与利用率，在「要处理」卡片集中排查新封禁、连续掉车和 3 天未更新账号，切到「账号榜单」看爆单与涨得快的号，切到「员工表现」对比每位运营的在发率与万播数，最后在「账号明细」看 100 分制评分明细。

问: 账号明细里的 100 分制「评分」具体怎么算？
答: 按近 30 天表现加总（满分 100 分）：「活跃 30」（30 天发满 12 条即每周 3 条拿满）、「流量 30」（作品播放中位数达到爆款线 5 倍拿满）、「爆款 20」（每条破爆款线作品得 7 分，3 条拿满）、「变现 20」（出单满 50 单拿满）。总分 ≥ 85 为 S、≥ 70 为 A、≥ 55 为 B、≥ 40 为 C，橱窗封禁账号最高 39 分。

问: 「没动的号」和「数据停更」有什么区别？
答: 「没动的号」是指账号数据在 3 天内刚刷新过、连接正常，但运营在所选时段内没有发过新作品；「数据停更」是指该账号超过 3 天没有同步过数据，点一下旁边的「刷新」即可更新最新作品和播放。

问: 为什么「要处理」里会提示某个号「连续掉车」？
答: 当一个正常账号最近发布的多条带货视频原本挂着商品链接、随后连续变成「已掉车」时，系统就会标出「连续掉车」，提醒运营检查是不是常挂的那款商品被商家下架、库存清空或链接失效，避免继续发无效视频。

问: 播放数据每天什么时候更新？
答: 系统每天早上北京时间 9 点自动刷新一次全部正常账号的作品和播放数；近期有出单或播放在涨的活跃账号会自动加密刷新频次，也可以在页面上手动点「刷新」。

## 怎么分析作品播放与转化、排查已掉车和可能限流
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/analyze-videos-and-product-links?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能分析作品播放与转化、排查已掉车：在「账号分析 → 作品效果」切换「播放最高」「出单最多」「掉车」或「限流」排序，按「标题或关键词」「商品 ID」和「挂车」状态筛视频，识别卡片上的「已掉车」与「可能限流」标签，点开「作品详情」查看「商品曝光率」「商品点击率」和「完播率」，再到单号「读懂这个账号」复盘高转化作品。

问: 视频卡片上的「已掉车」是怎么判断的？
答: 日常怎么分析作品播放与转化时，系统只有在之前抓取确认过该视频挂着有效商品链接、而最新刷新发现商品链接不见了时，才标为「已掉车」。封禁账号上的视频会单独标明「封禁号发的作品不算掉车」，不会误报。

问: 「可能限流」是 TikTok 官方发来的处罚通知吗？
答: 不是官方通知，而是星队长按发布时长和播放量估算的预警：当一条视频发布超过设定小时数、播放量仍低于阈值时，标出「可能限流」提醒运营去 TikTok 查看有无违规提示。

问: 为什么有的账号出了单，视频墙上却显示「没分到具体视频」？
答: 部分订单由 TikTok 回传了账号级成交，但未返回具体视频归因字段；系统如实标明「本号出 N 单 · 没分到具体视频」，既确保账号总出单准确，也不把订单硬塞给某条视频。

问: 发现爆款视频「商品链接已失效」还能把车挂回去吗？
答: 已发布的 TikTok 视频若商品链接失效或掉车，无法在原视频上重新挂回链接；建议对照「星队长发现」提示，用同款商品或替代店铺链接尽快重发新视频承接流量。

## 员工怎么用个人中心领任务、申请新号、登记发布和查工资条
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/use-personal-center-for-daily-work?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步即可掌握员工怎么用个人中心领任务：进入「个人中心」在顶部「我的今天」查看打卡状态并点「完成 +1」与「登记发布」，切到「我的任务」按「领取 — 剪辑 — 交片 — 审片通过」4 步进度条推进或点「直接完成 / 汇报完成」，在「我的账号」右上角点「+ 申请新号」，在顶部「领到的号」点「查看登录信息（密码 · 2FA · 邮箱 · 备注）」登录并点「我已登录并授权」，最后在「我的工资」核对已确认的月度工资条。

问: 提示「你的登录账号还没关联员工，没法打卡和登记」怎么办？
答: 说明管理员开了登录号但还没绑到员工档案。请让负责人在「团队 → 成员」把你的登录号关联到对应员工名字，关联后即可正常打卡、领任务和登记发布。

问: 我在「领到的号」里点「查看登录信息」看密码，别人知道吗？
答: 密码加密保存，仅申请人本人、商务和机构负责人能查看，每次查看都会记录查看人和时间。换手机重登或接验证码时，仍可回「领到的号」查看。

问: 「成品存档」里审片通过的视频会在服务器上一直保存吗？
答: 审片通过的视频在「成品存档」保留指定天数（页面标明「视频还留 N 天」），需长期留存的成片请及时下载到本地，文字版按帧意见和任务记录则会一直保留。

问: 为什么「我的工资」里还看不到上个月的工资条？
答: 只有当机构负责人在「利润 → 员工工资」点「确认」锁定工资表后，员工的「我的工资」页面才会显示该月工资条；核算中的草稿不会提前展示。

## 怎么管理选品收藏夹、在爆款视频榜挑片拆解
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/manage-saved-picks-and-viral-videos?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步即可掌握怎么管理选品收藏夹、在爆款视频榜挑片拆解：在「选品中心」点「☆ 收藏」并在左侧「我的 → 收藏」查看全团队共享的备选商品，在「不适合的」列表点「恢复推荐」找回已排除商品，切到左侧「榜单 → 爆款视频」用顶部常驻筛选栏切「匹配」「类型」「时段」与快捷「排序」，点开「筛选」浮层组合完整排序、视频「来源」、「账号类型」与「只看」条件，最后点开视频看「视频分析」与「照着改的脚本」或点「拆这条」深度拆解。

问: 「我的收藏」是我个人私有的还是全团队都能看到？
答: 关于怎么管理选品收藏夹，「我的收藏」是全团队共享的。任何成员在选品中心点「☆ 收藏」存下的商品，团队里的负责人、选品、运营和剪辑打开左侧栏「我的 → 收藏」都能看到，方便选品先挑、负责人拍板派单。

问: 爆款视频里的「实拍」和「AI」是怎么区分的？
答: 系统根据视频画面特征自动归类并在顶部「类型」栏提供「AI」「实拍」「全部」切换，同时在商品卡片上汇总该商品的爆款是「实拍为主」还是「AI 为主」，方便实拍和 AI 团队各取所需。

问: 「筛选」浮层里的「同行」来源指的是哪些账号？
答: 「同行」指美区 TikTok Shop 带货同行团队正在运营的橱窗号与矩阵带货号（区别于品牌店铺官方号）。在「筛选」浮层选「同行」搭配顶部时段「24 小时」或「3 天」，即可看同行刚发、正在起量的视频。

问: 拆解过的爆款视频去哪里回看？
答: 在「爆款视频」的「筛选」浮层里把「只看」切到「已拆解」，或点击左侧导航「工具 → 爆款拆解」（及「工具箱 → 爆款拆解」历史记录），之前拆过的台词、翻译和分镜模板都保存在里面，随时能复用。

## 怎么在品库加商品、派剪辑任务并按帧审片
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/assign-products-and-review-videos?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能在品库加商品、派剪辑任务并按帧审片：进入「团队 → 品库」粘贴 TikTok 商品链接点「加入品库」，在商品编辑里填好「定向链接」、上传「加橱窗二维码」和「爆款参考」，勾选商品点「派任务」选「指定给人」或「发到任务池」并设好截止日，在任务看板跟进五栏进度，员工交片后点「去审片」按帧写批注并通过或打回。

问: 派任务时的「宽松（自动核对）」和「严格（领取 + 交片）」有什么区别？
答: 「宽松（自动核对）」适合熟练运营：派下即视为已领，员工发视频在「登记发布」选了该品就自动算入完成条数；「严格（领取 + 交片）」适合把关成片质量：员工须先点「领取任务」、上传「交片」，经审片通过才算完成。

问: 「批量传二维码」怎么把十几张二维码图片自动对上商品？
答: 把二维码文件名改成对应「商品 ID」或「商品名」，在品库点「批量传二维码」拖入，系统会显示「按商品 ID 对上」或「按商品名对上」，未自动对上的在下拉框手选后再点「保存 N 张」即可。

问: 勾选「派发时一起拆解爆款参考」有什么用？
答: 系统会在派单时把该商品的「爆款参考」自动拆解成脚本、台词和翻译附在任务详情里，且同一条视频拆过一次后不重复扣次数。

问: 任务还没做完但商品突然下架了，点「结束任务」会影响员工已做的条数吗？
答: 不会。点「结束任务」后，按「已经做的 N 条都算数，剩下的不用再做了」处理，任务移入「已结束」并保留已登记记录。

## 怎么登记每日发布作品、核对少发并查看人效
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/log-published-videos-and-check-productivity?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步即可掌握怎么登记每日发布作品、核对少发并查看人效：进「团队 → 发布记录」点「登记发布」，按「一个号」选日期、账号与商品录条数，或切「批量登记」一次勾选多个商品和账号提交，在「发布记录」对照五张汇总卡看「已核对」「少发」与「多发」，最后切到「团队 → 人效」按「今天」「本周」或「本月」看每人的「出单」「赚 / 亏」「投产比」与名下账号明细。

问: 刚登记完为什么显示「还没同步到这天的作品」？
答: 日常在工作台怎么登记每日发布作品后，约 15 分钟系统自动刷新作品；且「相符、少发、多发」要等刷新时间跨过当天 24 点（北京时间）后才定案，免得把晚上未发完的视频提前判少发。急看可去「账号」页手动刷新。

问: 在选品任务里报过完成的商品，再来登记发布会重复算任务进度吗？
答: 不会。给自己登记时，任务里「报过完成还没登记」的商品支持勾选「已报完成」，只记到账号下，不在任务进度里算两次。

问: 「发布记录」的实际发出和「人效」表的「发布」条数为什么有时不一致？
答: 口径不同。「发布记录」只核对员工登记过的号在当天（北京时间）发出的作品；「人效」表按所选时段（「今天」「本周」「本月」，其中本周只算到昨天为止）统计名下所有号新发的全部作品（不论是否登记）及有效挂车条数，用来对照出单、产出与投产比。

问: 员工忘记按商品选品，能只登记账号当天发的总条数吗？
答: 可以。「一个号」或「批量登记」抽屉都支持跳过商品，直接填写每个账号当天发出的总条数并提交。

## 怎么看团队日报和周报，并生成只读分享链接
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/read-and-share-team-daily-reports?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能看团队日报和周报，并生成只读分享链接：进入「团队 → 日报」切换「昨天」「前一天」「本周」或「上周」，在「速览」和「整体情况」核对毛利、出单、剪辑、发布、掉车与出勤，下滚查看「亮点」「账号来源」「各部门情况」和「员工明细」，跟进底部「需要处理」的异常待办，最后点「复制全文」发群或点「分享」生成不含利润或含利润的只读链接。

问: 为什么上午看日报提示「美国今天还没过完」？
答: 美区订单和毛利按美国日期（固定 GMT-8）统计，美国的一天在北京时间 16:00 结束。每天北京时间 16:30 系统自动汇总完整的昨日日报；在此之前出单和毛利还会涨，而剪辑、发布和出勤按北京时间统计已是完整数字。

问: 日报里的「毛利」提示「还没算全」是什么意思？
答: 当有账号「没填账号成本」或「入库日期不知道」、在职员工「没设工资或岗位」，或当月还没记「房租水电」「投流广告」时，会提示「还没算全，毛利会偏高」，点旁边「去改」补齐即可。

问: 部门负责人看到的日报和老板看到的有什么区别？
答: 老板（管理员）看「全公司」范围并含毛利、成本和账号来源；部门负责人只看「你管的部门」范围，自动隐藏全公司利润、总成本和他人薪资。

问: 分享出去的只读日报链接安全吗？
答: 安全。分享链接只允许查看选定的那一天，不能切日期或进其他页面；选「不含利润」时不会显示毛利和成本，链接 30 天有效。

## 怎么按部门和岗位设每日目标、工作状态与实时办公室
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/set-daily-targets-and-department-statuses?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能按部门和岗位设每日目标、工作状态与实时办公室：进入「团队」页点「办公室设置」（或「设目标」），在「每日目标」设分组与岗位默认目标或给单人调今日目标，切到「部门状态」按部门配置是否进办公室、可选状态和完成单位，在「谁坐哪」安排独立办公室与工位，最后在「外观」选办公室模板与前台品牌。

问: 同一个员工既有岗位默认目标、又有小组默认目标，系统按哪个算？
答: 优先级从高到低依次是：「只改今天 > 单独设 > 分组默认（离他最近的一级）> 岗位默认 > 统一目标」。若员工自己定的「个人目标」更高，完成率按大的算。

问: 商务或选品人员不是按「剪视频条数」算工作量的，怎么改单位？
答: 在「办公室设置 → 部门状态」找到对应部门，把「完成数按」从默认的「条」改为「个选品」「家商家」「单」或点「自己写」，员工端按钮就会同步变成「完成 1 个选品 +1」。

问: 把财务或人事部门关掉「参加实时办公室」后，会影响考勤吗？
答: 不会。关闭后该部门只是不进实时办公室和今日进度、不计入日报剪辑完成率，考勤与日报出勤照常统计。

问: 团队扩到二三十人后，3D 办公室看着有点挤怎么办？
答: 在「办公室设置 → 外观」把模板切换为「简洁平面图」俯视座位图，并可用办公室右上角的「放大」「缩小」「还原」「全屏」按钮查看。

## 怎么在待我处理审批新号申请、考勤与员工问题
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/handle-team-inbox-and-approvals?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能在待我处理审批新号申请、考勤与员工问题：进入「团队」页查看「待我处理」分类提醒，点「账号申请」同意或驳回员工提交的新橱窗号申请，点「考勤申请」处理补卡与请假，在「员工问题 / 问题汇报」里带截图回复提问或转给上级并标为已解决，最后在「逾期任务」里对未完任务做延期、改人或取消。

问: 组长点击「同意」员工的新号申请后，号会自动分给员工吗？
答: 组长点「同意」后，系统显示「已同意，商务会收到发号提醒」，通知管理员或商务在「账号 → 账号库」从「未分配」挑好具体橱窗号指派给该员工。

问: 组长拿不准的员工问题，点「转给上级」后谁能看到？
答: 点「转给上级」后，该问题会带上「转来的」标签及原提问时间，自动出现在上级部门负责人或管理员的「待我处理 → 员工问题」列表里。

问: 员工在「问题汇报」里一次最多能传几张截图？
答: 员工提问和负责人回复单次都支持上传或用 `Ctrl+V` 粘贴最多 6 张截图，方便把手机报错、订单号和商品截图一次贴全。

问: 取消某个员工的逾期任务后，他之前已经登记发布的视频会被删掉吗？
答: 不会。取消任务只停止计算未完进度并停止逾期提醒，此前已登记的发布记录完全保留；整条取消的任务还可在「按任务 → 已结束」里重新打开。

## 怎么在单号详情页看带货转化漏斗与作品明细
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/inspect-single-account-conversion-and-works?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 5 步就能在单号详情页看带货转化漏斗与作品明细：在「账号」列表点开目标橱窗号进入详情页，核对顶部健康提醒并按需点「置顶」或「持续监控」，在右侧看「带货转化」漏斗（曝光、点击率、转化率）与「播放分布」，在「数据」页签看「播放中位数（全部作品）」与互动率走势，最后在作品列表按挂车状态、标题前缀或商品 ID 筛选作品。

问: 为什么「平均每条播放」很高，但最近发的新视频播放却很低？
答: 单条几十万播放的大爆款会大幅拉高平均数。看「数据」页签里的「播放中位数（全部作品）」和右栏「播放分布」，才能反映该号日常发片的真实水平。

问: 什么是「持续监控」？什么号需要点上？
答: 长期断更的老号在批量刷新时默认降频。如果老号的历史爆款仍在持续出单，点上「持续监控」变成「已持续监控」后，每次批量刷新都会照常带上它。

问: 作品列表底部的「作品库外还有 N 条有数据的作品」是什么意思？
答: 作品库默认存最近约 30 条视频；更早发布但近 7 天仍有播放或官方成交的老视频，会单独列在「作品库外还有 N 条有数据的作品」区域按成交额排序。

问: 怎么用「按标题筛选」核对某个剪辑员工做的视频？
答: 若剪辑在标题加上代号（如 `zy10.27`），在「标题或关键词」框输入 `zy` 即可筛出匹配作品并显示「筛出 N / 总条数」，直接看该员工在这条号上的表现。

## 怎么在总账页一屏看清商家回款、本月花销与账号回本
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/read-money-ledger-overview?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 4 步就能在总账页看清全盘账目：在「账本 → 总账」页顶部切换「本月 / 上月」并点开待办胶囊处理异常，看顶部一句话汇总与两根进度条（「赚到的钱 · 收到没有」「赚到的钱 · 花到哪、剩多少」），在左下「跟商家收钱」核对每家商家的对账打款阶段，最后在右下「花在哪」和「账号投入钱赚回来没有」查看成本分类与回本进度。

问: 为什么总账页「赚到的钱 · 收到没有」里的「还没收」比本月赚到的金额还大？
答: 「还没收」统计的是截至今天所有合作商家该给但还没到账的钱（右上角注明「还没收含以前月份」），以前月份出账但尚未打款的尾款也会算在里面，方便负责人掌握全部待催收应收款。

问: 为什么我看到的总账页第二根条下面写着「工资读不到（只有负责人能看），这根条没扣工资」？
答: 员工工资属于敏感薪酬数据，仅对机构负责人展示。财务或组长查看总账页时，第二根进度条只扣除日常「花销」，不展示和扣除工资总额。

问: 为什么「账号投入钱赚回来没有」卡片提示「N 个号没填价，填了更准」？
答: 只有填了买入价的账号才会纳入回本投入与回本进度计算。点击总账页顶部「没填账号成本 · 去补」胶囊或进入「账号回本」页补齐买入价后，总账里的回本比例就会立即更新。

问: 总账页顶部的「要处理的」待办胶囊都有哪些，点开分别跳去哪？
答: 当存在未处理事项时，总账页顶部会按优先级展示四类待办胶囊：「N 张 对账单等你核对 · 去核对」（跳往「跟商家收钱 → 对账」核对账单）、「N 张 逾期 ¥X · 去登记」（跳往逾期对账单催收或登记到账）、「N 个号 没填账号成本 · 去补」（跳往「账号回本」补录账号买入价）以及「N 月工资 还没发 · 去发」（跳往「工资」页确认并发放工资单）。

## 怎么在「最近删除」恢复误删账号、在「操作记录」查谁改了什么
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/restore-deleted-accounts-and-check-audit-log?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 4 步就能恢复误删账号并查清操作记录：在「账号」页打开「最近删除」查看 30 天内删掉的号，按账号或运营筛选后点「恢复」或「恢复所选 N 个」找回账号，再进入「团队 → 成员 → 操作记录」按日期查看「谁、什么时候、改了什么」，并在搜索框搜名字、店铺或账号定位变更记录。

问: 删除账号时为什么会弹出「这个号最近 7 天出了 N 单，删掉后订单就不再同步」？
答: 为了防止误删正在出单的主力号，系统在删除前会自动检测该号近 7 天是否有订单或正在同步订单，并提示「删除后 30 天内可在『最近删除』里恢复」，方便随时找回账号。

问: 如果没去「最近删除」点恢复，直接拿那个 TikTok 号重新扫码授权会怎样？
答: 系统会自动识别该 TikTok 账号曾在本机构内，重新扫码授权成功后会自动从「最近删除」恢复该账号，并无缝衔接原有的历史订单与作品记录。

问: 为什么「操作记录」里看不到系统后台自动跑的数据同步记录？
答: 为了避免日常自动同步刷屏掩盖关键人工操作，系统自动迁移和定时同步记录已默认隐藏，「操作记录」只保留管理员、组长和员工触发的真实人工改动。

问: 普通运营员工能看到「操作记录」或自己恢复账号吗？
答: 「团队 → 成员 → 操作记录」仅对拥有成员管理权限的管理员和负责人开放，普通员工无法查看。从「最近删除」恢复账号则需要拥有「账号」管理权限并确保机构还有空余的账号名额。

## 怎么在利润页看每日利润与团队利润排行
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/check-daily-and-team-profit-breakdown?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 4 步就能在星队长查看每日利润与团队利润排行：在左侧导航进入「账本 → 利润」（`/app/profit`），在顶部切换「今天 / 昨天 / 近 7 天 / 本月 / 上月」查看总剩与「钱去哪了」收支拆解，在「每天赚多少」日历或柱状图点格子核对单日盈亏，最后在下方「哪个团队最赚钱」和「看每个号赚了还是亏」查看团队利润排行与单号投产。

问: 为什么「每天赚多少」日历里有几天标红亏钱，提示「多半是那天记了账号启动投入」？
答: 查看每日利润与团队利润排行时，账号启动支出在每日日历里默认记在记录当天，因此集中记录账号投入的那几天会显示单日亏损；而一次性日常花销默认按当月天数平均摊到每天，也可在「设置 → 成本怎么算 → 一次性支出」里调整分摊方式。

问: 「哪个团队最赚钱」点开员工后显示的「投产」是怎么算的？
答: 页面说明：「投产 = 赚到 ÷ 他名下账号的账号投入钱（按设置摊到这段时间的那部分）。不含设备、网络、房租和工资；这段时间没有账号投入钱就显示『—』。」方便主管直接评估每位运营名下账号的账号回本效率。

问: 为什么「哪个团队最赚钱」卡片提示「这段时间没有团队出单」？
答: 团队利润排行通过「订单 → 出单账号 → 账号负责人 → 员工所属小组」归集数据。按页面提示「先在『团队』里把员工分好组，在『账号』里给号设好负责人」，未分配负责人的账号则会单独列在「没分给员工的号」里。

问: 员工工资是怎么算进「账本 → 利润」页的？
答: 系统会同步工资表数据：员工的「底薪、补贴按天摊；提成、奖金、扣款和工资表同一份数」。如果当前查看的是「本月」，工资会按「员工工资（估到今天）」参与计算；在「看每个号赚了还是亏」单号明细中则只扣摊到该号的花销、不含工资。

## 怎么在首页查看工作台业绩排行榜（商品、店铺、账号与员工排行）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/view-product-shop-and-staff-rankings?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

只需 4 步就能在星队长查看工作台业绩排行榜：打开工作台首页（`/app/home`）在顶部选好日期范围，在中部「经营排行」卡片切换「商品排行」「店铺排行」「账号排行」「员工排行」「小组排行」五个页签查看前五名，点击右上角「完整排行」展开抽屉榜单，再按成交额（GMV）或出单数切换查看商品、店铺、员工与部门分组的完整排名和结算归属。

问: 工作台业绩排行榜里的排名是按什么口径排序的？包含退款单吗？
答: 工作台业绩排行榜与首页、订单中心共用同一套统计口径：默认按所选日期范围内的成交额（GMV）从高到低排序，顶部也汇总了去掉退款后的「有效成交额」与「有效订单」数；可在订单筛选中进一步按来源或售后状态过滤。

问: 在「商品出单排行」里看到商品标着「待绑定合作商家」，能直接在榜单里绑吗？
答: 可以。在「商品出单排行」完整榜单里，每条商品右侧都会显示当前合作商家绑定状态；点击「绑定合作商家 / 结算」或「修改归属 / 结算」，即可直接为该商品指定合作商家店铺与线下佣金率，保存后历史及后续同商品订单都会自动继承。

问: 员工换了小组或账号换了运营后，工作台业绩排行榜里的历史业绩归谁？
答: 按星队长统一归属口径，排行榜按账号当前的负责运营以及该员工当前所在的部门、大组、小组汇总统计；当账号移交给新运营或员工调组后，所选时段内的排行汇总会跟随当前归属人更新。

问: 为什么工作台业绩排行榜显示「这天没出单」或「首单后自动入榜」？
答: 当所选日期还没有产生订单，或者新绑定的账号还在同步（「订单还在同步」）时，榜单会提示「这天没出单」或「首单后自动入榜」。你可以先切到「近7天」或「本月」查看近期累计排行。

## 星队长账号分组设置：分组、类型标签与爆款线怎么配
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/tutorials/configure-account-groups-categories-and-viral-threshold?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长账号分组设置只需 4 步：在左侧导航打开「账号 → 账号设置」（`/app/accounts/settings`），在「显示」卡片选择默认排序、列表或双列视图与播放榜周期，在「分组与类型」卡片添加部门分组和自定义账号类型，最后在「爆款线」卡片设定播放达到多少算爆款并核对「数据刷新」规则，点右上角「保存设置」生效。

问: 在账号分组与爆款线设置里想删除一个「分组」，为什么提示「还有 N 个号在这个分组，先在账号『编辑』里改掉」？
答: 为了防止误删正在使用的部门分组导致筛选混乱，当某个分组下还挂着账号时系统会阻止直接删除。先回「账号」列表在对应账号的「编辑」里改到别的分组，显示为 `0 个号` 后即可点「删除这个分组」。

问: 改了「爆款线」里的播放量后，哪些页面的数据会跟着变？
答: 「爆款线」是全队统一标准（只算挂车及掉车作品）。点「保存设置」后，工作台里的「爆款榜」「账号分析」「作品分析」以及每个号的「单号详情页」都会立即按新的播放量阈值统计爆款数和爆款率。

问: 在「显示」卡片把「小黄车」或「分组」关掉，会把账号的数据删掉吗？
答: 不会。正如页面副标题和卡片说明所写：「只改账号页怎么显示，不会改动账号数据」「关掉只是不显示，数据都还在；卡片固定列最近 6 条挂车作品」。随时重新勾上就能恢复显示。

问: 点右上角「恢复默认」会把我已经建好的分组和类型清空吗？
答: 不会。按钮提示明确写着「显示和爆款线恢复成推荐设置；分组和类型不动」，因此点「恢复默认」只会把显示偏好和 1 万爆款线还原，你建好的分组与类型都会保留。

## 星队长隐私政策｜TikTok授权与经营数据安全保护说明（2026）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/privacy?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长隐私政策从 4 方面保护你的账号和数据：只用来给你提供服务，不卖、不出租、不拿去做广告；每个机构的数据相互隔离；TikTok 账号走官方扫码授权，我们拿不到密码；授权令牌和号库密码加密保存。你可以随时查看、导出或删除自己的数据。

问: 按星队长隐私政策，接入星队长需要提供 TikTok 账号的登录密码吗？
答: 不需要。根据星队长隐私政策，TikTok 账号通过官方扫码或 OAuth 授权接入，星队长不会索取你的 TikTok 登录密码；你随时可以在星队长后台或 TikTok App「设置与隐私 → 安全 → 应用和服务」中撤销授权。

问: 星队长隐私政策怎么保障不同带货机构、不同员工之间的数据隔离？
答: 根据星队长隐私政策，所有业务数据严格按机构隔离；同一机构内部按「老板 — 部门负责人 — 普通员工」三级角色与部门范围控制权限，账号成本、公共开支和公司利润默认仅对机构负责人可见。

问: 号库里自愿录入的内部账号密码，在星队长隐私政策下是怎么保护的？
答: 按星队长隐私政策，机构在号库中自愿录入的账号密码与 2FA 密钥在落库前经过加密存储，仅对申请人、商务和机构负责人开放查看，并且每一次点击查看密码都会记录查看人与精确时间戳供审计。

问: 工具箱上传的视频文件和公开视频爆款拆解结果会怎么保存？
答: 根据星队长隐私政策，你在工具箱上传的本地音视频原始文件在转写和拆解处理完成后即被删除，仅保留转写翻译文本与分镜拆解结果；针对公开 TikTok 视频的拆解结果仅包含公开视频信息，不包含任何机构私有经营数据。

问: Chrome 扩展「星队长同步助手」会读取无关网页或浏览记录吗？
答: 不会。按星队长隐私政策，该扩展仅在你手动输入 6 位同步码并点击「同步橱窗数据」时处理当前 TikTok 登录所需认证信息，不读取通讯录、浏览历史或无关网站内容，严格遵守 Chrome Web Store Limited Use 要求。

问: 如果团队不再使用星队长，怎么按星队长隐私政策申请导出或删除数据？
答: 订单、结算单等日常数据可直接在对应功能页导出 Excel；如需整库导出、删除特定数据或注销机构账号，可按星队长隐私政策通过工作台「我的 → 联系客服」或发送邮件联系我们，我们会在核实身份后 15 个工作日内答复并在注销后 30 个工作日内完成清理。

## 星队长服务条款｜账号授权、数据归属与使用规范说明（2026）
链接: https://xingduizhang.com/terms?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

星队长服务条款主要规定 6 件事：使用即表示同意服务条款和隐私政策；机构的数据归机构所有；统计和预估以 TikTok、供应链的实际结算为准；要遵守法律和平台规则；星队长不是 TikTok 官方产品；免费版不收费，付费版按价格页的版本开通。

问: 按星队长服务条款，机构录入的账号、订单、商家和成本数据归谁所有？
答: 根据星队长服务条款，机构录入、上传以及通过官方授权接入的全部业务数据，以及基于这些数据生成的报表和日报，均归机构所有；星队长仅在提供服务所需范围内替机构存储与处理，支持随时按页面功能导出。

问: 星队长服务条款对订单、佣金和利润数字的效力怎么约定？
答: 按星队长服务条款，星队长展示的订单、佣金、利润和播放数据来自平台接口与机构录入规则，仅供日常经营管理和对账参考；最终结算金额以 TikTok 平台官方账单及合作供应链实际付款为准。

问: 美区订单和商家结算单在统计时区上有什么约定？
答: 根据星队长服务条款说明，美区订单与日常利润默认按固定 GMT-8（北京时间每天 16:00 换天）统计，与 TikTok App 数据页一致；在商务中心出结算单时，机构可按约定选择商家时区（美西时间）或系统时间（GMT-8）核对。

问: 会员版本升级、续费或到期降级后，原来的历史数据会丢失吗？
答: 不会丢失。按星队长服务条款，升级或续费后原有账号、订单、合作商家、考勤和成本台账全部继续使用；若降级或超出手动刷新、视频拆解等次数额度，仅对应高阶功能暂停新增，已有历史数据完整保留。

问: 星队长服务条款明确禁止哪些违规行为？
答: 根据星队长服务条款，用户不得违反法律法规或 TikTok 平台规则，不得未经授权访问其他机构数据，不得对星队长进行反向工程、破解、批量爬虫抓取，也不得转售、出租星队长账号。

问: 停止使用或申请注销机构账号前，怎么把数据导出来？
答: 机构可随时在订单中心、商务中心、经营核算等页面直接导出 Excel 明细，也可在申请注销前联系星队长客服协助导出；机构正式注销后，我们会按星队长服务条款与《隐私政策》在 30 个工作日内完成数据删除。

二、English pages (Star Captain)

Star Captain is a workspace for TikTok Shop creators and agencies, and an independent product—not an official TikTok product. This section mirrors the Chinese pages above in English.

## Star Captain
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

The workspace for TikTok Shop teams. Manage accounts, orders, videos, and your team in one place.

Q: What is Star Captain?
A: Star Captain brings TikTok accounts, orders, team workflows, profit and cost, and partner commission settlements into one workspace. Owners see the business; creators focus on producing and publishing.

Q: What does the workspace include?
A: Account management, order sync, and performance tracking, plus team status, assignments, video reviews, attendance, payroll, and automatic daily reports. Track account and equipment costs, profit, and partner settlements alongside your operations.

Q: How many TikTok accounts can I manage?
A: Every plan includes unlimited TikTok accounts across 4 management tiers: Free (up to 3 members) for accounts and orders; Basic (up to 10 members) for partner settlements, samples, and payback; Pro (up to 30 members, 2 Product Selection seats) for agency ledger, payroll, and live office; Enterprise (up to 100 members, 5 Product Selection seats) for task reviews, formal attendance, daily reports, and multi-department management.

Q: Do I need to share my TikTok password?
A: No. Accounts connect through official TikTok authorization — secure and compliant. Passwords you choose to enter into the account inventory are encrypted, access-restricted, and logged when viewed.

Q: Which markets and reporting dates are supported?
A: Ten country storefronts are live today—the US, Mexico, Brazil, the UK, and 6 Southeast Asian markets (Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Vietnam, the Philippines, and Singapore)—with 6 more global TikTok Shop markets rolling out next. Switch markets in the workspace to see local currencies. US orders and profit are reported on fixed GMT-8 (changing day at 16:00 Beijing time to match the TikTok App), and the previous day's report goes out at 16:30.

Q: How much does Star Captain cost?
A: The Free plan is $0 (up to 3 members, no card required, unlimited TikTok accounts). Basic is $29/month ($290/year, up to 10 members); Pro is $99/month ($990/year, up to 30 members, 2 Product Selection seats); Enterprise launches at $299/month, $2,990/year (regular $449/month, up to 100 members, 5 Product Selection seats). Standalone Product Selection is $37/month/seat with a 3-day (72-hour) free trial (once per agency, manually activated by the owner). USD prices are approximate; checkout is billed in CNY.

## TikTok accounts
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/features/tiktok-account-management?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Manage multiple TikTok accounts in one place: Star Captain helps agencies manage hundreds of TikTok accounts, flags accounts quiet for 7 days, catches Showcase restrictions, and brings followers, views, videos, and product links together, with sourcing and costs on record.

Q: Do I need to share my password to authorize?
A: No password is required to connect and sync data. Accounts connect through official TikTok QR or OAuth authorization in line with TikTok Shop Academy security guidelines, while optional inventory passwords are encrypted and role-restricted.

Q: How often do views update?
A: Views and video lists refresh automatically once a day at 9 AM Beijing time for all active accounts. When you manage multiple TikTok accounts, you can also trigger manual single or batch refreshes for active and selling accounts within your plan allowance.

Q: Can I still see orders after a Showcase restriction?
A: Yes, historical and trailing orders remain visible after a Showcase restriction. Normal order sync continues for 48 hours, followed by daily refund and settlement checks for 30 days so month-end reconciliation stays complete.

Q: How do we assign TikTok accounts to different operators and groups?
A: Each TikTok account can be assigned to an owner and organized by department and subgroup. When an account is reassigned, future order attribution and daily performance rankings update automatically while historical audit logs stay intact.

Q: How does Account Inventory protect login credentials during handoffs?
A: Account handles, encrypted passwords, 2FA secrets, and recovery emails are stored in Account Inventory. Staff submit a request for 1 to 20 accounts, leads approve the handoff, and every password view is logged with the viewer and timestamp.

Q: Can we manage US, UK, Southeast Asia, and Latin America TikTok accounts in the same dashboard?
A: The workspace organizes accounts across 10 country storefronts: the United States, Mexico, Brazil, the United Kingdom, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Vietnam, the Philippines and Singapore. Account types, authorization and available order data differ by market; verify the scope shown in your workspace and authorization result.

## Orders & performance
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/features/performance-analytics?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok Shop analytics in Star Captain syncs orders and commission about every 10 minutes, with GMV, platform commission, estimated off-platform commission, and refunds counted in GMT-8 to match the TikTok app.

Q: Why don't my numbers match TikTok?
A: Align the reporting time zone and order status filter first. Star Captain's TikTok affiliate order tracking uses fixed GMT-8 (changing day at 4 PM Beijing time, matching the TikTok App data page), whereas US TikTok Seller Center uses Pacific Time; sync lags by only a few minutes and refunds follow platform updates.

Q: How is staff performance calculated?
A: Staff performance is totaled automatically from the orders on each employee's assigned accounts. When an account changes owners, new orders count toward the new owner, and role permissions control whether staff see only their own accounts or group rankings.

Q: How does Star Captain separate paid Shop Ads orders from organic orders?
A: Every synced order carries its traffic attribution label so TikTok affiliate order tracking separates organic short-video orders from paid Shop Ads orders, allowing your team to apply separate partner commission rates and evaluate true ROAS.

Q: How often do TikTok Shop affiliate orders and refunds sync?
A: Orders sync automatically about every 10 minutes after account authorization, with immediate 7-day sync and up to 90-day background backfill. Full refunds, partial refunds, returns, and cancellations are labeled separately as platform updates arrive.

Q: How are channel account summaries different from Showcase order details?
A: Showcase accounts provide itemized affiliate order details including product, store, GMV, and commission, whereas shop-linked channel accounts are presented as account-level daily sales summaries without fabricating item-level rows.

Q: Can we export filtered order tables to Excel for brand reconciliation?
A: Yes. You can filter orders by date range, account, traffic source, partner brand, or after-sales status, then download up to 30 days and 500 orders instantly or generate up to 90-day Excel exports in the background.

## Team management
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/features/team-management?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

As TikTok Shop team management software, Star Captain lets you manage your creator team with a written daily report at 16:30 Beijing time and a live view of who's working, editing, or away. Assignments and reviews connect to attendance and payroll.

Q: Do staff need to keep the page open?
A: No, staff do not need to keep the office page open all day. They can clock in, switch status, or log completed videos in one click from the top bar or mobile web, with permissions isolated by owner, lead, and staff roles.

Q: Can I import attendance from DingTalk?
A: Yes, you can import monthly attendance sheets exported from DingTalk or WeCom. If no external sheet is imported and attendance rules are enabled, payroll automatically uses Star Captain's own clock-in records.

Q: Do review videos stay in storage forever?
A: No, video files are cleaned up automatically to save storage while keeping all written records. Approved or replaced video files are removed after 7 days and rejected files after 30 days without re-upload, while timestamped feedback and task history remain permanently.

Q: How do frame-accurate video reviews speed up creator editing?
A: When an editor uploads a cut against an assigned product task, the team lead can pause on any exact video frame to leave timestamped revision notes, approve the cut, or return it for changes with a complete version history.

Q: How does the publishing log verify whether creators actually posted?
A: After publishing a shoppable video on TikTok, staff log the account, product, and video count in Star Captain, and the system automatically cross-checks those entries against synced TikTok videos and active product cart links.

Q: What is included in the 16:30 Beijing time written daily report?
A: Once the previous US day closes on fixed GMT-8, the 16:30 daily report summarizes company profit, order count, GMV, editing completion rate, attendance, and accounts needing attention in a ready-to-share text summary.

## Profit & cost
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/features/profit-accounting?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Calculate profit for each TikTok account with one formula: commission income minus costs. Star Captain's TikTok Shop profit tracking adds 5 cost types (account setup costs, devices, networks, payroll, and expenses), then breaks daily profit down by team, person, and account.

Q: Is profit based on cash received?
A: No, operating profit is recognized from synced orders rather than waiting for cash arrival. TikTok Shop profit tracking calculates daily revenue from platform and partner commission net of refunds, while Business center settlements track actual payment collection.

Q: How do exchange rates work?
A: You can set a dedicated settlement exchange rate for each partner brand, while platform affiliate commission and partners without a custom rate use your configurable default rate (initially 6.8 CNY/USD).

Q: Can staff see profit?
A: No, company profit and cost breakdowns are restricted to the organization owner. Department leads see only their group's order output, and employees can view only their own confirmed monthly payroll details.

Q: How are account payback days and banned-account losses calculated?
A: TikTok Shop profit tracking divides recovered commission by each account's recorded setup cost plus allocated device and network expenses to compute the payback ratio and estimated days to break even, while unrecovered costs on banned accounts are totaled separately.

Q: How are work phones, network lines, and shared office overhead allocated?
A: Work phones amortize daily over 180 days by default and network lines or AI seats allocate by monthly fee from your resource ledger, while unassigned overhead such as rent, utilities, and sample shipping is distributed across staff by assigned account count.

Q: How does progressive commission combine with attendance in monthly payroll?
A: You can configure up to 10 progressive commission tiers by role or individual. At month-end, Star Captain combines net commission from assigned accounts with attendance-adjusted base pay, bonuses, and deductions, then freezes confirmed payslips.

## Brand deals
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/features/business-center?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Agencies reconcile off-platform commission with brands in 3 steps. With TikTok Shop commission settlement in Star Captain, you match each order to its partner and rate, lock each period into a statement, and track when initial and final payments arrive.

Q: How do settlements relate to Profit & cost?
A: They track two separate stages without double counting. Profit & cost recognizes daily operating income from order-level commission, whereas TikTok Shop commission settlement tracks confirmed partner statements and actual cash collection.

Q: What if one partner has multiple stores?
A: Link all of that partner's stores under the same partner record. Once linked, future orders from every connected store map and consolidate into that partner's settlement statement automatically.

Q: Can staff access Business center?
A: No, general creators and editors cannot access partner rates or settlement statements. Business center access is restricted by role to organization owners and authorized business staff.

Q: Which commission rate wins when a partner has both store and product rules?
A: TikTok Shop commission settlement evaluates four priority tiers on every order — Order override, Product rule, Store default, and Partner default — always applying the most specific rule and recording which rule matched.

Q: Can we set different partner commission rates for organic vs. Shop Ads orders?
A: Yes. When separate paid-traffic calculation is enabled on a store or product, ad-attributed orders use their dedicated paid-traffic commission rate while organic orders use the standard partner rate.

Q: How do we track 80% initial payments, 20% final balances, and overdue bills?
A: Confirming a statement freezes its orders, GMV, commission, and exchange rate. Default terms schedule an 80% initial payment due in 3 days and a 20% final balance due in 15 days, with partial receipt logging and automatic overdue flags.

## Creator toolbox
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/features/creator-toolbox?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Break down why a TikTok video sells in 3 parts with Star Captain's TikTok creator toolbox and TikTok video teardown: paste a link or upload the video, and Star Captain transcribes and translates it, splits the hook, body, and call to action, and builds a reusable template.

Q: Which videos can I analyze?
A: You can paste any public TikTok video link or upload a local video file. The TikTok video teardown tool transcribes the audio, translates the script, and extracts the hook, selling points, and conversion structure.

Q: When will product research launch?
A: Product Selection is included with Pro (2 seats) and Enterprise (5 seats), or available standalone at $37/month/seat with a 3-day (72-hour) free trial (once per agency, manually activated by the owner).

Q: How do editors turn a TikTok video teardown into a shootable script brief?
A: Each TikTok video teardown breaks the reference clip into three timestamped sections — opening hook (0–3s), product proof body, and conversion call to action — alongside full dialogue transcription, translation, and a reusable shot-by-shot script template that can be attached directly to product assignments.

Q: Does viewing a previously analyzed public video use another teardown credit?
A: No. Once a public TikTok video has been analyzed, its timestamped breakdown, transcript, and translated script are saved and shared across your workspace. Opening saved results uses zero credits, and failed analyses are refunded automatically.

Q: How do we track work phones, network lines, and AI tool seats in the toolbox?
A: The Devices, networks & AI accounts ledger records each phone, network line, and AI subscription by purpose, staff custody, monthly cost and expiration date, triggering an automatic renewal alert 7 days before expiry.

Q: Do we need to re-enter device and network costs in Profit & cost manually?
A: No manual double entry is required. Work phone amortization (default 180 days), monthly network line fees, and AI tool subscriptions logged in the creator toolbox sync automatically into Profit & cost every day to calculate true per-account payback.

## TikTok Shop Agency Management Software Features (2026)
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/features?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok Shop agency management software needs 6 core TikTok Shop agency management features: account management, affiliate order and commission tracking, creator team management, profit accounting, partner commission settlement, and viral video teardown. Star Captain puts all 6 workflows in one workspace.

Q: What are the six core TikTok Shop agency management features in Star Captain?
A: Star Captain's TikTok Shop agency management workspace brings six core modules into one place: TikTok Account Management (matrix dashboard and encrypted account inventory), Orders & Performance (10-minute affiliate order sync and rankings), Team Management (live office, product briefs, frame-accurate video reviews, attendance, and 16:30 daily reports), Profit & Cost (account payback, device amortization, and 10-tier payroll), Brand Deals (4-tier partner commission statements and 80%/20% payment tracking), and Creator Toolbox (viral video teardown and device/network ledger).

Q: Can we start with just account and order tracking before enabling team and finance modules?
A: Yes. Each TikTok Shop agency management module works standalone or as part of a connected workflow. Many teams connect their TikTok accounts first to centralize 10-minute order tracking and daily view refreshes on the Free plan, then turn on partner commission rules, frame-accurate task reviews, and daily profit accounting as they scale.

Q: How does data flow automatically across accounts, partner billing, payroll, and profit?
A: In our TikTok Shop agency management system, you enter or authorize data once: connected TikTok accounts sync orders every 10 minutes, Brand Deals calculates off-platform commission across four priority tiers, and Profit & Cost subtracts account costs, 180-day work phone amortization, monthly network fees, and attendance-based payroll to report net profit by team, staff member, and account.

Q: Do we need to share TikTok passwords to use Star Captain's TikTok Shop agency management features?
A: No password is required to connect and sync data. Accounts connect through official TikTok QR or OAuth authorization, while optional credentials stored in Account Inventory for internal handoffs are encrypted at rest and logged with user and timestamp on every view.

Q: How do role permissions control which TikTok Shop agency management features each team member can access?
A: Three-tier access separates Owner, Department Lead, and Staff views across the TikTok Shop agency management workspace: creators see only their assigned accounts, editing tasks, and confirmed payslips; leads manage their group's desk status, reviews, and order rankings; and company profit, account costs, and partner rates stay restricted to authorized roles.

Q: Which TikTok Shop markets are supported across these TikTok Shop agency management features today?
A: The workspace organizes accounts across 10 country storefronts: the United States, Mexico, Brazil, the United Kingdom, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Vietnam, the Philippines and Singapore. Account types, authorization and available order data differ by market; verify the scope shown in your workspace and authorization result.

## TikTok Shop Solutions: Agency Team & Account Management 2026
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/solutions?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

A TikTok Shop creator agency can manage its team and accounts in one workspace. Star Captain's TikTok Shop solutions are used by 1,400+ agencies; here is what fits solo creators, growing teams, and multi-department companies.

Q: Which TikTok Shop solution should a solo creator with a dozen accounts start with?
A: Solo creators can start on the Free plan ($0, up to 3 members, no card required, unlimited TikTok accounts): connect Showcase and channel profiles via official QR authorization to sync affiliate orders every 10 minutes, refresh video views daily, and flag dropped product links or Showcase restrictions automatically. Upgrade to Basic ($29/mo, up to 10 members) when you need partner commission billing and per-account payback tracking.

Q: How does a 5-to-30 person creator studio coordinate editing, reviews, and partner billing?
A: Growing creator teams use the live team office to track daily editing targets, dispatch product briefs with viral video teardowns, leave frame-accurate review notes, and automate 4-tier partner commission statements with 80% initial and 20% final payment tracking.

Q: How do multi-department TikTok Shop agencies isolate group data while rolling up company profit?
A: Three-tier permissions separate Owner, Department Lead, and Staff views: creators see only their assigned accounts, team leads manage their own group's output without seeing company costs, and owners drill into daily net profit from company to department, staff member, and account.

Q: Are there limits on TikTok accounts or team seats as our agency scales?
A: Every Star Captain plan includes unlimited TikTok accounts, and restricted or inactive accounts never need to be deleted. Team member seats scale by plan: Free includes up to 3 members, Basic up to 10 (expandable by up to 5 extra members at $7/member/mo), Pro up to 30 (with 2 Product Selection seats), and Enterprise up to 100 (with 5 Product Selection seats); agencies over 100 members can request a custom quote.

Q: Do we need to migrate or re-import data when moving from a solo workflow to a team setup?
A: No migration is required. All connected TikTok accounts, historical affiliate orders, encrypted inventory credentials, partner store commission rules, and device or network cost ledgers stay intact as you add departments, subgroups, and staff.

Q: How do multi-country teams manage US, UK, Southeast Asia, and Latin America accounts in one workspace?
A: Star Captain supports 10 live country storefronts—the United States, Mexico, Brazil, the United Kingdom, and 6 Southeast Asian markets (Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Vietnam, the Philippines, and Singapore)—with native currency display. US orders and profit use fixed GMT-8 (cutoff at 16:00 Beijing time), and the previous day's written report is generated automatically at 16:30 Beijing time.

## Star Captain Pricing 2026: Plans, Costs & What's Included
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/pricing?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Star Captain pricing starts at $0: 4 management tiers with unlimited TikTok accounts—Free ($0, up to 3 members, no card required), Basic ($29/mo, up to 10 members), Pro ($99/mo, up to 30 members, 2 Product Selection seats), and Enterprise (launch $299/mo, up to 100 members, 5 Product Selection seats)—plus standalone Product Selection at $37/mo/seat. USD prices are approximate; checkout is billed in CNY. New sign-ups get 3 days of Pro free.

Q: How does yearly billing work?
A: Annual billing is priced at 10 months, giving you 2 months free each year. For example, Basic is $290 a year and Pro is $990 a year.

Q: How long does launch pricing last? Will prices go up later?
A: Enterprise, Product picks only, and Basic + Product picks offer launch pricing through February 28, 2027 (Beijing time). Subscribe during the launch window and keep renewing, and your rate is locked in for 24 months. Basic and Pro are already at their regular price, with no separate launch discount.

Q: Accounts are unlimited. Does that mean unlimited refreshes?
A: You can connect unlimited TikTok accounts on every plan. Automatic view refresh frequency depends on your tier: accounts in full-speed slots refresh up to every 4 hours, while other active accounts refresh once daily. Order sync runs separately and never uses refresh quota. You can add a Full-speed account pack anytime you need more slots.

Q: How does the 3-day Product picks trial work?
A: Each organization gets one 3-day trial for 1 seat. The 72-hour timer starts only when the owner clicks Start trial. There is no automatic charge when it ends, and your saved picks and history stay intact. Without Product picks, you can still view the top 3 on each of yesterday's lists.

Q: What do I get when I sign up?
A: A 3-day Pro trial. When it ends you continue on Free and keep all your data. Product picks also has its own one-time 3-day free trial per organization.

Q: I'm an existing member or have a gifted membership. Will my benefits change?
A: No. All previously purchased plans, lifetime benefits, gifted memberships, and active trials keep their original terms until expiration. Nothing is switched to the new plans automatically.

Q: What's the difference between Pro and Enterprise team features?
A: Pro covers core team operations: the staff productivity board (each person's daily and monthly orders, posts, and GMV), basic clock-in attendance, and 1 live office (up to 30 people). Enterprise unlocks the full team suite: multi-department scopes, staff scorecards and targets, task dispatch approvals, leave and missed-punch approvals, daily and weekly report rollups, multiple live offices, and wallboard view.

Q: What if we have more than 100 people?
A: Enterprise includes up to 100 people; for larger agencies, contact Star Captain support for a custom quote. On the Basic plan, you can add extra members at $7/person/mo, up to 15 people total.

Q: Do I lose data when upgrading or downgrading?
A: No. When you upgrade mid-cycle, remaining days on your current plan are credited on a prorated basis. After a downgrade, higher-tier features pause, while your ledgers, payroll records, and saved picks stay intact and return whenever you upgrade again.

Q: How do credits and teardowns work?
A: Monthly plan credits are shared across your organization and reset at month-end, whereas purchased credit packs never expire. Viral video teardowns use your monthly teardown allowance rather than credits (Enterprise flagship teardowns count as 2 uses). Failed teardowns are refunded automatically, and viewing a previously analyzed public video uses zero quota.

## About Star Captain: Company, Team & Product Story (2026)
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/about?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Star Captain is account and operations management software for TikTok Shop teams, used by 1,400+ agencies to run 20,000+ accounts. Ten country storefronts—the US, Mexico, Brazil, the UK, and 6 Southeast Asian markets—are live today across 16 TikTok Shop markets on the roadmap.

Q: How do I access Star Captain on desktop and mobile?
A: Open xingduizhang.com in a desktop browser to log into the full workspace. On mobile, visiting xingduizhang.com opens the mobile web view, or you can scan via WeChat to open the mini program. Available features vary by interface.

Q: Is Star Captain an official TikTok product?
A: No. Star Captain is an independent software product for creator teams and agencies. References to TikTok, TikTok Shop, and TikTok Seller Center describe supported workflows and do not imply platform endorsement.

Q: How often does data update?
A: Orders sync about every 10 minutes as TikTok returns data, completing the previous US day by 16:30 Beijing time in fixed GMT-8. Videos, followers, and views refresh daily at 9:00 and every 2 hours during the day, with unlimited manual refreshes for US accounts. Any metric not yet returned by the platform is labeled clearly rather than treated as zero.

Q: Can every member see all data?
A: No. Inside the Star Captain creator agency workspace, access is isolated by organization, 3-tier role (Owner, Department Lead, Staff), and department or group scope. Staff see only their own accounts and tasks, leads see their group's operational metrics, and company profit and costs are restricted to the owner by default.

Q: Which TikTok Shop markets and reporting time zones are supported today?
A: Inside the Star Captain creator agency workspace, accounts and affiliate orders in 10 country storefronts—the United States, Mexico, Brazil, the United Kingdom, and 6 Southeast Asian markets (Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Vietnam, the Philippines, and Singapore)—are live today, with 6 additional global TikTok Shop markets rolling out next. US order and profit metrics are tallied on fixed GMT-8 (changing day at 16:00 Beijing time to match the mobile app's data view and closing the previous day's daily report at 16:30), while partner settlement statements can also be reconciled on US Pacific Time.

Q: How do existing creator teams migrate spreadsheets for accounts, partner stores, and costs?
A: Inside the Star Captain creator agency workspace, teams can bulk-import new account records into Account Inventory, paste store or product links in Business Center to bind partner brands and 4-tier commission rules automatically, and log work phones (amortized over 180 days), network lines, and monthly overhead in Profit & Cost without rebuilding historical spreadsheets from scratch.

## TikTok Account Data Refresh: Star Captain Order Sync (2026)
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/help/data-refresh?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Star Captain syncs TikTok orders about every 10 minutes, and the previous day is complete by 16:30 Beijing time. Other TikTok account data refresh on a schedule: videos and views at 9:00, every 2 hours until 22:05, and 23:55; Showcase account ban checks at 11:10 daily (channel accounts every 6 days); and unlimited manual US refreshes.

Q: How soon after QR authorization does a new TikTok account show data?
A: Newly connected TikTok accounts typically complete their first profile and video fetch within about 1 minute of authorization, while the order center immediately syncs the latest 7 days of affiliate orders and backfills up to 90 days in the background.

Q: Why can today's order count differ slightly from TikTok Seller Center?
A: The difference usually comes from reporting time zones: Star Captain tallies daily orders on fixed GMT-8 (changing day at 16:00 Beijing time to match the TikTok mobile app), whereas US TikTok Seller Center uses US Pacific Time. You can switch to merchant time when reconciling statements.

Q: Which accounts qualify for extra automatic refreshes every 4 hours?
A: Accounts labeled Posting (published in the last 7 days), Growing (shoppable video views up by 1,000 or 20% day over day), or Selling (orders in the last 7 days) automatically receive an extra refresh every 4 hours between 10:00 and 24:00 Beijing time.

Q: Does manual video refresh consume our order sync allowance?
A: No. Affiliate order sync runs automatically about every 10 minutes and never uses manual refresh allowances. Manual refreshes apply only to on-demand video and view checks: US accounts have unlimited manual refreshes (one per account every 2 minutes), while Mexico and Brazil accounts follow daily plan allowances.

Q: What happens to order sync after a Showcase restriction is detected?
A: Showcase status on creator (Showcase) accounts is checked daily at 11:10 Beijing time, while channel accounts are checked every 6 days. If a previously active Showcase disappears, the account is flagged automatically, normal 10-minute order sync continues for 48 hours, and daily refund or settlement updates run for 30 days so month-end accounting stays complete.

Q: How are viral video teardown credits counted and refunded?
A: Completed teardowns of public TikTok videos are shared across the workspace, so opening a saved breakdown uses zero credits. If an analysis fails to process, the credit is refunded automatically; a credit is used only on a new teardown or when you click re-analyze.

## 49 TikTok Shop Agency Guides & Creator SOPs (2026)
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

How do TikTok Shop agencies manage creators and accounts? TikTok Shop agencies manage creators and accounts with clear records and shared rules across these 49 TikTok Shop agency guides. Organized into 6 operational pillars, these TikTok Shop agency guides cover our 60-term agency glossary, account inventories and dormant account revival, conversion funnel diagnosis and multi-country cutoffs, team permissions, 7-day onboarding, and commission tiers, partner brand tiering and month-end closing, plus BFCM prep, studio libraries, 48-hour viral remakes, and TikTok Shop platform rules on commission rates, payouts, Showcase, and affiliate eligibility.

Q: In what order should our team read the 49 TikTok Shop agency guides?
A: Start with the 3 featured guides at the top (agency software evaluation, affiliate profit formula, and daily report template), then jump to the pillar matching your current bottleneck: Group 1 covers the 60-term glossary, account matrix, and 7-day dormant revival (9 guides); Group 2 covers conversion funnel diagnosis, BFCM prep, and US/Mexico/Brazil time zones (8 guides); Group 3 covers three-tier permissions, 7-day onboarding, and commission tiers (10 guides); Group 4 covers partner merchant tiering, multi-currency billing, and 5-day month-end closing (9 guides); Group 5 covers product selection, 5-corner studios, and 48-hour viral remakes (7 guides); Group 6 covers TikTok Shop platform rules on commission rates, payouts, Showcase, affiliate eligibility, banned-account funds and GMV (6 guides).

Q: How are operational guides different from step-by-step tutorials?
A: The 49 operational guides explain the management rules, formulas, and SOPs behind a TikTok Shop creator agency (such as payback days, refund deductions, 7-day onboarding schedules, and 30-day BFCM checklists), first as general methods and then in Star Captain. The 34 step-by-step tutorials show the exact buttons to click in the workspace with annotated screenshots per task.

Q: Which guides work best as ready-made SOPs for a growing creator team?
A: Six guides are designed to be adopted directly as internal SOPs: the 60-Term Creator Agency Glossary, Team Roles and Three-Tier Permissions, New Hire 7-Day Onboarding SOP, Team Commission Tiers and Bonus Models, the 16:30 Daily Report Template, and the 5-Day Month-End Closing Checklist.

Q: Which guides should we read if we run accounts across the US, Mexico, and Brazil?
A: Read Check the Time Zone Before Comparing US Orders and US, Mexico & Brazil Multi-Country Management in Group 2, Multi-Country Partner Settlement and FX Cutoffs in Group 4, and English & Spanish Script Localization in Group 5 to align GMT-8, GMT-6, and GMT-3 daily cutoffs, native-currency statements, and localized scripts.

Q: Can we copy the checklists, formulas, and tables for our own team meetings?
A: Yes. Every checklist, profit formula, 60-minute weekly review agenda, 4-stage sample tracker, and merchant ABC scorecard across all 49 guides is written for day-to-day agency operations and can be used standalone or inside your Star Captain workspace.

Q: How often are the guides updated as TikTok Shop and Star Captain evolve?
A: Each guide displays its last modified date at the top. Whenever TikTok Shop affiliate settlement rules, supported markets (10 country storefronts—the US, Mexico, Brazil, the UK, and 6 Southeast Asian markets—are live today across 16 global markets), or Star Captain workspace features change, our editorial team updates both the operational guides and the linked tutorials.

## How to Manage Hundreds of TikTok Accounts Without Losing Track
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/manage-multiple-tiktok-accounts?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

How do you manage hundreds of TikTok accounts for a team? Give every account one record with 6 fields: platform ID, region, owner, status, videos, and handoff history. Keep business status and data status separate, so when something breaks, the team knows who should fix it.

Q: How do I manage multiple TikTok accounts for a team without confusion?
A: Unify 6 fields in one shared ledger: stable platform ID, market, single accountable owner, separate business and data statuses, video history, and handoff date. Review exceptions daily so no account goes unwatched.

Q: How many TikTok accounts can one team member manage?
A: It depends on the role. An operator monitoring data and scheduling can oversee 20 to 50 accounts, while a creator filming and editing original videos typically manages 5 to 15 active accounts.

Q: How do we keep historical data intact when an account changes its handle?
A: Use the immutable platform UID or an internal archive ID as the primary key instead of the @handle. When a creator updates the display name, historical videos and orders remain tied to the same record.

Q: Why should passwords stay out of the shared account spreadsheet?
A: Shared spreadsheets lack view logs and granular access controls. Store passwords and 2FA keys in an encrypted account inventory that restricts access by role and records every view.

Q: What is the difference between expired authorization and an account restriction?
A: Expired authorization only interrupts data sync with your management tool and is fixed by re-authorizing. A Showcase or account restriction is a platform action that must be checked in TikTok Seller Center or the TikTok app.

Q: When should an agency move from spreadsheets to dedicated software?
A: When more than 3 people share account operations, the roster passes 20 accounts, or daily checks for orders, missing product links, and Showcase status take more than 30 minutes.

## TikTok Shop Team Performance Tracking: 4 Rules & a Ranking Method
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-team-performance?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

For TikTok Shop team performance tracking that supports a fair ranking, agree on 4 definitions first: which date and time zone the report uses, who owns each account, which order statuses count, and how commission and refunds are treated. Then the same review produces the same numbers, and the ranking is defensible.

Q: How should a TikTok Shop team track performance without month-end disputes?
A: Lock 4 rules before the month begins: the reporting time zone (such as fixed GMT-8), the cutoff date for account handoffs, how refunded orders reduce commission, and whether bonuses use commission or net profit.

Q: Should creator team bonuses be based on GMV or commission?
A: Base them on commission rather than GMV. GMV belongs mostly to the merchant and varies widely by product margin, whereas platform plus verified partner commission reflects the revenue your team actually earned.

Q: Why do US TikTok Shop order totals differ from Beijing-time spreadsheets?
A: Because the US day ends 15 or 16 hours later than Beijing time. Under fixed GMT-8, the previous US business day closes at 16:00 Beijing time and full order sync completes around 16:30 Beijing time.

Q: How should we attribute performance when an account changes owners mid-month?
A: Split attribution by the handoff effective date, or schedule non-urgent ownership transfers for the first day of the month so each period has one clear owner per account.

Q: Should paid Shop Ads orders and organic orders be separated in team reviews?
A: Yes. Paid orders driven by merchant ad spend often carry a different partner commission rate and reflect ad budget rather than editing output. Separate paid, organic, and mixed orders in every review.

Q: How do we handle refunds that occur after a weekly performance review?
A: Track refunds separately by order ID and deduct confirmed refunded commission before finalizing monthly payroll and partner settlement statements. Once a statement is confirmed and locked, carry late adjustments into the next period.

## TikTok Account Management Tool Comparison: 8 Questions to Ask
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/choose-tk-account-management-tool?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

For a TikTok account management tool comparison, test each option with your real workflow across 4 checks: supported account types and markets, matching data definitions, granular staff permissions, and daily usability.

Q: How do I choose TikTok account management software for a creator agency?
A: Run a 7-day trial with 3 to 5 real accounts and verify 4 things: official password-free authorization, accurate US time-zone order reconciliation, role-based isolation for profit data, and full Excel export support.

Q: Is TikTok Shop agency software the same as an anti-detect browser?
A: No. Anti-detect browsers manage login environments, whereas TikTok Shop agency software like Star Captain manages post-authorization order sync, account ownership, creator workflows, partner settlements, and profit accounting.

Q: How should we verify order and commission accuracy during a software trial?
A: Pick a completed US business date (at least 48 hours old), align the time zone (fixed GMT-8 or Pacific Time), compare total orders and GMV against TikTok Seller Center, and spot-check 5 orders including refunds and Shop Ads sales.

Q: Should we use software that asks for our TikTok account passwords to sync data?
A: Evaluate that risk carefully. Compliant management tools connect through official QR or OAuth authorization to read performance data without asking for login passwords; any separate credential vault should use encryption and view audit logs.

Q: How do we test whether staff permissions are granular enough?
A: Log in with separate owner, team lead, and editor test accounts to confirm that company profit and partner commission rates remain hidden from general staff while daily tasks and personal accounts stay accessible.

Q: What happens to our historical records if we switch tools later?
A: Before committing, confirm that you can export account lists, itemized orders, and confirmed settlement statements in standard Excel or CSV formats, and keep your original ledger in parallel for the first 2 to 3 weeks.

## How to Choose TikTok Agency Software for Your Team
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tk-management-system?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

To choose TikTok agency software, test account records, order definitions, role permissions, commission and costs with an account you are authorized to use. Then verify daily collaboration and handoffs against real records, rather than counting feature names.

Q: Is a TikTok management system the same as TikTok operations software?
A: These guides use both terms for account and agency operations software. The product category manages accounts, orders, teams, and operating results; it is not a bulk publishing tool.

Q: Do I need to give Star Captain my TikTok password?
A: The QR authorization flow does not require your TikTok password. Separately, the optional account inventory workflow manages access records for accounts your organization already controls.

Q: Can agency software prevent account bans?
A: No. It can surface account changes and help assign follow-up work. It cannot override platform decisions or guarantee unrestricted distribution.

Q: Does a small team need a system?
A: Use the complexity of your workflow as the deciding factor. Shared ownership, recurring reconciliation, and partner commissions can justify a trial; a few accounts managed by one person may not.

Q: Is Star Captain an official TikTok product?
A: No. Star Captain is independent and does not claim TikTok endorsement. Account data access depends on authorization.

Q: What does the Free plan include?
A: The Free plan is $0 (up to 3 members, no card required, unlimited TikTok accounts) and includes automatic order sync, sales summaries, staff/account/product rankings, account analytics, sales-spike and restriction alerts, basic member settings and account ownership, video publishing and drafts (with official authorization), 3 order exports per month, and daily automatic view refreshes across 10 live country storefronts—the US, Mexico, Brazil, the UK, and 6 Southeast Asian markets. Partner settlements, per-account payback, product library and samples, publishing logs, scheduled and bulk publishing, and unlimited order exports start on the Basic plan; 2 Product Selection seats, cash flow and vouchers, net profit and cost allocation, payroll calculation, staff productivity board, basic clock-ins, and 1 live office start on the Pro plan; and 5 Product Selection seats, multi-department scope, task dispatch and frame-by-frame review, formal attendance with leave/missed-punch approvals, daily/weekly reports, and account inventory are included in Enterprise—see the pricing comparison for full details.

## TikTok Matrix Accounts: What They Are and How to Start
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-matrix-accounts?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok matrix accounts are multiple accounts organized around content themes or market and partner needs. Start by confirming legitimate control and authorized access, then assign content roles and owners, keep records and review sales alongside workload before expanding.

Q: What matters most when managing an account network?
A: Give each account one owner, a consistent record, and a regular review. Automate only after the team agrees on those basics.

Q: How many accounts can one person manage?
A: There is no universal number. Monitoring accounts takes less time than producing original content for each one. Set capacity from the required work, then adjust using actual output and results.

Q: Does software make multiple-account operations compliant?
A: No. Account setup, access, and content still need to follow the relevant platform requirements. Software organizes the work; it does not waive those requirements.

Q: Which numbers should we check daily?
A: Start with exceptions and selling activity. Review broader view and follower trends on a consistent weekly schedule instead of reacting to every daily fluctuation.

Q: Where should we keep account passwords?
A: Use a restricted, encrypted access workflow with view records. Do not put passwords, email credentials, or two-factor secrets in the shared operations sheet.

Q: Does a manual batch refresh update every account?
A: Star Captain prioritizes active or monitored accounts for manual batches, while scheduled refreshes cover normal accounts. Check the product's current scope and your plan allowance; order sync is separate from manual refresh credits.

## TikTok Showcase and Channel Accounts: 5 Key Differences
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/showcase-vs-channel-accounts?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok Showcase and channel accounts differ by their actual platform role. Official shop accounts only self-sell, while US marketing accounts with at least 5,000 followers can request affiliate permission for other sellers’ products. Check authorization and data sources before comparing commission or sales.

Q: What is the main difference between Showcase and channel accounts?
A: Check the actual platform role. Affiliate creators can promote eligible marketplace products; official shop accounts only self-sell. US marketing accounts with at least 5,000 followers may request affiliate permission to promote other sellers. A channel label alone does not determine commission eligibility.

Q: Can an account with no followers immediately tag products?
A: Follower count alone is insufficient. US official and marketing accounts have no minimum follower requirement for self-selling shop binding, but must meet binding, identity and product-access conditions. Marketing accounts need at least 5,000 followers and approved affiliate permission for other sellers’ products.

Q: Which account type is better for an agency?
A: It depends on product choice, partner relationships, access to data, and costs. Many teams use both and report them separately.

Q: Do channel sales create creator affiliate commission?
A: It depends on the actual account role and sales stream. Official shop accounts only self-sell. US marketing accounts with at least 5,000 followers and approved affiliate permission can promote other sellers’ products and earn affiliate commission. Record agency service fees separately.

Q: Should every account without a Showcase be marked restricted?
A: No. An account that never had a Showcase, including a channel account outside that workflow, is not evidence of a lost Showcase.

Q: Can we combine their sales numbers?
A: Only after verifying compatible scope and eliminating overlap. Keep account summaries and itemized affiliate orders separate, calculate income under each rule, and then combine at the appropriate reporting level.

## How to Reconcile Off-Platform Partner Commission
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-affiliate-commission-settlement?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

To reconcile off-platform partner commission, agree on order attribution, rates, refund treatment and the reporting period before issuing a statement. Track initial payments, final balances and overdue amounts, keeping platform affiliate payouts and actual receipts separate from partner receivables.

Q: How do platform and partner commission differ?
A: Platform commission follows the affiliate payout process. Partner commission is owed under the agency's separate agreement and needs its own calculation, reconciliation, and collection records.

Q: How do we calculate partner commission accurately?
A: Match orders to partners, apply the most specific valid rate, handle paid attribution as agreed, and leave missing or ambiguous rules pending. Then reconcile the included records for the period.

Q: What should we check when statements disagree?
A: Start with the event date and time zone, refund treatment, account and order scope, and exchange rate. Compare order IDs after the definitions match.

Q: How should initial and final payments be set?
A: Use the agreement with each partner. Store amounts and due dates separately, then record actual receipts. A default percentage in software is not a payment agreement.

Q: Does a settlement statement determine profit?
A: Star Captain separates operating income from collection. Calculated commission feeds Profit & cost; the statement and receipts track whether the agreed amount has been paid.

Q: Can every employee see settlement terms?
A: No. Business-center access is restricted by organization and role. Verify the intended permissions during setup rather than sharing partner terms in a general team report.

## TikTok Showcase Ban Check: Verify Permissions and Notices
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-showcase-ban-check?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

To check TikTok Showcase restrictions, confirm that the account previously had a Showcase, then review platform notices and commerce permissions. Check video product links and software authorization separately. A missing Showcase is a signal to investigate, not proof of an account ban.

Q: How can we tell whether a Showcase was restricted?
A: Verify that it previously existed, check its current state, and inspect platform notices. A missing area on one incomplete page load is not enough to establish the cause.

Q: How does a Showcase restriction differ from an account suspension?
A: The first concerns selling access; the second can affect the entire account. Record the specific state and use the relevant platform notice to guide follow-up.

Q: What does a missing product link mean?
A: A previously confirmed product association is no longer visible. Investigate the product, shop, video, and account before assuming why it disappeared.

Q: Can earlier orders still be tracked?
A: Historical orders remain relevant. Star Captain's documented closeout sync follows late order and refund changes for a limited period, subject to authorization and available data.

Q: How quickly will a change be detected?
A: Detection depends on the next successful scheduled or manual check. Use the observed timestamp and data status; it is not an instant-notification guarantee.

Q: What should an account alert include?
A: The account, specific issue, prior and current evidence, check time, responsible person, and next action. Keep inconclusive checks separate from confirmed restrictions.

## How to Calculate TikTok Affiliate Profit After Costs
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-affiliate-profit?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Calculate TikTok affiliate profit as commission income minus costs. Reconcile platform and partner commission, refunds and actual receipts, then include account setup, equipment, networks, payroll and overhead under one allocation policy. Review account payback separately from monthly profit.

Q: How do we calculate TikTok affiliate agency profit?
A: Start with platform and partner commission under a consistent reporting basis, account for relevant adjustments, convert currencies under your stated rule, and subtract recorded operating costs.

Q: Can we treat GMV as agency income?
A: No. Most of the sale value belongs to the merchant. An affiliate agency's income is its commission or agreed fee, not the full GMV.

Q: How should account costs appear in daily profit?
A: Use the organization's configured timing or allocation rule consistently. Daily allocation can make internal comparisons easier, but do not assume every account is already configured that way.

Q: How is estimated payback calculated?
A: Divide remaining cost to recover by recent average daily income. Show unavailable when the denominator is zero or missing, and label the result as an estimate.

Q: Should we use orders or receipts to review performance?
A: Use the chosen order-based operating view to review the work, and a separate receipt view to monitor collection. Keep the two reconciled without counting income twice.

Q: Can employees see company profit?
A: Star Captain restricts profit and cost information by role. Employees see their own available pay details; manager reports should respect the same financial visibility boundary.

## TikTok Account Library: Onboarding, Access and Handoffs
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tk-account-library?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

A TikTok account library records the source, stable ID, setup cost, authorized access and responsible person for accounts your organization legitimately controls. Connect onboarding, requests, assignments and handoffs, with controlled credentials and costs recorded once.

Q: What should an account inventory record contain?
A: Identity, market, type, ownership, source, dates, status, and supported cost records. Keep sensitive login and recovery material in a separate restricted workflow.

Q: How should a team store account passwords?
A: Use encrypted storage, need-based access, and view records. Avoid shared spreadsheets and group messages, and establish one authoritative record for each handoff.

Q: What is a useful account request process?
A: Request the type, quantity, market, and reason; approve or reject it; allocate specific accounts; then have the recipient confirm access and authorization.

Q: What happens when an employee leaves?
A: Verify the account and task checklist, assign a receiving owner, record the effective date, update access, and retain history. Check reporting attribution and the final pay period separately.

Q: Should inventory cost also be entered as a manual expense?
A: Not if the linked account record already contributes that cost. Reconcile the source before adding an expense to avoid counting the same amount twice.

Q: Which plans include inventory and allocation?
A: Account inventory, online staff requests, and approved allocation are included in Enterprise, while basic account ownership and handoffs start on the Free plan and per-account costs and payback tracking starts on the Basic plan. Verify current permissions on the pricing page; employees request or receive accounts rather than managing unrestricted inventory.

## TikTok Shop Product Link Removed: Why Links Disappear and How to Fix Them
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-product-link-removed-check?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

With a TikTok Shop product link removed, why do TikTok Shop product links disappear from videos and how do you fix them? Check 4 causes in order: seller stockouts, closed affiliate plans, single-video flags, or shop restrictions. Filter by Link Removed in Star Captain every morning to fix active videos first.

Q: What is the fastest way to troubleshoot a TikTok Shop product link removed issue?
A: First check whether other videos on the same account still show their shopping cart icon to rule out an account-wide Showcase ban. Next, check whether other accounts promoting the same SKU also lost the link—if all accounts lost it, contact the seller about stock or affiliate plans; if only one video lost it, check that video for a promotion violation.

Q: Can I attach a new product link to an already published TikTok video after the old link is removed?
A: In most cases, no. Once a product anchor is removed due to a delisted SKU or policy flag, TikTok does not let you swap a new Product ID onto the existing post. Re-edit and publish a new video with the active product link.

Q: Will the shopping cart come back automatically if the seller restocks the product?
A: If the seller replenishes inventory on the exact same Product ID and keeps the affiliate plan active, the link on existing videos often becomes purchasable again. If the seller deletes the old listing and creates a new Product ID, old video links stay dead.

Q: Why did a product link disappear when my account received zero violation notices?
A: Seller-side changes—such as the merchant running out of stock, taking the listing offline, closing the targeted commission plan, or having their store restricted—remove the cart from your video without sending a creator violation notice.

Q: What should we do if a video running paid ads suddenly loses its product link?
A: Pause ad spend on that video immediately so you stop paying for clicks that cannot check out. Confirm whether the seller can restore stock or provide a replacement link, then shift budget to a newly published post with a working cart. To monitor daily selling accounts, see [How to See Which Accounts Sell Today](/tutorials/see-which-accounts-sell-today).

Q: How does Star Captain help teams catch removed product links?
A: Once accounts are authorized, team leads open Account Analytics and Video Analytics and click the Link Removed filter to see every affected video sorted by views and orders, along with the responsible operator.

## TikTok Account Payback: Estimate Days from Costs and Commission
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-account-payback-roi?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Estimate TikTok account payback by dividing unrecovered setup costs by recent average daily net commission. Mark zero or missing inputs instead of forcing a result, retain inactive accounts in batch history, and review cumulative payback, monthly profit and actual receipts separately.

Q: What is the TikTok account payback formula?
A: Divide unrecovered setup costs by the last 30-day average daily net commission. Do not estimate when the denominator is zero or missing; an account already paid back has zero remaining days.

Q: How do we record an account that stops operating before payback?
A: Keep its original cost and recovered net commission, and show the unrecovered balance separately. Leave the original investment in the batch total without deleting records or deducting it twice.

Q: How long does a TikTok account usually take to pay back?
A: There is no fixed timeline for every account. Check setup investment, net commission and recent expenses, then update the estimate as content performance and platform access change.

Q: Should phone and network costs be included in account payback?
A: Track them separately for a setup-cost payback metric, and include them when reviewing full operating profit. If already allocated to setup costs, do not count them again; state the scope clearly.

Q: Does payback restart when we change the operator?
A: No. Historical costs and commission stay with the account. Staff performance is split by the handoff date, which is a separate reporting scope.

Q: Can Star Captain estimate account and batch payback automatically?
A: After costs are recorded and data access is authorized, you can review payback progress and estimated days. Check missing costs or income first; estimates do not replace platform settlements or actual receipts.

## TikTok Shop Product Selection for Agencies: Pick Products Accounts List & Sell
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-product-selection-method?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

For TikTok Shop product selection for agencies, a TikTok Shop creator team can pick products that accounts can list and sell using 4 filters: eligibility with fulfillment and stock, recent short-video sales, original filming capacity, and commission after refunds and costs. US affiliate pilot creators need shops with performance of at least 95%.

Q: What is the most reliable method for TikTok Shop product selection for agencies?
A: Check account type, product permissions and fulfillment first. US affiliate pilot creators need shops with performance of at least 95%. Then review stock, recent short-video sales, original filming capacity and commission after refunds; an internal score is not a platform threshold.

Q: Why do products at the very top of generic bestseller charts often fail for short-video teams?
A: Top-10 chart leaders are frequently driven by mega-streamer flash sales, heavy brand ad spend, or thousands of already-saturated creator videos. Agencies get better returns from rising products where 15 to 80 mid-tier short videos are actively converting over the past 7 days.

Q: What commission rate should an agency require when selecting products?
A: For organic short-video matrices, aim for a combined commission rate (on-platform plus any off-platform agreement) of at least 15%. If you plan to run paid ads on the videos, target 25% to 35% or higher on items priced above $20.

Q: How should a team lead hand off selected products to video editors?
A: Never send just a raw URL. Add the product to your Product Library along with its commission rate, key selling points, compliance dos and don'ts, and 1 to 2 broken-down reference video scripts so editors know the exact hook and shot sequence to follow.

Q: Can we test products before receiving physical samples from the brand?
A: You can run initial script and hook tests using authorized brand footage or mixed edits, but once a SKU proves it converts, request physical samples immediately so your team can film original hands-on demonstrations.

Q: How does Star Captain connect product selection to daily team execution?
A: Star Captain links Product Picks, Saved Favorites, Viral Video style filters, AI Video Breakdown, Product Library task assignment, frame-accurate video review, and order attribution inside one workspace so you can see which selected products turn into orders.

## TikTok Work Phone and Network Management: Track Phones, Expiry & Amortization
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-work-phone-and-network-management?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Effective TikTok work phone and network management lets you track work phones, network lines, expiry dates, and amortization across a TikTok team in 4 steps: tag every phone and line with a unique ID, record the staff custodian and account, set 7-day renewal alerts, and amortize phones over 180 days.

Q: What are the four core pillars of TikTok work phone and network management?
A: Assign a unique asset ID to every phone and network line, record the staff custodian and linked account, trigger renewal alerts 7 days before network expiry, and amortize hardware over 180 days into your P&L.

Q: When a work phone or network line moves to another subgroup, which team pays the cost?
A: Cost follows the current custodian and subgroup assignment. Once you reassign the phone or network line to a member of the new group in the ledger, ongoing daily hardware depreciation and monthly network fees shift to that group automatically.

Q: How should we track spare or repair-shop phones in the asset ledger?
A: Change the device status from In Use to Idle / Spare or In Repair, unbind the previous staff custodian, and store the phone in the admin cabinet until it is reassigned to a new hire.

Q: Why should we amortize work phones over 180 days instead of expensing them all in month one?
A: Work phones stay in active use for six months or longer. Amortizing hardware over 180 days matches daily equipment cost against the daily commissions those phones help generate, keeping monthly subgroup margins accurate.

Q: How do we audit phones and accounts quickly when an employee leaves the team?
A: Filter the Devices & Networks ledger by the departing employee's name to list every phone ID, network line, and TikTok account in their custody, verify the physical asset tags on the desk, and reassign them to the new owner in one pass.

Q: How does Star Captain prevent missed network renewals or wasted fees on idle lines?
A: Once you enter each line's expiration date in Accounts and Devices & Networks, Star Captain automatically flags lines expiring within 7 days so your admin can renew active lines or cancel idle ones before billing.

## TikTok Shop Refund Reconciliation: How Agencies Reconcile Order Refunds & Brands
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-refund-rate-reconciliation?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In TikTok Shop refund reconciliation, you reconcile TikTok Shop refunds, returns, and off-platform commissions across 2 streams: platform commissions adjust automatically on final settlement, while off-platform commissions are matched line by line by Order ID after a 7-day cutoff, holding a 20% final balance for late returns.

Q: What is the cleanest way to handle TikTok Shop refund reconciliation with partner brands?
A: Agree on a fixed export cutoff date (such as 7 days after period close), require order-by-order matching via unique Order ID, separate full refunds from partial refunds, and hold a 20% final payment buffer to absorb late post-statement returns.

Q: Do creators lose all of their commission when a buyer gets a partial refund?
A: No. On both TikTok Shop's native affiliate system and standard off-platform agreements, partial refunds only reduce commission proportionally—commission is calculated on the remaining net paid amount after subtracting the refunded portion.

Q: How do we handle an order that gets returned a month after we already settled the statement?
A: Use an itemized cross-period clawback: the brand provides the original Order ID and refund confirmation timestamp, you verify the status change in your order log, and the exact commission amount is deducted from the 20% final balance or the next period's statement.

Q: Why should we separate pre-shipment cancellations from post-delivery returns?
A: Pre-shipment cancellations usually mean the seller ran out of stock or shipped late, whereas post-delivery returns point to product quality or video expectation mismatches. Separating them tells you whether to follow up with the merchant's warehouse or adjust your scripts.

Q: What happens when an order driven by paid ads is refunded?
A: When an ad-driven order is refunded, the affiliate commission is clawed back while your ad spend is non-refundable. Filter Live Orders by Ads and Refunded to catch high-return ad products early.

Q: How does Star Captain speed up monthly refund reconciliation?
A: Star Captain syncs order and after-sales statuses every 10 minutes, lets you filter and export Refunded and In After-Sales orders in Live Orders, and exports order-level statements by Order ID in the Business Center.

## TikTok Shop Team Roles and Permissions: Set Up Departments, Team Leads & Agency
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-creator-team-roles-and-permissions?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

With TikTok Shop team roles and permissions, you set up departments, team leads, and data permissions in a TikTok Shop agency using 3 isolation tiers: Owners view all accounts, brand rates, and profit; Team Leads manage only their subgroup's accounts, reviews, and 16:30 reports; Staff view only their own accounts and payslips.

Q: What is the best way to structure TikTok Shop team roles and permissions?
A: Organize staff into Department and Subgroup pods and enforce three-tier isolation: Owners see all accounts, brand statements, and net profit; Team Leads see and manage only their own subgroup's members, accounts, video reviews, and orders; Staff see only their own assigned accounts, tasks, and personal payslip in Personal Center.

Q: How many people should be in each TikTok Shop subgroup?
A: A typical high-output pod consists of 1 Team Lead managing 3 to 6 operators or editors across 20 to 50 active Showcase accounts. Once a pod grows past 8 people, daily frame-by-frame video review bottlenecks the lead—split it into a second subgroup instead.

Q: Can Group A's Team Lead see the winning products or accounts in Group B?
A: No. Subgroup scope isolation ensures Group A's lead only sees accounts, videos, and orders belonging to Group A, protecting your agency's broader product library and preventing accidental cross-group edits.

Q: Can Team Leads see off-platform brand commission rates or company-wide net profit?
A: Not by default. Business Center statements, four-tier brand rate cards, office overhead, and company-wide net profit are restricted to the Owner (and authorized finance or BD roles), while Team Leads focus on their group's operational output.

Q: What happens to historical order credit when an operator moves from Group A to Group B?
A: Orders and commissions are attributed by the effective assignment date: orders placed while the operator was in Group A remain in Group A's historical totals, while orders placed after the transfer date count toward Group B.

Q: How does Star Captain scope a Team Lead's permissions automatically?
A: In Team and Organization, simply add members to a department or subgroup and assign a Team Lead. Star Captain automatically scopes that lead's account list, task assignments, video reviews, and 16:30 daily report to their group alone.

## How to Separate TikTok Ad Orders and Organic Orders
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-ads-vs-organic-orders?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

How do you separate TikTok ad orders and organic orders? Separate TikTok ad orders and organic orders by item-level traffic source across 3 groups: paid, organic, and mixed or unknown. Track GMV and commission for each group, and apply the right commission rule when paid orders use a different rate.

Q: How are paid and organic affiliate orders classified?
A: Use item-level Shop Ads and standard commission evidence. The labels describe commission attribution, not every step in the buyer's journey.

Q: Should a mixed order count as paid or organic?
A: Keep it separate unless supported item-level data and a defined calculation justify a split. Do not assign the entire order to whichever category is larger.

Q: Does a refund change an order's original attribution?
A: Not necessarily. Estimated commission evidence can remain relevant after actual commission becomes zero. Track the refund and source separately.

Q: What if paid orders use a different partner rate?
A: Configure the agreed paid rate and distinguish a blank value from an explicit 0%. Leave unresolved orders pending rather than estimating their commission.

Q: What is a healthy organic order share?
A: There is no universal benchmark. Compare your own consistent history and consider product mix, merchant advertising, and data completeness.

Q: Is attribution available on the Free plan?
A: Core order attribution is included across all Star Captain plans; the Free plan includes 3 order exports per month, while Basic and above include unlimited order exports and partner settlements with separate paid-order commission rules. Check the pricing page for the current feature comparison.

## TikTok US Order Dates: Pacific Time, GMT-8 & Reconciliation
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-us-order-date?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

How do TikTok US order dates work across time zones? For TikTok US order dates, the seller center uses Pacific Time (15 or 16 hours behind Beijing), while the TikTok app and Star Captain use fixed GMT-8 (changing day at 16:00 Beijing time). Align the time zone, event date, and sync status first.

Q: Which time zone should we use for US TikTok Shop orders?
A: Use the time zone and event definition of the specific source report you are reconciling. The TikTok seller backend uses Pacific Time; the TikTok App data page and Star Captain use fixed GMT-8. Check the report labels explicitly.

Q: Why does yesterday's total increase later in Beijing?
A: The corresponding US day may not have ended, or data may still be syncing. Refund and status updates can also change later snapshots.

Q: What should we check first when totals differ?
A: Align date, time zone, event type, account scope, and status filters. Then compare order IDs and update times.

Q: Do Star Captain's dates match the TikTok seller backend?
A: In winter, yes. Star Captain uses fixed GMT-8, like the TikTok App data page, while the seller backend uses Pacific Time with daylight saving. From March to November the backend changes day an hour earlier, so orders in that hour can land on different dates. Pull settlement statements by merchant time to match the backend.

Q: When should a China-based team publish its US daily report?
A: After the chosen US business day ends and coverage is sufficiently complete. Star Captain's daily report goes out at 4:30 p.m. Beijing time all year, with status notes when data is incomplete.

Q: Should staff attendance also use the US business date?
A: Use the actual staff workday for attendance and production. Label it separately from the financial business date in combined reports.

## TikTok Team Attendance and Salary: Pay & Commission Rules
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-team-attendance-salary?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

How do you calculate TikTok team attendance and salary? Calculate TikTok team attendance and salary—your TikTok creator team attendance and pay—from 3 parts: base pay adjusted for attendance, performance commission, and role-based adjustments, reviewing each statement before payday.

Q: How should a team organize its pay calculation?
A: Separate base pay, commission, and approved adjustments, with a traceable source for each. Apply the employment terms and requirements relevant to the team rather than adopting an example formula unchanged.

Q: How should we track editors' attendance?
A: Keep attendance and output separate. Use time records for the approved attendance process and creative goals for planning, workload review, and coaching.

Q: Should employee commission use GMV or agency commission?
A: Name the agreed base explicitly. Agency commission is closer to the agency's income, while GMV includes the merchant's sale value. The configured basis should match the actual compensation agreement.

Q: How do progressive commission tiers work?
A: Each band uses its own rate. In the sample on a CNY 20,000 base, 5% on the first 10,000 plus 8% above 10,000 equals CNY 1,300. Star Captain's documented workflow supports up to ten bands.

Q: Which wins: a role template or a personal setting?
A: An explicit personal setting takes precedence over the role default. Review the effective values when changing roles or templates.

Q: Can Star Captain use imported attendance?
A: The documented workflow supports DingTalk and WeCom attendance exports. Confirm the selected month and source, and avoid combining an import with duplicate check-in-derived attendance.

## TikTok Video Editing Workflow: Briefs, Frame Review & Posts
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-video-editing-workflow?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

How does a TikTok video editing workflow work? A TikTok video editing workflow—your TikTok Shop creator team editing workflow—connects 5 steps: product brief, editing task, timestamped frame review, publishing record, and results review, keeping every editor and reviewer on track.

Q: What is the core of a good editing workflow?
A: A visible status and owner for each step, with the product brief, submitted version, review, published account, and later result connected.

Q: Should we assign directly or use a task pool?
A: Use direct assignments for priority or specialized work and a pool for suitable work others can claim. Both need capacity limits, deadlines, and acceptance tracking.

Q: What makes review feedback useful?
A: Name the exact version, timestamp, issue, and requested change. Apply a consistent checklist so editors can understand why a version was approved or returned.

Q: Why keep a publishing record?
A: It connects reported work to an account and product, then to available videos and outcomes. Pending synchronization should remain pending verification, not be treated as proof that nothing was published.

Q: Are reviewed video files stored permanently?
A: No. The documented retention is seven days after approval or replacement and thirty days without resubmission after rejection. Keep your own archive of approved files; review records and media files have different lifetimes.

Q: Will a live office view feel like surveillance?
A: Its usefulness depends on how the team uses it. Explain the coordination purpose, let people update their status accurately, and investigate sustained blockers rather than judging isolated moments.

## TikTok Team Daily Report: 5-Part Agency Template & Rules
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-team-daily-report?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

What belongs in a TikTok team daily report? A TikTok team daily report—using a TikTok Shop agency daily report template—includes 5 parts: overall results, highlights, each team's progress, individual details, and action items, counting orders by US date and attendance by Beijing date.

Q: What belongs in a TikTok Shop agency daily report?
A: Use overview, highlights, team results, employee detail, and actions required. Keep numbers traceable and tailor the scope to the reader.

Q: When should a US-sales report be published by a China-based team?
A: After the chosen US business date ends and synchronization is sufficiently complete. State the cutoff and coverage instead of treating a scheduled publication time as proof of completeness.

Q: Should every report include profit?
A: Include profit and cost only for the authorized audience. A team lead's report can focus on the group's sales, production, and issues without exposing company finances.

Q: How is a weekly report different?
A: It explains changes, the teams or accounts driving them, and next week's actions. It also carries unresolved issues forward with owners and deadlines.

Q: Can a Star Captain report be copied into a team message?
A: The report supports copying plain text. Review the recipient scope before sharing, especially when the owner's version contains financial detail.

Q: Where do the report's numbers come from?
A: Existing system records: orders and operating calculations, completed-work counts and goals, attendance, publishing records, synced videos, and account status. Missing coverage should remain explicit.

## How to Break Down Viral TikTok Videos: Hook, Proof, CTA
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-viral-video-breakdown?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

How do you break down viral TikTok videos? A TikTok viral video breakdown—or TikTok Shop viral video teardown—splits a winning clip into 3 parts: the 3-second hook, the product proof, and the call to action, turning it into an original script your team can shoot and test.

Q: What should a viral video teardown examine?
A: The opening, product explanation and evidence, and call to action. Separate what is observed in the video from what is inferred about its effect.

Q: How should we turn it into a script?
A: Write a sequence with spoken lines, shots, captions, and product evidence. Adapt the structure to your own assets and capabilities rather than copying the reference.

Q: Which videos are worth studying?
A: Choose relevant recent examples and state what performance evidence is actually available. High views alone do not prove strong product conversion.

Q: What inputs does Star Captain support?
A: The documented teardown workflow accepts a TikTok video link or a local video file, then organizes recognized dialogue, translation, and a structured draft.

Q: Can the teardown predict whether our video will go viral?
A: No. The documented analysis is transcript-based and does not include visual analysis or a view or sales forecast. Validate your own work after publication.

Q: Can we reproduce a reference exactly?
A: Use your own footage, wording, and verified product claims. Respect rights and platform requirements; a reference is a learning input, not permission to republish its assets.

## TikTok Shop Sample Management: Track Sample Requests, Delivery, and Video Fulfillment
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-sample-management?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Effective TikTok Shop sample management helps creator agencies track hundreds of brand samples from shipping to video delivery in 4 stages: request logging, parcel sign-off, 72-hour first-video delivery, and order attribution, maintaining an 85% or higher fulfillment rate and a 3-day turnaround.

Q: What are the most important KPIs in TikTok Shop sample management?
A: Track two primary metrics: Sample-to-Video Fulfillment Rate (the percentage of delivered samples that result in published product videos—aim for 85% or higher) and Average Sample Turnaround Time (days from delivery sign-off to first published video—aim for 3 days or less).

Q: How do we stop delivered brand samples from piling up unclaimed at the front desk?
A: Require BD to log the tracking number, Product ID, and assigned editor when the merchant ships the parcel. When reception scans or searches the tracking number on arrival, they stick a label with the editor's name and delivery date right on the box.

Q: What should a team lead do when a sample has been delivered for over 72 hours with no video?
A: Check the overdue sample list during morning standup: if the editor is backed up with other tasks, reassign the physical sample to another teammate immediately; if the item is defective, have BD notify the merchant with photos and mark it closed.

Q: How should we account for self-purchased test samples versus free merchant samples?
A: Mark the source in your ledger: free brand samples carry $0 hardware cost and are tracked for video fulfillment, while self-purchased samples record the exact dollar spend against the requesting subgroup's monthly expenses.

Q: How can multiple editing groups share one high-converting physical sample?
A: Give the requesting group a 48-hour window to shoot their initial batch, then place the item on a shared Winning Sample Shelf where other groups sign it out in half-day blocks to film new hooks.

Q: How does Star Captain help agencies manage TikTok Shop samples?
A: Star Captain lets BD log sample requests, tracking numbers, and custodians under Partner Brands, filter by delivery and video status, dispatch editing tasks from the Product Library upon arrival, and see the orders generated by each product.

## TikTok Shop US Mexico Brazil Management: Manage Accounts, Time Zones, and Orders
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-multi-country-operations?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

With TikTok Shop US Mexico Brazil management, creator agencies manage accounts, time zones, and orders across the US, Mexico, and Brazil by separating 3 daily cutoffs in Beijing time—Brazil (GMT-3) at 11:00, Mexico (GMT-6) at 14:00, and the US (GMT-8) at 16:00—and normalizing USD, MXN, and BRL dashboards.

Q: What are the daily cutoff times for US, Mexico, and Brazil in TikTok Shop US Mexico Brazil management?
A: In Beijing time (GMT+8), the Brazil (GMT-3) business day ends at 11:00 AM, the Mexico (GMT-6) business day ends at 2:00 PM (14:00), and the US (fixed GMT-8) business day ends at 4:00 PM (16:00). Always wait 30 minutes past each market's cutoff before reviewing full prior-day orders.

Q: How should agencies compare GMV across USD, Mexican Pesos (MXN), and Brazilian Reais (BRL)?
A: Use normalized USD figures when comparing cross-country dashboards and team productivity, while preserving original local currency (MXN or BRL) when reconciling order-level statements with local partner stores.

Q: Can we repost a winning US TikTok video directly to a Mexican account?
A: Do not repost identical raw files. Instead, reuse the proven 3-second visual hook and demonstration sequence, re-edit the footage, and localize the voiceover and on-screen captions into natural Latin American Spanish.

Q: Should one operator manage US and Mexican accounts at the same time?
A: During initial testing, one experienced operator can test 3 to 5 Mexican accounts. Once a regional market passes 15 active accounts, split it into a dedicated subgroup because peak hours, pricing bands, and caption languages differ.

Q: Do US sales spike alerts mix with Mexico or Brazil in Star Captain?
A: No. Star Captain separates sales spike alerts by country. Switching the top-bar country selector to Mexico or Brazil displays only that country's spike battle cards and unread count.

Q: How can our editors quickly adapt an English TikTok script into Spanish in Star Captain?
A: Open the Audio Transcription and Translation tool or Viral Video Teardown in Star Captain, paste the video link, and select Latin American Spanish to generate a timestamped Spanish script ready for editing.

## TikTok Shop Script Translation and Localization: Transcribe & Localize English and Spanish Scripts
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-multilingual-script-localization?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

With TikTok Shop script translation and localization, editing teams transcribe and localize product video scripts into natural English and Spanish in 4 steps: transcribe 3 native viral clips, align hook-proof-CTA meaning, convert imperial or metric units, and rewrite into 6-to-10-word spoken lines.

Q: What is the biggest mistake in TikTok Shop script translation and localization?
A: Translating supplier product descriptions word for word with a generic translator. Long, formal sentences and unconverted metric units cause native shoppers to swipe away in the first 3 seconds; always start from transcribed native creator audio and rewrite into short spoken lines.

Q: How can video editors who don't speak English or Spanish sync visuals to foreign voiceovers accurately?
A: Use a side-by-side bilingual script that pairs each English or Spanish line with its meaning and a concrete visual cue (such as 00:04 Close-up of waterproof seal), allowing editors to cut on exact visual actions.

Q: How do US English scripts differ from Mexican Spanish scripts?
A: US scripts use American English and imperial units (inches, oz, lbs, degrees Fahrenheit), whereas Mexican scripts use Latin American Spanish (ustedes, local everyday nouns) and metric units (cm, g, ml).

Q: Should we copy a competitor's transcribed English script word for word?
A: No. Study their hook angle, selling-point sequence, and natural phrasing, then rewrite the lines around your own footage, scenarios, and voiceover so your video stays original.

Q: What file types and languages does Star Captain's transcription tool support?
A: You can paste a TikTok video link or upload local audio and video files (mp3, mp4, mov, etc.) and translate the transcribed script into Simplified Chinese, English, or Latin American Spanish.

Q: Can team leads share transcribed and translated scripts directly with editors in Star Captain?
A: Yes. Every teardown and transcription is saved in the Toolbox history, and leads can attach reference video teardowns directly to product editing tasks so editors see the bilingual script as soon as they claim the task.

## TikTok Shop Staff Offboarding Account Handover: Hand Over Accounts & Phones
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-agency-member-offboarding-handover?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

For TikTok Shop staff offboarding account handover, check open tasks, authorized access, equipment and historical records. Hand over account permissions and work equipment under company procedures, name recipients and record the handoff date before deactivating access. Preserve historical sales and commission records.

Q: Why is Deactivate recommended over Delete permanently during a TikTok Shop staff offboarding account handover?
A: Deactivate immediately turns off the member's login and frees up their active seat while preserving historical order attribution, performance, and payroll records. Delete permanently cannot be undone and appends (deleted) to past records, making final payroll reconciliation harder.

Q: How should account permissions and work equipment be handed over?
A: Under company procedures, separately confirm account responsibility, access permissions, open tasks and equipment custody. Name recipients, record the handoff date, deactivate the departing login and preserve history.

Q: What if we haven't hired a replacement operator yet when someone leaves?
A: Choose Leave unassigned in the offboarding modal. Account history remains intact while a lead assigns interim responsibility or a later owner. Admin handles equipment returns or reissues separately under company procedures.

Q: When an account is transferred to a new operator, who gets credit for past orders?
A: Attribution splits on the transfer date: historical orders and commissions generated before the transfer remain on the departing member's record, while new orders from the transfer forward credit the new owner.

Q: Why does Star Captain ask me to change the group lead before deactivating a team lead?
A: If the member still leads a subgroup, Star Captain prompts you to pick a new lead in Manage groups first so pending video reviews, account requests, and attendance approvals in that group never get stuck.

Q: Can we bring back a deactivated member if they rejoin the agency later?
A: Yes. Open Team and Members, switch to Former members, select the person, and click Restore to place them back into an existing or newly created group.

## TikTok Shop Partner Brand Commission Management: Targeted Links, Ad Commission Rates, and Cut Alerts
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-partner-brand-targeted-links-and-commission?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

With 3-tier TikTok Shop partner brand commission management, creator agencies manage partner brand targeted links, ad commission rates, and unexpected commission cuts using 2 controls: attach store-specific targeted links and Add-to-Showcase QR codes in the Product Library, and enforce Ad Rate > SKU Rate > Store Default priority with cut alerts.

Q: What are the two most important controls in TikTok Shop partner brand commission management?
A: First, lock the input by attaching Targeted Links and Add-to-Showcase QR codes to every product in your Product Library so operators never attach public low-rate links. Second, automate the calculation using a three-tier hierarchy (Ad Rate above SKU Rate above Store Default Rate) paired with commission-cut alerts.

Q: How do we stop operators from accidentally linking an 8% open affiliate plan instead of our 20% targeted plan?
A: Have BD upload the Add-to-Showcase QR code and targeted link into Star Captain's Product Library. Operators scan the QR code right from their assigned task card on their work phone instead of searching the TikTok marketplace manually.

Q: How can BD upload a dozen Add-to-Showcase QR code images at once?
A: Name each QR image file after its Product ID or product title, click Bulk upload QR codes in Star Captain's Product Library, and drag the files in—the system matches them automatically.

Q: How do we handle a partner brand that pays different off-platform commission rates on organic orders versus ad orders?
A: Enter both the standard commission rate and the ad commission rate on the store profile, and turn on Separate commission for ad orders in settlement settings so Star Captain calculates each traffic source at its own rate.

Q: How can we catch a merchant who quietly lowers our commission rate or raises the product price overnight?
A: Enable Brand price change and Commission cut under Morning brief and alerts in Star Captain. The system flags rate drops and price changes automatically, delivering silently to in-app Messages between 11 PM and 8 AM.

Q: If we bind a partner store today, can Star Captain recalculate off-platform commissions on earlier orders from this month?
A: Yes. Once you bind the store or Product ID and save your commission rules, you can run bulk order matching to attribute historical orders and update expected off-platform commissions.

## TikTok Shop Conversion Funnel Diagnosis: Fixing Accounts with Video Views and Few Orders Using Median Views
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-account-conversion-funnel-diagnosis?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

A 3-stage TikTok Shop conversion funnel diagnosis explains why a TikTok Shop account gets video views but few orders using median views and conversion rates in 2 steps: compare Median Views (All Videos) against top-video share, then trace Product Impressions, Click-Through Rate (2%+), and Order Conversion Rate.

Q: What is the fastest way to run a TikTok Shop conversion funnel diagnosis on an account with views but no orders?
A: First compare Median Views (All Videos) against Average Views on the account detail page to confirm recent product videos are actually getting views. Next, inspect Product Impressions, Click-Through Rate, and Conversion Rate: low CTR means the hook and CTA need work; high CTR with zero orders means the product page's price, shipping, or stock is blocking checkout.

Q: Why does an account show 10,000+ average views per video when its newest uploads only get 300 views?
A: A single viral video with hundreds of thousands of views pulls the arithmetic average up dramatically. Checking Median Views (All Videos) filters out that outlier and shows what a typical upload on that account actually gets.

Q: How are Product Click-Through Rate (CTR) and Conversion Rate (CVR) calculated on Star Captain's account detail page?
A: Click-Through Rate equals Product Clicks divided by Product Impressions, measuring how well the video drives curiosity to tap the orange cart. Conversion Rate equals Units Sold divided by Product Clicks, measuring how well the product listing converts browsers into buyers.

Q: Why would a video have a 5% Product CTR but zero orders?
A: Viewers liked the video enough to tap the product link, but backed out on the product page—almost always due to a price increase, high shipping fee, out-of-stock main variant, poor reviews, or a price mismatch between the video voiceover and checkout.

Q: How can a team lead check which video editor's posts perform best on a shared TikTok account?
A: Have editors include a short prefix code (such as zy11.04) in their post title, then type zy into the Title or keyword filter on Star Captain's single-account video list to see matched count, views, and sales.

Q: What does Continuous monitoring do on a single-account detail page?
A: Accounts that stop posting new videos are normally refreshed less frequently during bulk syncs. Turning on Continuous monitoring ensures an older account whose past viral videos still generate daily orders is included in every batch refresh.

## TikTok Shop New Account First 30 Days Content Schedule: 4-Stage Ramp Plan
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-new-account-first-30-days-content-schedule?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

For a TikTok Shop new account first 30 days content schedule, check Creator Pilot Program status and available quota before planning onboarding, tests, reviews and original content. Daily and weekly limits differ by pilot type; team stages and content ratios are not platform rules or sales predictions.

Q: Can a new account add product links on Day 1?
A: First check commerce access, pilot status, eligible products and available quota. There is no universal requirement to publish several days of non-commercial videos first, and follower count alone does not confirm full permissions.

Q: How many shoppable videos can a new account publish?
A: US Non-Extended Pilot Creators may publish up to 3 product promotion videos per day and 3 shoppable LIVEs per week. Extended Pilot Creators have up to 3 product promotion videos and 1 LIVE per week. Follow the account’s current status and quota.

Q: Should we replace a new account as soon as it has no orders?
A: Check authorization, platform notices, product links, clicks, conversion, footage and the listing first. No orders do not by themselves prove a restriction, and a fixed upload count is not a reason to replace an account.

Q: Which shop threshold matters during initial product tests?
A: US affiliate pilot creators can promote products only from shops with shop performance of at least 95%, subject to actual account access. Do not confuse this with product stars or a five-point SPS rating.

Q: How do we track payback during the first 30 days?
A: Record setup costs and onboarding dates, then review cumulative net commission and payback by account. Reconcile refunds and actual receipts, and avoid promising a remaining timeline when income is missing or insufficient.

Q: Are the 70/30 content ratio and four-stage plan official requirements?
A: No. They are internal scheduling examples and must fit the account’s quota and content policies. They are not platform recommendation rules or a promise of orders.

## TikTok Shop Team Commission Tiers and Bonus Models: 3 Role Frameworks
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-team-commission-tiers-and-bonus-models?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

These 3-role TikTok Shop team commission tiers and bonus models use settled net commission after refunds, ad spend, and platform fees as a single baseline: creators earn base pay plus 8% to 20% tiered net commission, operators earn 10% to 18% profit share after account payback, and video editors earn a base piece rate plus viral hit bonuses above $200 net commission.

Q: Should TikTok Shop team commission tiers be based on GMV or settled net commission?
A: Always use settled net commission after deducting order refunds, agency-funded ad spend, and platform fees. Paying commission on raw GMV incentivizes high-return, low-margin orders that lose money for the agency.

Q: How should commission models differ between operators, creators, and video editors?
A: Account operators earn 10% to 18% progressive marginal commission on net profit after account costs; creators earn base pay plus 8% to 16% net commission tiers tied to filming quotas; video editors earn a base piece rate per approved video plus viral hit bonuses once a single video exceeds $200 net commission.

Q: When an operator, creator, and editor collaborate on one viral video, how do we split commission without double-counting?
A: Do not make all three fight over the same percentage pool. Credit the account's monthly net commission to the operator's progressive tier (10% to 18%), credit the creator's tier (8% to 12%), and pay the editor their piece rate plus single-video viral bonus—keeping total payout within 25% to 32% of net commission.

Q: How do we handle cross-month refunds on orders that already paid commission last month?
A: Include a rolling refund clawback clause in your payroll rules: when calculating payroll on the 5th of the new month, negative commissions from prior-month orders that refunded during the current cycle are automatically deducted from the current month's net commission pool.

Q: How do we stop a Team Lead from focusing only on their own accounts and ignoring junior teammates?
A: Require two conditions to unlock the Team Lead override bonus: hitting at least 80% of the subgroup's total net commission target and maintaining at least 70% active selling accounts across the pod.

Q: How does Star Captain generate payslips with progressive commission tiers and attendance deductions?
A: In Star Captain under Profit & Cost and Payroll, configure each role's base pay, attendance rules, and progressive commission brackets; the system pulls verified clock-in days and account net commissions automatically to generate one-click payslips.

## TikTok Agency Month-End Closing Checklist: Orders to Receipts
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-agency-month-end-closing-checklist?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Use this TikTok agency month-end closing checklist to reconcile order definitions, refunds, partner statements, costs, payroll and receipts. The five-day calendar is an internal workflow example. Confirm the source time zone and sync status before locking records, and keep receivables separate from cash collected.

Q: What is the 5-day timeline in the TikTok Shop agency month-end closing checklist?
A: Day 1 freezes prior-month GMT-8 order snapshots and separates refunds; Day 2 verifies partner targeted commissions and issues statements; Day 3 logs account, phone, network, sample, and ad costs; Day 4 locks attendance and tiered payslips; Day 5 publishes company, subgroup, and account P&L reports.

Q: How should we account for orders placed on the last day of the month that haven't shipped or cleared the return window?
A: Use an accrual-plus-true-up approach: apply your category's historical return reserve rate (such as 15% for apparel or 8% for home goods) to in-transit orders on Day 1, then reconcile the exact settled difference during the next month's close.

Q: If a partner brand hasn't wired off-platform commission by the 5th, does it count toward monthly profit?
A: Show both Accrual Operating Profit (including merchant-confirmed statements from Day 2 to evaluate team performance) and Cash-Basis Net Profit (actual collected cash), while holding payout of large off-platform staff bonuses until the merchant's wire clears.

Q: Should TikTok account setup costs and work phones be expensed all at once or amortized monthly?
A: Amortize multi-month assets in Star Captain: work phones depreciate automatically over 180 days and network lines over 30 days, while account costs offset against cumulative net commission in Account Payback, booking unrecovered balances on banned accounts as ban losses.

Q: Why must we check for 'unattributed merchant orders' on Day 2 before issuing statements?
A: Operators often scale new SKUs or secondary store links from an existing partner brand mid-month. Binding those new Product IDs on Day 2 ensures Star Captain calculates the 10% to 15% off-platform commission before statements go out.

Q: Which three numbers should an agency owner inspect first on Day 5?
A: Check company-wide Net Margin Ratio (Net Profit divided by Total Commission), Subgroup Net Contribution per Capita, and Batch Account Survival & Payback Rate to guide next month's hiring and account resource planning.

## TikTok Shop Team Weekly Review Meeting Agenda: 60-Minute Format & Actions
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-team-weekly-review-meeting-agenda?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

A 60-minute TikTok Shop team weekly review meeting agenda runs in 4 timed blocks: Group Net Commission Review (15 mins), Viral Hit & Posting Gap Diagnosis (20 mins), Merchant Sample & Statement Check (15 mins), and Next Week Schedule & Account Reassignment Actions (10 mins). Exporting 4 workspace tables before the meeting turns every bottleneck into an assigned Friday action item.

Q: How should a 60-minute TikTok Shop team weekly review meeting agenda be divided?
A: Split the hour into 4 timed blocks: Minutes 0 to 15 for subgroup net commission attainment; Minutes 15 to 35 for top viral video teardowns and dropping account diagnosis; Minutes 35 to 50 for brand sample fulfillment and overdue statements; and Minutes 50 to 60 for weekly scheduling and account reassignments.

Q: Which 4 data tables should team leads prepare 30 minutes before the weekly review?
A: Pull 4 live views from Star Captain: the Subgroup Weekly Attainment table, the Top Viral Videos & Converting SKUs leaderboard, the Posting Gap & Dropped-Link alert list, and the Brand Sample Backlog & Overdue Statement view.

Q: Is it better to hold the weekly review meeting on Friday afternoon or Monday morning?
A: Run a 15-minute data pre-check on Friday afternoon and hold the formal 60-minute decision meeting on Monday morning. Waiting until Monday morning captures full weekend order conversions and GMT-8 settlements for accurate week-over-week comparisons.

Q: How should a manager respond when operators blame zero orders on 'low platform traffic lately'?
A: Compare accounts horizontally inside the same subgroup and category in Star Captain: pull up a sister account that generated orders during the exact same week and compare weekly uploads, median views, Product CTR, and CVR side by side.

Q: Does a small 3-to-5-person TikTok Shop team still need this 4-part weekly agenda?
A: Yes—compress the meeting from 60 minutes to 30 minutes, but keep all 4 blocks (net commission check, viral and slump diagnosis, sample and statement check, and weekly action items) so data habits scale cleanly as the team grows.

Q: How do we make sure account reassignments and viral remakes decided on Monday actually happen?
A: Execute account transfers in Star Captain's Accounts page within 1 hour after the meeting, dispatch remake scripts into the Team task pool with deadlines, and run a 10-minute Wednesday check against the automated 16:30 daily report.

## TikTok Multi-Country Partner Settlement and Currency: FX Cutoffs & Ledgers
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-multi-country-partner-settlement-and-currency?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Effective TikTok multi-country partner settlement and currency management locks in 3 contract rules upfront: generate operational statements in each market's native currency (USD, GBP, MYR, THB), specify the exact exchange rate cutoff date and bank benchmark, and define who absorbs cross-border transfer fees, while reconciling native statements against settled amounts in one workspace.

Q: What are the 3 core rules of TikTok multi-country partner settlement and currency management?
A: Keep operational order records and statements in each market's native currency (USD, MXN, BRL, GBP, MYR), lock a specific FX conversion cutoff date and bank benchmark in your contract, and define who absorbs cross-border transfer fees while logging actual settled payouts.

Q: If one brand hires us for both the US and Mexico, can we combine everything into one CNY invoice?
A: You can provide a combined summary cover sheet for approval, but attach separate US (USD) and Mexico (MXN) itemized schedules showing native GMV, refund deductions, and each currency's cutoff exchange rate—never add raw dollars and pesos together.

Q: What if the exchange rate was 7.20 on statement confirmation day, but dropped to 7.05 when the merchant wired funds two weeks later?
A: When your contract locks the statement confirmation date as the FX cutoff benchmark, the converted CNY receivable is fixed on confirmation day and the merchant cannot demand a recalculation for paying late. For native USD wires, include a late-payment penalty clause.

Q: How should we account for the 0.5% withdrawal fee charged by cross-border payment platforms?
A: Require merchants to cover intermediary bank fees on incoming wires, and record your own platform withdrawal fees under operating expenses in Star Captain's Profit & Cost module while pricing a 1% buffer into your agency retainer.

Q: When should we pay commission shares to overseas local creators?
A: Pay flat per-video filming fees after video review, but settle percentage commission shares during the next month's close after orders have been delivered and cleared the return window.

Q: How does Star Captain freeze exchange rates on partner statements and track split payments?
A: When you generate a period statement in Star Captain's Business Center, the included orders, GMV, commission, and exchange rate freeze together, and the statement table tracks initial and final payment due dates with automatic overdue flags.

## TikTok Viral Video Follow-Up and Remake Workflow: 48-Hour Scaling Matrix
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-viral-video-follow-up-and-remake-workflow?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

A 48-hour TikTok viral video follow-up and remake workflow scales a winning clip in 4 steps after organic orders start: pin top buyer questions and extract the conversion structure in hours 1 to 6, create 5 script variations by swapping only the 3-second hook or visual scene in hours 6 to 24, and distribute remakes across matrix accounts for original shoots in hours 24 to 48.

Q: What are the four steps of the 48-hour TikTok viral video follow-up and remake workflow?
A: In Hours 1 to 6, pin buyer Q&A comments and extract the master three-part script in Star Captain's Toolbox; in Hours 6 to 24, create 5 variations by locking the core demo and swapping only the 3-second hook or scene; in Hours 24 to 48, film original shoots across matrix accounts; after Hour 48, scale top CTR and CVR winners.

Q: If the first video is still getting views and orders, can the same account post a second remake of the same product right away?
A: Yes. As long as the second video uses freshly filmed footage (such as a Reply with Video answering a top comment on the first post), it reinforces buyer trust when shoppers visit your profile without cannibalizing the original clip.

Q: How can 3 accounts film original videos within 24 hours when the team only has 1 physical sample?
A: Run a 2-hour staggered rotation with strict scene isolation: Operator A films an unboxing test at a desk from 9:00 to 11:00, Operator B films close-up macro proof in natural balcony light from 11:00 to 13:00, and Operator C films before-and-after problem resolution in a home setting from 14:00 to 16:00.

Q: What is the '1-into-5' controlled-variable remake method, and why shouldn't we rewrite the whole video?
A: Rewriting the entire video often removes the exact demonstration shot that convinced viewers to buy. The controlled-variable method keeps the proven 5-to-18-second core product demonstration intact while changing only one variable at a time: the 3-second hook, physical setting, comment-reply opener, persona voiceover, or flashback order.

Q: Which metrics signal that a video is ready for a full-pod remake push?
A: Watch two tiers: a High-Conversion Sleeper (2,000 to 5,000 views with 5+ orders and over 3.5% Product CTR) gets 2 new hook remakes on the same account within 12 hours; a Breakout Hit (20,000+ views and 20+ orders within 24 hours) triggers a 3-to-5-account matrix push.

Q: When should a team stop filming variations of a previously viral product?
A: Stop assigning remakes when 3 consecutive new variations drop below half of the original video's Product CTR and GPM, when the merchant runs low on inventory or cuts commission rates, or when buyer return and negative review rates spike.

## TikTok Shop Creator Agency Glossary: 60 Essential Terms, Metrics & Formulas
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-creator-agency-glossary?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

This TikTok Shop creator agency glossary defines 60 essential terms and oral agency slang across 6 operational categories: Accounts & Access, Video & Funnel Metrics, Orders & Time Zones, Partner Commissions & Samples, Cost & Payback Accounting, and Team & Payroll Workflows, giving plain-English definitions for Showcase accounts, dropped links, median views, account ramp-up, stuck views, silent commission cuts, and net commission ROI.

Q: Why should a TikTok Shop agency standardize this 60-term glossary across the team?
A: Most month-end reconciliation and review disputes happen because teammates use different definitions—confusing gross GMV with net commission, average views with median views, or Pacific Time with Beijing time. Shared definitions align operators, editors, BD, and finance.

Q: What is the difference between GMV, on-platform commission, off-platform commission, and settled net commission?
A: GMV is the merchant's gross order value; on-platform commission is the affiliate share paid by TikTok Shop; off-platform commission is the extra rebate paid directly by the partner brand; and settled net commission is combined commission minus refund clawbacks and agency-funded ad spend.

Q: Why should team leads check Median Views instead of Average Views when diagnosing an account?
A: A single old viral video with 400,000 views pulls the arithmetic average into the thousands even if the last 20 uploads got 250 views each. Median Views takes the middle video, showing the account's true current traffic floor.

Q: How do we tell a Dropped Product Link apart from a Showcase Restriction?
A: Check two or three other cart-linked videos on the same profile: if their shopping carts are still live, only that single video lost its link (usually due to stockout or a single-video flag). If every cart across the profile disappeared, the account has a Showcase restriction.

Q: What are an 80/20 Initial & Final Payment Split and a Cross-Period Refund Clawback?
A: After confirming a monthly brand statement, agencies collect an 80% initial payment and hold a 20% final balance for 15 to 30 days. Any late returns on prior-period orders are deducted by Order ID from that 20% balance or the next statement.

Q: Do we have to calculate these 60 metrics manually in spreadsheets?
A: No. Star Captain pre-calculates median views, Product CTR, Order CVR, paid vs. organic attribution, 4-tier partner commissions, account payback days, and progressive payroll tiers automatically, or you can query them anytime via [How to Ask the Star Captain Assistant](/tutorials/ask-star-captain-assistant).

## TikTok Shop BFCM and Seasonal Campaign Prep: 30-Day Agency Checklist
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-seasonal-campaign-and-bfcm-preparation?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Execute TikTok Shop BFCM and seasonal campaign prep on a 30-day 4-stage countdown: lock exclusive targeted commission rates and 1,000+ units of SKU stock on Days T-30 to T-21, sign for samples and pre-film 5 hook variations per hero SKU on Days T-20 to T-11, publish warm-up test clips to find 3.5%+ CTR winners on Days T-10 to T-4, and launch 48-hour remakes during peak sale days.

Q: How far in advance should an agency start TikTok Shop BFCM and seasonal campaign prep?
A: Start 30 days out: spend Days T-30 to T-21 locking hero SKUs, exclusive targeted rates, and 1,000+ stock depth; Days T-20 to T-11 receiving samples and filming 5-hook reserves; Days T-10 to T-4 publishing warm-up tests to find 3.5%+ CTR seed videos; and Peak Week scaling 1-into-5 remakes.

Q: How much SKU inventory should we require from a partner brand before making their product a BFCM hero push?
A: Require at least 1,000 sellable units on the main color or size variant (and 300+ units for secondary test SKUs), with a 24-hour alert if stock drops below 200 units. A viral BFCM clip can sell through 200 units in hours, dropping the cart link mid-surge.

Q: Why should we publish warm-up videos 7 to 10 days before Black Friday instead of waiting for sale day?
A: Short-video recommendation pools take 3 to 7 days to build momentum, and US shoppers pre-load their carts ahead of holiday price drops. Publishing 7 to 10 days early ensures your winning seed videos hit peak traffic right as campaign discounts go live.

Q: What should we do if a hero video blows up during BFCM but the merchant is about to run out of stock?
A: Contact the merchant immediately to add reserve inventory to that exact Product ID or provide a backup listing in the same store, re-cut the winning script onto a fresh post with the active link, and pin a comment on the original video pointing shoppers to the new pinned post.

Q: How do we separate commission rates when a merchant turns on heavy Shop Ads during a seasonal sale?
A: Enable Separate commission for ad orders in Star Captain's Business Center so SKU-level attribution automatically splits organic orders from Shop Ads orders and applies each stream's agreed campaign rate.

Q: When should we issue partner settlement statements after a major seasonal sale?
A: Pull the initial reconciliation statement 7 to 10 days after the campaign ends to collect the 80% initial payment (once pre-shipment cancellations clear), and hold the 20% final balance until Day 15 to 30 to absorb post-delivery holiday returns.

## TikTok Shop Creator Team New Hire Onboarding: 7-Day Training SOP & KPIs
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-creator-team-new-hire-7-day-onboarding-sop?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Run TikTok Shop creator team new hire onboarding on a 7-day SOP: assign least-privilege staff logins, spare work phones, and starter accounts on Day 1, break down 5 proven in-house winners in the Creator Toolbox on Days 2 to 3, cut 3 hook variations on a proven bestseller with frame-accurate review on Days 4 to 5, and verify 3 to 4 daily approved cuts with a 60%+ first-pass approval rate on Days 6 to 7.

Q: What is the biggest mistake agencies make during the first 3 days of TikTok Shop creator team new hire onboarding?
A: Handing a new editor an untested product and telling them to figure it out alone. Always spend Days 1 to 3 on the agency glossary, 5 Toolbox teardowns of proven in-house winners, and hook variations on an already-selling SKU.

Q: How can a new video editor who doesn't speak English or Spanish cut natural overseas product videos?
A: Have them use Star Captain's Creator Toolbox to transcribe and translate proven native videos into a side-by-side bilingual script with visual action cues, then check captions against the 60-second safe-zone and unit-conversion checklist.

Q: Which TikTok accounts should we assign to a new operator or editor in Week 1?
A: Start Week 1 with 2 to 3 starter or secondary accounts and require an editor title prefix (such as zw11.04). Once the hire hits a 60%+ first-pass review approval rate on Day 7, allocate primary Showcase accounts from Account Inventory.

Q: How can a subgroup lead train new hires without losing 3 hours a day to hand-holding?
A: Let the 7-day checklist and Toolbox teardown archive handle Days 1 to 3 self-study, then spend just 15 minutes a day leaving timestamped frame-by-frame review notes on submitted cuts instead of sitting beside the hire's desk.

Q: How do we evaluate a new hire in their first two weeks if they haven't hit a viral order spike yet?
A: Judge Week 1 and Week 2 by leading indicators: daily approved video count (3 to 4 cuts/day), first-pass review approval rate (60%+), zero repeat mistakes, and whether their uploads match the pod's baseline Median Views and Product CTR (2%+).

Q: How do we switch a new hire from probation pay to standard tiered commission in Star Captain?
A: Under Profit & Cost and Payroll settings, assign the hire from the Probation template to the full Operator or Editor role template (or set a personal override) on their graduation date so monthly payslips update automatically.

## TikTok Shop Dormant Account Revival: 7-Day Retest & Cut-Loss Rules
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-dormant-account-revival-and-repositioning?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Execute a TikTok Shop dormant account revival in 3 diagnostic steps plus a 7-day retest: verify Showcase status and violation logs in Seller Center, check 7-day long-tail orders on older videos (enabling Continuous monitoring if active), and publish 10 to 14 original videos over 7 days using proven same-niche bestsellers. Scale if median views rebound above 500 with 2.5%+ CTR, or pause and reallocate if views stay below 200.

Q: Should we delete old low-view videos before starting a TikTok Shop dormant account revival?
A: No. Unless an older video has an active compliance flag, leave it untouched. Mass-deleting or privating dozens of videos removes long-tail search traffic and destabilizes historical signals—simply resume daily posting with fresh same-niche videos.

Q: How can we tell whether a 200-view old account is shadowbanned or just suffering from product fatigue?
A: Check Seller Center violation logs and the last 10 uploads on the account detail page: if there are zero policy violations and 1 or 2 recent clips still reached 800 to 1,500 views despite low Product CTR, account distribution is healthy and only the SKU or 3-second hook needs changing.

Q: What should we do if an old account gets only 200 views on new uploads, but a video from last month still sells 5 units a day?
A: First, turn on Continuous monitoring on Star Captain's single-account detail page so batch syncs keep tracking that older hit for dropped links. Second, film comment-reply and upgrade-comparison videos around that exact converting SKU rather than switching categories.

Q: Can we pivot a dormant TikTok Shop account to a completely different product category?
A: Avoid sudden jumps across unrelated categories (such as pet supplies to women's fashion), which tank completion rates among existing followers. Pivot only into adjacent categories that share the same buyer demographic, such as kitchen gadgets into home cleaning.

Q: How long should we retest a dormant account before pausing it permanently?
A: Run a strict 7-to-10-day retest of 12 to 15 original hands-on videos featuring SKUs that are already selling on sister accounts. If median views stay under 200 with zero orders after that sprint, pause the account and reallocate the phone and operator.

Q: If we pause an unrecoverable account in Star Captain, do we lose its recorded cost and past order records?
A: No. Pausing an account only stops daily filming assignments and manual batch refresh consumption; its recorded setup cost, historical net commissions, and unrecovered balance stay intact in Profit & Cost and Account Payback.

## TikTok Shop Short Video and Livestream Combo: Test SKUs & Clip Live Hits
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-short-video-and-livestream-combo-workflow?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Run a TikTok Shop short video and livestream combo workflow in 3 steps: use matrix short videos to test candidate products and promote only SKUs with 3.5%+ Product CTR into prime-time livestream slots, publish warm-up cart videos 2 hours before going live to funnel high-intent shoppers into the live room, and clip top-converting 60-second live demos within 12 hours after the stream into 5 to 8 matrix short videos.

Q: What is the most effective TikTok Shop short video and livestream combo workflow?
A: Run a three-part flywheel: use matrix short videos to filter for SKUs with 3.5%+ Product CTR before slotting them into livestreams; post same-SKU warm-up videos 2 hours before going live to funnel viewers into the room; and recut high-converting 60-second live demos into 5 to 8 short videos within 12 hours after the stream.

Q: Should we test a brand-new product in a livestream first or with short videos first?
A: Test with short videos first. Filming three 20-second test clips takes minimal effort and reveals Product CTR and conversion within 48 hours, ensuring prime-time livestream hours are reserved for proven winners.

Q: Will TikTok flag our matrix accounts if we post clips cut from our own livestream?
A: Uploading raw, unedited screen recordings across multiple accounts will underperform or trigger unoriginality flags. Instead, keep only the 8-to-12-second hands-on demonstration from the stream, pair it with a freshly filmed 3-second visual hook and B-roll close-ups, and re-caption it in the Creator Toolbox.

Q: When should we post warm-up short videos before a scheduled livestream?
A: Publish 1 to 2 short videos featuring the stream's hero SKU at 2 hours and 30 minutes before airtime. As those clips enter their initial recommendation wave, interested viewers see the live ring on your avatar and tap directly into the room.

Q: If a video editor turns a streamer's live demo clip into a viral short video, who gets the commission credit?
A: Keep incentives separate by sales channel: orders placed inside the live room count toward the streamer's net commission tier, while orders generated by a recut short video on a matrix account credit that account's operator and the editor's single-video viral bonus.

Q: Can Star Captain's Creator Toolbox transcribe spoken English or Spanish from a local livestream recording?
A: Yes. Upload any local mp4 or mov clip from your livestream into Star Captain's Creator Toolbox to transcribe the host's spoken audio, translate between Chinese, English, and Latin American Spanish, and generate a three-part editing brief.

## TikTok Shop Partner Merchant Tiering: Score Brands on Sales, Stock & Payouts
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-partner-merchant-tiering-and-kpi-evaluation?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

TikTok Shop partner merchant tiering reviews product sales, inventory and link removals, promotion eligibility and refunds, and settlement payments. S/A/B/C tiers are internal planning examples. US affiliate pilot creators need shops with performance of at least 95%, a different measure from product stars or five-point SPS.

Q: What are the four core KPIs for monthly TikTok Shop partner merchant tiering?
A: Evaluate every partner brand on four metrics: SKU test-to-sale velocity and net commission per video, inventory depth and unannounced dropped-link frequency, product eligibility and fulfillment and combined refund rate, and on-time payment of 80/20 settlement statements.

Q: If a brand-new supplier promises a 30% commission rate, should we immediately put them in Tier S?
A: No. Every new merchant starts in Tier B (Trial Pool) regardless of promised rate: verify store rating and stock first, run a small 3x3 video test, and promote them to Tier A or S only after they complete their first settlement cycle without stockouts, rate cuts, or payment delays.

Q: Should we keep filming for a partner brand whose product sells fast but has a 28% refund rate?
A: Downgrade or pause that SKU immediately. A 28% refund rate claws back nearly a third of your online and off-platform commissions, turns paid-ad orders negative, and risks platform enforcement on your creators' Showcases.

Q: How many days overdue should a partner statement be before we pause filming their products?
A: Use a 3 / 7 / 15-day rule: send a BD payment reminder at 3 days overdue, stop accepting new sample shipments at 7 days overdue, and freeze all editing and posting tasks for that merchant across the agency at 15 days overdue.

Q: What if a merchant secretly closes our 20% targeted plan so orders settle at the 10% open rate?
A: In Star Captain's Business Center, configure the partner rule as a combined total commission rate (such as 20% total). Even if online commission drops to 10%, Star Captain automatically calculates the remaining 10% as off-platform receivable on your itemized statement.

Q: How does Star Captain help BD and team leads spot overdue merchants before assigning tasks?
A: In the Business Center Statements tab, any statement past its initial or final due date is automatically highlighted with a red Overdue badge and day count, letting leads pause that merchant's SKUs in the Product Library during Monday standup.

## TikTok In-House Shooting Studio and Footage Library: 1 Sample Into 20 Clips
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-in-house-shooting-studio-and-raw-footage-library?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Build a TikTok in-house shooting studio and footage library in 3 steps: set up 5 compact 1.5-meter lifestyle corners in a 20-square-meter office (kitchen sink, bathroom vanity, wood desk, living room rug, and car driver's seat), film every sample across 4 modular shot types from 3 camera angles, and tag raw clips by Product ID and angle so multiple editors assemble distinct original videos.

Q: How can a small agency build a TikTok in-house shooting studio and footage library on a tight budget?
A: Use 20 square meters of office wall space to set up 5 compact 1.5-meter lifestyle surfaces (kitchen sink, bathroom vanity, walnut desk, living room rug, and car seat), then batch-film every sample across 4 modular shot types and 3 camera angles indexed by Product ID.

Q: What are the most common background giveaways that ruin overseas TikTok Shop videos filmed in a domestic office?
A: Four visual giveaways hurt buyer trust immediately: domestic 5-hole wall outlets, Chinese courier boxes or water bottles in the background, metric rulers or Celsius thermometers on US videos (convert units via [TikTok Shop Script Translation and Localization](/guides/tiktok-multilingual-script-localization)), and visible Chinese street signs outside windows.

Q: How can 5 editors produce original videos from 1 physical sample that meet TikTok's originality requirements?
A: Batch-shoot 15 modular 5-second clips across 3 studio corners and 3 camera angles (overhead, front, POV handheld), and have each editor assemble a distinct opening hook, angle sequence, and voiceover so every video is original content.

Q: How do we keep raw 4K video files from filling up our shared storage drives every month?
A: Use a 30-day tiered retention rule: keep raw modular clips for active Tier-S and Tier-A bestsellers on fast shared storage, delete raw footage for dropped test SKUs after 30 days, and download approved final cuts within the 7-day media retention window.

Q: How can we tell which of our 5 studio corners drives the highest Product Click-Through Rate?
A: Have editors include a short scene code in their post title prefix (such as kt for kitchen counter or car for car seat), then filter the video list on Star Captain's single-account detail page to compare Median Views, Product CTR, and orders by scene.

Q: How should we account for studio lights, background boards, and dedicated filming phones in Star Captain?
A: Register filming phones in Accounts and Devices & Networks so their purchase cost amortizes automatically over 180 days, and log lights, contact paper, and props under Shooting Props in Profit & Cost expenses.

## TikTok Shop Commission Rate in 2026: Platform Fees by Country & Creator Rates
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-commission-rate?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

What is the TikTok Shop commission rate? It has two layers: the platform commission fee charged to sellers by category (6% standard in the US, 5% for five fine jewelry sub-categories and pre-owned items, and 3% on the portion above $10,000), and the creator affiliate commission rate (1% to 80% of GMV per order, set separately for Open Collaboration, Target Collaboration, and Shop Ads).

Q: Is the US TikTok Shop commission rate 6% for every product?
A: Almost all categories in the United States carry a **6% Referral Fee**, with three official exceptions: (1) five fine jewelry sub-categories (Diamond, Gold, Jade, Platinum, Carat Gold, and Ruby, Sapphire & Emerald) are charged **5%**; (2) all Pre-Owned sub-categories are charged **5%**; and (3) for both Pre-Owned (5% base) and Collectibles (6% base), any portion of a sale exceeding **$10,000** is charged **3%**.

Q: What is the allowed range for a TikTok Shop affiliate commission rate?
A: Sellers can set Open Collaboration rates, Target Collaboration rates, and Shop Ads commission rates (available to invited sellers only) from **1% to 80% of GMV for each order**. For Open Collaboration, the **Shop Ads commission rate must be at least 30% of the standard commission rate (except in Mexico and Brazil)**.

Q: How does TikTok Shop calculate the platform commission fee across countries?
A: · **United States**: Referral Fee = Referral Fee Rate % × (Customer Payment + Platform Discount - Tax), where Customer Payment includes buyer-paid shipping fees (minus seller or TikTok Shop shipping discounts) and Tax (sales tax and retail delivery fees) is excluded from the fee calculation base. · **Malaysia, Singapore, and the Philippines**: Platform Commission Fee = (Item Price - Seller Discount) × Fee Rate, where shipping fees and TikTok Shop platform discounts are excluded from the fee calculation base. · **Brazil**: Sales fees = (product retail price - seller discount) × platform commission fee rate + fee per item sold (R$4 or R$6).

Q: Do new sellers get a TikTok Shop commission rate waiver?
A: Select regional markets offer official onboarding waivers. Verified Seller Academy policies state that new sellers in the **Philippines** receive a **90-day 0% commission fee waiver** (per the official footnote, sellers who complete relevant Seller Missions under Seller Center - Growth Center - My Mission are eligible for platform fee waivers, while Good Performing Sellers who complete the Diligence Mission can receive a **30-day** platform fee waiver), and new sellers in **Brazil** can qualify for a **60-day limited-time commission waiver (capped at R$17,000)** by completing onboarding tasks.

Q: Which commission rate applies when a product has Open Collaboration, Target Collaboration, and Shop Ads rates?
A: Per TikTok for Business Help Center rules: first, when a product has both an Open Collaboration rate and a Target Collaboration rate, **the Target Collaboration commission rate always supersedes the Open Collaboration commission rate**; second, when an invited seller enables a Shop Ads commission rate, purchases made directly through organic content pay the standard commission rate, whereas purchases made directly through a TikTok Shop Ad pay the Shop Ads commission rate.

## TikTok Shop Payout Schedule: Delivery Tiers, 30-Day Reserves & Withdrawals
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-payout-schedule?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

How long does TikTok Shop take to pay out? After delivery with no active return or refund, earnings clear in 1, 3, 5, 8, or 31 days depending on the settlement tier in the US and UK; refunds retain a 20% refund administration fee capped at $5 per SKU. The guide also covers withdrawal minimums, fees, and US reserve levels.

Q: How can I get a faster TikTok Shop payout schedule as a seller?
A: In the United States, TikTok Shop re-evaluates seller settlement tiers on the **1st day of every month** based on your **Shop Performance Score (SPS)** (which requires at least **30 orders in the past 90 calendar days**) and delivered order volume over the previous **15–45 days**—per the April 7, 2025 official blog, graduating probation with an **SPS of 3.5+** qualifies for the **5-day Accelerated tier** and **SPS 4.0+** qualifies for the **1-day Express tier** (check Seller Center > Finances for live policy terms). In the UK, tiers are evaluated at the beginning of every month (**3.0 ≤ SPS < 3.5** and >$4,500 GMV for the **3-day Accelerated tier**; **SPS ≥ 3.5** and >$30,000 GMV for the **1-day Express tier**).

Q: What happens if I set my monthly TikTok Shop payout schedule to the 30th in February?
A: Per the US Seller Academy (Scheduling your payouts), if your selected monthly payout date falls beyond the end of a shorter month, TikTok Shop processes the payout on the **final day of that month** (February 28 or February 29).

Q: Why was my scheduled TikTok Shop payout not initiated on time?
A: Four issues prevent scheduled payouts from initiating: (1) an unresolved **negative balance**; (2) settled **Net earnings** below the **$1.00 USD** minimum threshold; (3) temporary policy restrictions on the account; or (4) invalid bank account details.

Q: What should a creator do if withdrawal fails due to OTP phone number or ID verification issues?
A: Per the US Seller Academy (Withdraw Rules), to update an old phone number via email, go to Profile → Settings and privacy → Manage account → Phone number → Change phone → Use email. If ID verification fails without an appeal button, submit a valid US government ID (US driver's license, state-issued ID, Green Card, or US Passport) via TikTok Shop Creator Center → Settings → Help Center.

Q: Does TikTok Shop charge a Refund Administration Fee on creator sample orders?
A: No. Under the US Referral Fee Policy (knowledge_id=5982454398175018), **"Buy now refund later" creator sample order refunds** are exempt ($0) from the 20% Refund Administration Fee.

## TikTok Shop Showcase Requirements: Account Types, Pilot Rules & Setup
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-showcase-requirements?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

What are the TikTok Shop Showcase requirements? They depend on the creator type: store-bound Official Shop Creators and Marketing Creators can open a Showcase with 0 followers for the bound shop's own products, while independent Affiliate Creators in the US need to be 18+, pass identity verification, and hold at least 1,000 followers before a 30-day Pilot Program capped at 3 shoppable videos per day.

Q: How many accounts can I verify with one ID under the TikTok Shop Showcase requirements?
A: Per the US Seller Academy (What You Need to Know Before Becoming a TikTok Shop Creator), **1 government-issued ID can be used to verify up to 5 TikTok Shop creator accounts**. While identity verification is in progress, product links may be hidden from viewers, and if you fail to pass identity verification, you will be unable to withdraw commissions from TikTok Shop.

Q: Can I meet the TikTok Shop Showcase requirements with 0 followers?
A: Yes, if you bind the account to a TikTok Shop. Binding an **Official Shop Creator** or **Marketing Creator** account requires **0 minimum followers** to showcase and promote that store's own products (newly bound accounts enter a 30-day Early-Stage Control Pilot limited to 3 product promotion videos per day, refreshed daily, until reaching 30 days and 1,000 followers). If a Marketing Creator wants to promote products from other merchants via the Product Marketplace, the account must reach **5,000+ followers**.

Q: Why am I still limited on how many shoppable videos I can post after graduating the 30-day Pilot Program?
A: Two rules apply: first, effective **May 11, 2026**, all US sellers and creators are subject to a platform-wide daily limit of **30 shoppable short videos per day** and **60 shoppable photo posts per day**; second, if your account has unresolved violations that lowered your **Creator Health Rating (CHR)**, additional posting frequency limits may apply until appealed on the Creator Health Rating page.

Q: If I delete or private a shoppable video during the Pilot Program, do I get my posting quota back?
A: **No**. Under official US Seller Academy rules, any published shoppable video (even if changed to private afterward), any scheduled shoppable video (counted the moment you schedule it), any deleted or violation-removed shoppable video, and any existing video to which you newly attach a product link all deduct from your quota. Only unposted drafts or failed uploads do not count.

Q: How many products can a TikTok Shop Showcase hold, and what happens when items sell out?
A: According to the UK Seller Academy (TikTok Shop Showcase, knowledge_id=7753767378732801), a Showcase can hold **up to 2,000 products**. If a product becomes unavailable or sold out, TikTok Shop automatically removes it from your Showcase.

## How to Join the TikTok Shop Affiliate Program: Eligibility & Setup
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/join-tiktok-shop-affiliate-program?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

What are the TikTok Shop affiliate program requirements? Creators apply in TikTok Studio and, in the US, need to follow community guidelines, be 18 or older, have at least 1,000 followers, and pass account risk evaluation; sellers open Open or Target Collaborations from the Affiliate menu in Seller Center and set commission at 1% to 80% of GMV per order.

Q: How do creators and sellers apply step by step to join the TikTok Shop Affiliate Program?
A: For **Affiliate Creators**, apply directly in the TikTok app under Profile → TikTok Studio → Monetization → TikTok Shop for Creator → Join now. For **Sellers**, sign in to TikTok Shop Seller Center, click Affiliate → Get Started in the left-hand menu, and create an Open Collaboration or Target Collaboration plan.

Q: What should I do if my identity verification is rejected when I join the TikTok Shop Affiliate Program?
A: While identity verification is in progress, product links may be hidden from viewers, and failing identity verification prevents commission withdrawals. If your first check fails, tap Resubmit Now (you have up to **10 submission attempts**). If verification still fails, tap Appeal on the rejection screen and upload a real-time selfie holding the front of your valid government-issued ID (up to **2 appeal attempts**). Per official US rules, **1 government ID can verify up to 5 TikTok Shop creator accounts**.

Q: Is a TikTok Shop creator account the same as a Commission Account?
A: No. Approving your creator account (which typically takes a few minutes) unlocks e-commerce features, whereas setting up your **Commission Account** requires submitting your personal and tax details after you begin earning commissions so you can withdraw funds.

Q: In Singapore, if an Affiliate Creator's follower count drops below the minimum requirement later, does the account revert to Link-Share Only?
A: No. Per the Singapore Seller Academy (How to Apply as an Affiliate Creator, knowledge_id=7996132844111617), once your account is granted access as an **Affiliate Creator** in Singapore, falling below the minimum follower limit later **will not revert** you to Link-Share Only status.

Q: Why does TikTok Shop prohibit "AB frame" editing in affiliate videos?
A: According to the US Seller Academy (What You Need to Know Before Becoming a TikTok Shop Creator, knowledge_id=7608640301074219), hiding prohibited products, content, or claims within edited video frames (such as AB frames), using frame manipulation to obscure policy-violating content, or re-uploading content that was previously removed for violations using altered formats are classified as **High Impact Violations** that deduct **Creator Health Rating (CHR)** points and can permanently revoke e-commerce permissions.

## TikTok MCN Application: Requirements, Creator Fees & Onboarding
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-mcn-application?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

How do you apply for a TikTok MCN? First pick the right partner role (MCN, US CAP, TAP or TSP), then register in TikTok Shop Partner Center as a TikTok Shop Partner with the Creator management business category and submit your business license, legal representative ID, a PDF company profile under 30 MB, and operating proof; review takes 7 to 14 business days in Malaysia, and one company can register up to 3 partner accounts in the US. Creator fee agreements are set in the console at 1% up to the full commission, and the official onboarding and linking docs list no platform application fee or deposit.

Q: Does a TikTok MCN application require an official deposit or annual platform fee?
A: **Official TikTok Shop Partner Center registration and linking documentation does not list any platform application fee, deposit, or annual membership fee (refer to the live Partner Center console for current terms).** When submitting corporate qualifications in TikTok Shop Partner Center (partner.tiktokshop.com or partner.us.tiktokshop.com), costs mainly come from your own company registration, studio hardware setup, or optional third-party agency consulting fees (Sources: [US Agency Partner Onboard Guide](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/683f1353f979330480b82080), [Partner Registration Application Requirement](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/64f19899cb677b0286e75d67), checked 2026-11-08).

Q: Which target markets can a Mainland China or Hong Kong company select when applying for a TikTok MCN?
A: **Cross-border partners registered in Mainland China or Hong Kong can select 6 target markets: the United Kingdom, Malaysia, Vietnam, Thailand, the Philippines, and Singapore.** Local entities can only apply for their domestic market (for example, a US company applying for US CAP), while entities registered in Taiwan or Macau are currently not supported for cross-border partner onboarding (Sources: [Cross-Border Seller University Guide](https://seller.tiktokglobalshop.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=2496344989255425&default_language=zh-CN), [Cross-Border Partner Onboarding Guide](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/6746be6cebbeff030f7c5805), checked 2026-11-08).

Q: How many creators can a US CAP agency invite per day, and what Fee Agreement rate can it set?
A: **A US agency can send up to 100 creator linking requests per day and set a Fee Agreement rate between 1% and 100%.** The maximum duration for a first-time link with a creator is **2 months**, while subsequent links or renewals can be set for up to **1 year**; unanswered invitations expire automatically after **7 days** (Source: [US Creator Linking & Commission Sharing Guide](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/660357886d72f402e3b598fe), checked 2026-11-08).

Q: Can a creator request to unlink after joining a TikTok MCN or CAP agency?
A: **Yes, creators can submit an unlink request in the app—in the UK the MCN decides whether to approve the request, while in the US a 2nd unlink request is automatically approved if the agency declines it or does not respond within 7 days.** Creators submit unlink requests via Partnerships > View details > Unlink (or TikTok Shop > Partnership > Unlink / Inbox in the UK, where the MCN institution has the full initiative to decide the unlink request); in the US, if the creator sends an unlink request a **2nd time** and the agency declines it or does not respond within **7 days**, then it is automatically approved (Sources: [US Creator Linking & Commission Sharing Guide](https://partner.tiktokshop.com/docv2/page/660357886d72f402e3b598fe), [UK Unlink Guide](https://seller-uk.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=7634562663040770), checked 2026-11-08).

Q: Can an approved TikTok MCN lose its partner status if its creators do not generate sales?
A: **Yes, TikTok conducts quarterly performance evaluations and terminates inactive agencies.** Under Malaysia Seller Academy's official rules, an agency that becomes inactive or records **quarterly GMV ≤ $1,000** (or has multiple creators banned for severe violations) receives a written warning (with **30 calendar days** to appeal and **14 working days** for review); failing the evaluation for a **2nd consecutive quarter** results in formal termination (with a **30-calendar-day** wind-down period) and a permanent ban on re-applying under the same business license (Source: [Malaysia CAP Enrolment & Termination Guidelines](https://seller-my.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=4598309088610065&lang=en), checked 2026-11-08).

## What Is a TikTok Shop Account Manager? Daily Duties & Workload
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-account-manager?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

What is a TikTok Shop account manager? It is the e-commerce operator role that owns product selection, original content planning, publishing schedules and sales data reviews for TikTok Shop accounts; a new hire on a standard SOP is usually independent in about 7 days, starting with 2 to 3 test accounts and 3 to 4 approved videos per day. A common 10-person team is 1 team lead, 3 to 4 operators and 2 to 3 editors, with one editor supporting about 1 to 1.5 operators.

Q: What is a TikTok Shop account manager, and how long does it take to train a beginner?
A: **A TikTok Shop account manager is the ecommerce operator who selects affiliate products, plans original shoppable video scripts, coordinates publishing schedules, and analyzes conversion data—and a beginner trained under a structured SOP can typically operate independently within about 7 days.** In a pod-based team, new hires do not need to master complex video effects and brand negotiations simultaneously; during Week 1 they typically support **2–3 test accounts**, aim for **3–4 approved videos per day**, and transition to a regular account workload once their first-pass video review rate reaches **60% or higher** (see our [New Hire 7-Day Onboarding SOP](/en/guides/tiktok-creator-team-new-hire-7-day-onboarding-sop)).

Q: How many US creator accounts can an individual creator verify under a single ID?
A: **In the United States, an individual creator's 1 valid government-issued ID can verify a maximum of 5 TikTok Shop creator accounts.** According to TikTok Shop's official What You Need to Know Before Becoming a TikTok Shop Creator and Creator Eligibility Policy, identity verification supports government-issued IDs such as a U.S. driver's license, state ID, or passport (personal details page only), with up to **10 ID check attempts** and **2 real-time selfie appeal attempts** per account, and accounts must not share the same or similar login information with TikTok Shop accounts with high violations; this 5-account cap is the verification limit for the individual creator's own ID rather than an account manager's workload quota—each creator account must be verified by the creator themselves, while the **TikTok Shop account manager** collaborates on product sourcing, script planning, and data analysis (Sources: [What You Need to Know Before Becoming a TikTok Shop Creator](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=7608640301074219&lang=en), [US Creator Eligibility Policy](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=6939143037667118&lang=en), checked 2026-11-08).

Q: How many shoppable videos can a TikTok Shop account manager schedule per US account each day?
A: **US 30-day Pilot Program accounts are capped at 3 shoppable short videos per day, while effective May 11, 2026, all US merchants and creators are capped at 30 shoppable short videos and 60 shoppable photo posts per day (note that two official pages differ, so always check Seller Center for your live quota).** Specifically, affiliate creators in the 30-day Pilot Program and newly bound Official/Marketing shop accounts during their 30-day Early Stage Pilot are capped at **3 shoppable videos per day** (affiliate creators can unlock Pilot restrictions early by passing the Pilot Quiz, keeping **CHR ≥ 176**, and completing either 6 shoppable videos of ≥ 8s, 1 LIVE of ≥ 5m, or 10 orders within 30 days); for non-Pilot limits, the Creator Eligibility Policy sets a cap of **30 shoppable short videos and 60 shoppable photo posts per day** for all US merchants and creators, whereas What You Need to Know Before Becoming a TikTok Shop Creator still lists unlimited shoppable videos after Pilot graduation—operators should follow the live limit displayed in Seller Center or TikTok Studio (Sources: [US Creator Eligibility Policy](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=6939143037667118&lang=en), [What You Need to Know Before Becoming a TikTok Shop Creator](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/university/essay?knowledge_id=7608640301074219&lang=en), checked 2026-11-08).

Q: When a TikTok Shop account manager adds a product link, does Open Collaboration or Target Collaboration commission take priority?
A: **The Target Collaboration commission rate always takes priority over the Open Collaboration rate.** Sellers can configure standard affiliate commission rates between **1% and 80% of GMV** (and invited sellers can also configure separate Shop Ads commission rates between **1% and 80%**); if a product is enrolled in both an Open Collaboration and a Target Collaboration for that creator, TikTok Shop automatically applies the Target Collaboration rate regardless of which rate is higher (Source: [TikTok Business Help Center Target Collaborations](https://ads.tiktok.com/resources/help/article/about-target-collaborations-in-seller-center), checked 2026-11-08).

Q: What is a common ratio of TikTok Shop account managers to video editors in a 10-person team?
A: **A common pod ratio in practice is 1 Team Lead + 3–4 TikTok Shop Account Managers + 2–3 dedicated Video Editors (roughly 1 editor per 1–1.5 account managers).** Because an experienced video editor typically delivers **around 6 modular original videos per day**, 2–3 editors typically produce **12–18 finished videos daily**—enough to supply the active showcase accounts and 3-video/day Pilot accounts supported by 3–4 account managers without pulling managers away from product selection and conversion analysis.

## TikTok Banned Account Withdraw Money: Hold Periods & Appeals
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-banned-account-withdraw-money?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Can you withdraw money after a TikTok ban? It depends on the account type: in the US, a seller shop suspended for a standard violation may have funds held for 45, 90 or 365 days before the remainder is released minus refunds, chargebacks and negative balances; a creator with frozen commissions must appeal within 30 calendar days of the penalty date; a disabled TikTok Ads account must request account closure and refund, which risk and compliance review, with a service fee of up to 10% of the remaining prepaid balance. Funds can be permanently withheld where deception, abuse, fraud or illegal activity is found.

Q: In a tiktok banned account withdraw money case, do I lose my money if I do not appeal?
A: It depends on whether you are a seller or an affiliate creator: for a **TikTok Shop US Seller** with a standard (non-fraud) violation, funds are temporarily withheld for **45, 90, or 365 days** and remaining funds are disbursed after offsetting refunds, chargebacks, and fees even without a successful appeal; however, for a **TikTok Shop US Creator** with frozen commissions, the TikTok Shop Creator Enforcement Policy states that if you do not submit an appeal within **30 calendar days** of the enforcement date (or if your appeal is denied), the frozen commissions may be **forfeited**.

Q: Why is my TikTok Shop seller account blocked from withdrawing funds when my store is not deactivated?
A: Common causes include hitting an Account Health Rating (AHR) restriction threshold, undergoing a platform security check, or having withheld funds offset against negative balances: under the US Account Health Rating (AHR) Requirements (updated November 2, 2026), if your shop's AHR drops to **50 points**, TikTok Shop **may** suspend your ability to withdraw funds for **30 days** even though permanent deactivation **may** occur at **0 points**; TikTok Shop may also pause withdrawals or place a store into the **31-day Deferred Settlement Period** during security checks or investigations into suspected risky selling behavior; additionally, per the Violation & Appeal Guide and Seller Enforcement Policy, withheld funds may be used to cover **negative balances** and other outstanding obligations, and TikTok Shop may deduct from the account balance to cover losses.

Q: Why were my creator e-commerce permissions removed and commissions frozen when my CHR score was still above 0?
A: Under the US TikTok Shop Creator Enforcement Policy, creators who commit the **same policy violation 6 times within a 90-day period** **may** have their e-commerce permissions removed immediately and their commissions frozen, regardless of their remaining Creator Health Rating (CHR) points.

Q: Why did my suspended TikTok Ads Manager refund fail to process?
A: Per the TikTok Business Help Center (How to request a refund for a suspended ad account), refunds cannot be processed if: (1) the original bank card or bank account has expired or closed; (2) you removed or changed the original payment method after the ad account was suspended; or (3) multiple ad accounts share the same payment method and the payment API returns 0. In these cases, contact TikTok Business Support directly.

Q: How many times can sellers and creators appeal a violation on TikTok Shop US?
A: In the United States, **TikTok Shop Sellers** can submit up to **2 appeals per violation** (the first within **30 calendar days** of notice, and the second within **15 calendar days** of a rejection), whereas **TikTok Shop Affiliate Creators** are allowed **only 1 appeal per violation** (submitted within **30 calendar days** of notice, with a target review time of **7 business days**).

## TikTok Shop GMV Meaning: Formula, Dashboard Scopes & Payout
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/guides/tiktok-shop-gmv-meaning?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

What does TikTok Shop GMV mean? GMV stands for Gross Merchandise Value, defined in US Seller Center analytics as the total amount buyers paid for orders in the period: GMV = (list price x units sold) + shipping - seller-funded discounts - platform-funded discounts - taxes. GMV is recorded when the buyer pays and includes orders later cancelled or refunded, while actual payouts come after delivery and the 1, 5, 8 or 31-day settlement tier, minus refunds, platform commission, creator commission and the 30-day reserve.

Q: What is the exact tiktok shop gmv meaning and does it include refunded orders?
A: In TikTok Shop Seller Center, **GMV (Gross Merchandise Value)** is the total amount paid by buyers for orders during the selected timeframe, calculated at the time of payment as (Product List Price × Items Sold) + Shipping Fee - Seller-Funded Discounts - Platform-Funded Discounts - Tax. Per the US Seller Academy (How to navigate Shop analytics in Seller Center), GMV **includes canceled and refunded orders**; you must review the Refunds metric separately to see net retained sales.

Q: Why does Gross Revenue in TikTok Ads Manager differ from GMV in Seller Center?
A: Because the two dashboards—and their respective official help pages—use different formulas: the US Seller Academy (How to navigate Shop analytics in Seller Center, knowledge_id=813364865828654) defines Seller Center GMV as (Product List Price × Items Sold) + Shipping Fee - Seller-Funded Discounts - Platform-Funded Discounts - Tax, whereas the TikTok Business Help Center (About gross revenue for TikTok Shop Ads) states "In Seller Center: GMV = Customer Payment" and "In TikTok Ads Manager: Gross Revenue = Customer Payment - Sales Taxes + Platform Price Discount = GMV - Sales Taxes + Platform Price Discount", noting that **if Gross Revenue for your ads is higher than your shop's GMV, Seller Center may exclude certain platform subsidies from its GMV calculation**.

Q: Does US Creator Compass GMV include free sample orders or shop-sold orders?
A: No. According to the US Seller Academy's How to Use Earnings Analytics (updated November 4, 2026), US Creator Compass removed the old separate Commission tab and now displays one unified GMV across Creator Compass and Affiliate Orders based strictly on **paid orders that actually earn commission**—explicitly leaving out gift orders, sample orders, and orders the shop sold itself.

Q: Does Product GMV Max count organic affiliate orders even if the buyer never saw an ad?
A: Yes. Under the TikTok Business Help Center's About attribution for GMV Max (updated June 2026), while a Product GMV Max campaign is active, **all paid and organic orders (including affiliate orders)** for the promoted products are attributed to the Product GMV Max campaign, whether or not the customer viewed or clicked an ad.

Q: How is the attribution window defined for Indirect GMV vs. Affiliate LIVE/Video GMV?
A: Two official US Seller Academy pages define these metrics at different levels of specificity: the newer Sales Metrics Breakdown Logic Upgrade (knowledge_id=6494954580231950, updated April 28, 2026) states that **Indirect GMV** uses **last-touch attribution** and counts orders purchased from another entrance **"within a certain period of time"** after a viewer clicks a product link in content (without specifying a fixed day count; official examples include searching for the product on TikTok Shop within 1 day or purchasing via the Shop tab); meanwhile, the older How to navigate Shop analytics in Seller Center guide (knowledge_id=813364865828654, updated November 12, 2025) defines **Affiliate LIVE GMV** and **Affiliate Video GMV** as orders paid **within 14 days of clicking product links** (without mentioning last-touch attribution). Always refer to your live Seller Center dashboard for current attribution windows.

## Free TikTok Shop Tools: Profit & Account Payback Calculators Compared
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tools?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Star Captain's free TikTok Shop tools provide 2 free and unlimited TikTok Shop calculators that run right in your browser: the TikTok Shop Profit Calculator (modeling the 6% US referral fee, 20% refund admin fee capped at $5, creator commissions, and product costs) and the TikTok Account Payback Calculator (estimating daily net profit and break-even days from upfront account, device, network, and payroll costs), with no sign-up required.

Q: Are these TikTok Shop tools completely free to use without signing up?
A: Yes. Both the [TikTok Shop Profit Calculator](/tools/tiktok-profit-calculator) and the [TikTok Account Payback Calculator](/tools/account-payback-calculator) are 100% free online tools with no sign-up, login, or credit card required.

Q: Do you store or upload the prices, costs, or commission rates I enter?
A: No. All calculations execute locally in your browser using client-side JavaScript. We never send, log, or store your financial inputs on any server.

Q: Where do the TikTok Shop referral fee and refund admin fee numbers come from?
A: All platform rules—including the 6% default US referral fee, the 20% refund administration fee capped at $5 per refunded SKU, and the 1%–80% affiliate commission range—are verified directly against official [TikTok Shop Seller University](https://seller-us.tiktok.com/), [TikTok for Business documentation](https://ads.tiktok.com/), [U.S. SBA break-even guidelines](https://www.sba.gov/), and [FTC Endorsement Guides](https://www.ftc.gov/).

Q: Can both TikTok Shop sellers and affiliate creator agencies use these tools?
A: Yes. The profit calculator includes a one-click view switch between Merchant Seller (own store, deducting COGS, shipping, and platform fees from net sales) and Creator / Agency (deducting ad spend and account overhead from net affiliate commission).

Q: When should our team move from free calculators to Star Captain's workspace?
A: When your team manages 10+ accounts, reconciles off-platform partner brand commissions, or calculates tiered staff payroll every month, Star Captain's [Profit & Cost module](/features/profit-accounting) automates the entire workflow. See tier details on our [pricing page](/pricing).

## TikTok Shop Profit Calculator: Free Fee, Commission & Margin Tool
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tools/tiktok-profit-calculator?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

This free online TikTok Shop profit calculator computes your net profit and profit margin with 1 formula: Net Profit = Net Sales after Refunds − Platform Referral Fee (6% default for most US categories, plus a 20% refund administration fee capped at $5 per refunded SKU) − Affiliate Creator Commission − COGS − Shipping − Ad Spend − Allocated Overhead. Everything runs locally in your browser with no sign-up required.

Q: How accurate is this TikTok Shop profit calculator for US orders?
A: It matches US Seller Center rules to the cent (6% referral fee and 20% refund admin fee capped at $5/SKU) based on your refund rate and costs.

Q: Are the TikTok Shop referral fee and affiliate creator commission both deducted?
A: Yes, for merchants both apply: the 6% US referral fee on the tax-excluded base plus the 1%–80% creator commission.

Q: Does TikTok Shop keep the referral fee when a customer refunds an order?
A: No, it refunds the fee minus a 20% US refund admin fee capped at $5/SKU. A full refund on a $105 base returns $6.30 and charges $1.26.

Q: How should I use the TikTok Shop affiliate profit calculator mode as an agency?
A: Select Creator / Agency so revenue is net commission, then deduct ad spend and daily account ($45/30d = $1.50), phone ($270/180d = $1.50), and network ($9/mo) costs.

Q: How do I calculate profit when organic and Shop Ads orders have different commission rates?
A: Run separate passes or enter your weighted-average rate. See [How to Separate TikTok Ad Orders and Organic Orders](/guides/tiktok-ads-vs-organic-orders).

## TikTok Account Payback Calculator: Free Daily Profit & Break-Even Tool
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tools/account-payback-calculator?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

This free online TikTok account payback calculator estimates how fast a TikTok Shop account recovers its upfront account cost using 2 formulas: Daily Net Profit = Daily Orders × Average Order Value × Net Commission Rate − (Monthly Device & Network Cost + Monthly Payroll Share) ÷ 30, and Payback Days = Ceiling(Account Cost ÷ Daily Net Profit). All math runs locally in your browser with no sign-up required.

Q: How does this payback calculator compute break-even days?
A: It divides Account Cost by Daily Net Profit and rounds up to the next whole day, where Daily Net Profit = (Daily Orders × AOV × Net Commission Rate) − (Monthly Device & Network Cost + Monthly Payroll Share) ÷ 30.

Q: Should I include work phone, network, and payroll costs or set them to zero?
A: Set device/network and payroll fields to 0 if you only want to track standalone upfront account cost recovery; keep them filled in when evaluating net profit after hardware and staff overhead.

Q: Why can't I use raw TikTok Shop GMV to calculate account payback?
A: GMV belongs to the merchant, whereas a creator team only keeps the commission. At a 15% net commission rate, $1,000 in GMV yields $150 in net commission—using GMV overstates payback speed by 5 to 10 times.

Q: How do we account for accounts in a batch that become inactive before breaking even?
A: Divide total batch spend by surviving active accounts. If a batch of 10 accounts at $50 each ($500 total, or CNY 3,400) has 2 accounts stop operating with zero sales, each of the 8 active accounts must recover $62.50 (CNY 425).

Q: Is the projected payback date a guaranteed break-even date?
A: No, it is a linear estimate based on your entered daily orders, AOV, and net commission rate. Re-check weekly using your trailing 7-day or 30-day average.

## Star Captain Tutorials: How to Set Up and Use the Workspace
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Yes — in these Star Captain tutorials, 34 step-by-step guides are organized into 5 onboarding groups covering Getting started & accounts (9), Team & daily management (10), Orders & partner brand billing (6), Costs, payroll & profit (5), and Product picks, teardown & assistant (4). Each guide in these Star Captain tutorials gives a one-line answer on where to click, clear steps with real workspace screenshots, and an FAQ so new teammates can follow along right away.

Q: Which group of Star Captain tutorials should I start with when setting up Star Captain?
A: All 34 Star Captain tutorials are organized into 5 groups in the order a new team sets up the workspace: start with Group 1 (Getting started & accounts, 9 tutorials) to connect TikTok accounts via QR code, bulk import new accounts, assign them to staff, register phones and networks, configure account groups and viral threshold settings, inspect account scores, video links, and single-account conversion funnels, and restore deleted accounts or audit activity logs. Next, use Group 2 (Team & daily management, 10 tutorials) to add members, set up departments, set daily targets, assign products and review videos frame by frame, log published posts, and run Personal Center, inbox approvals, and daily reports. Once orders come in, follow Group 3 (Orders & partner brand billing, 6 tutorials) to track daily sales, view performance rankings across products, shops, and staff, filter and export live orders, match orders to partner brands, export statements, and record payments. At month-end, check Group 4 (Costs, payroll & profit, 5 tutorials) for the general ledger overview, daily profit and team profit ranking, account payback, expense tracking, and one-click payroll, and use Group 5 (Product picks, teardown & assistant, 4 tutorials) whenever your team researches products, manages saved folders and viral video rankings, breaks down viral videos, or asks the assistant about workspace data.

Q: Do the Star Captain tutorials screenshots show real customer data?
A: No — every account, order, amount, staff name, device, and partner brand shown across all 34 Star Captain tutorials is fictional demo data created specifically for these guides, with no real customer information. When you sign in to your own workspace, you'll see your team's live data.

Q: Do the Chinese and English Star Captain tutorials show the same workspace interface?
A: Yes. Both versions of our Star Captain tutorials follow the exact same workflows and button locations, with Chinese workspace screenshots on the Chinese pages and English workspace screenshots on the English pages.

Q: How often are the Star Captain tutorials updated, and what if my screen looks slightly different?
A: We update the text and screenshots of our Star Captain tutorials whenever the workspace interface changes, and each tutorial shows its last updated date at the top. Where a left-menu label is shorter than the page heading (such as "Match orders to brands" in the menu versus "Order matching" on the page), the tutorial names both so you can easily find the right spot.

Q: Can I follow these Star Captain tutorials on the Free plan?
A: Yes. The Free plan starts at $0 with no credit card required (up to 3 members and unlimited TikTok accounts), so you can follow the onboarding, account connection, live order tracking, and role setup Star Captain tutorials right away; tutorials covering partner settlements, account payback, live office, task reviews, and payroll note the applicable plan tier on the page.

Q: How do the 34 Star Captain tutorials differ from the 49 operational guides?
A: The 34 Star Captain tutorials walk through exact workspace clicks ("where to click → what you see → what to do next") with annotated screenshots each, while the 49 operational guides explain broader agency management formulas, SOPs, and commission workflows. Both sections cross-link to each other.

## How to Bind a TikTok Account in Star Captain
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/bind-tiktok-account?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can bind a TikTok account in Star Captain: click "Accounts" in the top navigation, click the blue "Add authorized account" button, scan the QR code with TikTok on your phone, and tap "Authorize" on TikTok's official page. You never enter your TikTok password in Star Captain.

Q: Do I need to give my TikTok password when I bind a TikTok account?
A: No. Authorization is done on TikTok's official page: scan the code and tap "Authorize". Independent third-party workspace tools leave this step to TikTok's own page whenever you bind a TikTok account.

Q: What can I do after connecting?
A: After you bind a TikTok account and finish authorizing, you can sync profile and performance data, get affiliate orders (including LIVE) and video sales, and manage your showcase, samples and posts. Views and posts refresh automatically every day at 9:00 Beijing time, and you can also refresh manually (how often depends on your plan). Orders and profit are counted in US Pacific Time (GMT-8), so the day rolls over at 16:00 Beijing time.

Q: It says authorization wasn't completed. What now?
A: When you try to bind a TikTok account, this message usually means the "Authorize" step on TikTok's page wasn't finished, so just scan again. QR codes expire after a short window; click "Generate again" in the QR window and scan the new code with your phone.

Q: It says "Account limit reached". What now?
A: You've reached your plan's account limit and cannot bind a TikTok account until capacity frees up. Add an add-on pack or upgrade to add more showcase or channel accounts.

Q: My authorization expired. What do I do?
A: Authorization doesn't last forever. When it expires you'll see a notice in the workspace; repeat the steps above to bind a TikTok account again and scan to reauthorize without losing historical orders.

## How to Assign Accounts to Staff in Star Captain
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/assign-accounts-to-staff?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can assign accounts to staff in Star Captain: for newly new accounts, open "Accounts → Inventory", click "Add account" or "Bulk import", select the accounts and click "Assign to staff" so operators can view passwords under "Me → My accounts"; for authorized accounts, change the operator directly on "Accounts".

Q: Who can see the passwords when I assign accounts to staff?
A: Passwords and 2FA keys are encrypted. After you assign accounts to staff, the password goes to the staff member so they can view it anytime, every view is logged, and the password is no longer kept in the inventory list.

Q: Can I take back or reassign an account if I sent it to the wrong person?
A: Before the account is authorized, open its "Details" in "Account inventory" and click "Reassign…" to pick someone else, or click "Take back" to return it to stock.

Q: How do I move an already authorized account to another staff member?
A: Change the operator directly on the "Accounts" page. The recorded cost stays with the account and isn't counted twice.

Q: Can staff see other teammates' accounts?
A: No. Staff only see the accounts assigned to them, while full team accounts and cost data are only visible to the team owner.

## How to See Which Accounts Sell Today in Star Captain
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/see-which-accounts-sell-today?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can see which accounts sell today in Star Captain: open "Home" and set the period to "Today" to check "Selling accounts" and "Performance rankings → Accounts", open "Live orders" to inspect "Accounts by sales" and real-time order cards, or filter by "Making sales" on the "Accounts" page.

Q: Is "Today" based on Beijing time or US time when I see which accounts sell today?
A: US orders are grouped by US Pacific Time (GMT-8) to match the TikTok App data page, so the day turns over at 16:00 Beijing time and the previous day settles by 16:30. Mexico (GMT-6) and Brazil (GMT-3) follow their local dates. You can switch the order card display time between "US time (GMT-8)" and "Beijing time" without changing which day an order counts toward.

Q: How often do orders update?
A: Orders sync automatically about every 10 minutes, and historical orders are backfilled daily. To check right away, click "Refresh orders" on the "Live orders" page.

Q: How do showcase accounts and channel accounts differ in sales display?
A: Showcase accounts report order-by-order details, including products, commission, and paid vs. organic traffic. Channel accounts with official authorization only report daily items sold per product once a day (T+1); once you click "Turn on sales sync" on the account card and scan the QR code, same-day sales sync automatically.

Q: Can I check today's selling accounts on my phone?
A: Yes. Scan with WeChat to open the Star Captain mini-program and view today's GMV, orders, and accounts on your phone, or follow the WeChat service account for order surge alerts.

## How to Attribute Orders to Merchants Automatically
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/auto-attribute-orders-to-merchants?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can attribute orders to merchants automatically in Star Captain: under "Ledger → Collect from brands", open "Partner brands" to add a brand and link its shops with an off-platform commission rate, or open "Match orders to brands" ("Order matching") to bulk match shops and products that already have sales.

Q: Will past orders also match when I attribute orders to merchants?
A: Yes. Once you attribute orders to merchants by linking a shop or product to a partner brand, synced orders from that shop are automatically assigned to the brand and their estimated off-platform commission is recalculated at the configured rate.

Q: How do I set different commission rates for organic and paid orders in the same shop?
A: In the "Add shop" or "Edit shop" window, enter the default "Off-platform commission", uncheck "Paid-order rate same as regular", and enter the "Paid off-platform commission" rate.

Q: What if a brand changes its commission rate mid-way?
A: In the brand details, click "Adjust commission" on the shop row or click "Adjust by date" under "Commission history". Set the effective date and the new rate so orders before and after that date use their respective rates.

Q: Who can edit partner brands and commission rates?
A: Only the team owner and members with business permissions can edit them. Changes to commission rates and attribution are logged.

## How to Reconcile with Merchants and Export Statements
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/reconcile-with-merchants?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can reconcile with merchants in Star Captain: open "Ledger → Collect from brands → Reconcile", click "Export reconciliation" to download an Excel statement with order details, upload the brand's file in the "Check" step to spot missing orders automatically, and record payments in "Record pay".

Q: Why do I need to match shops before I reconcile with merchants?
A: Before you reconcile with merchants, Star Captain uses your order matching rules to know which orders belong to which partner brand and what commission rate applies. If you still have unmatched shops, a notice at the top of the page will remind you to match them first so no orders are left out.

Q: How do I record split payments like an initial payment and a final payment?
A: You can switch between "Initial payment" and "Final payment" in the "Record pay" step on the same statement to log each payment separately. The card updates the received and remaining amounts after each entry until it is fully settled.

Q: Which timezone is used for statements?
A: US orders are counted in GMT-8 by default, and statements can be generated using either "By brand time" (US Pacific Time) or "By system time" (GMT-8) when you reconcile with merchants.

Q: Do exported statements show refunded orders?
A: Yes. The statement summary breaks down total orders, effective orders, refunded orders, and commission, and the detail sheet marks the status of each order for line-by-line checking.

## How to Check TikTok Account Payback and Batch ROI
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/account-payback?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can check TikTok account payback in Star Captain: open "Ledger → Account payback", enter the "Recorded cost (CNY)" and "Onboarding date" for your accounts (or carry them over from "Account inventory"), and review how much commission each account and batch has earned back and how many days remain to break even.

Q: How is the "earned back" amount calculated for account payback?
A: For account payback, Star Captain totals the platform commission and estimated off-platform commission generated by that account's orders, converts the total into CNY, and compares it against the account's "Recorded cost (CNY)".

Q: If an account changes operators, is the recorded cost counted twice?
A: No. The cost stays with the account. When you change the operator on the "Accounts" page, both the recorded cost and historical earnings remain tied to that account and are never double-counted.

Q: Are banned accounts still included in the total recorded cost?
A: Yes. As long as a banned account has a recorded cost, its cost stays in the batch total and company total under the "Banned" card so your batch return numbers reflect the real spend.

Q: Can staff see recorded costs and payback numbers?
A: No. Staff only see the accounts they operate, while cost and profit data are only visible to the team owner by default.

## How to Add Team Members, Set Up Logins, and Assign Roles
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/add-members-and-roles?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can add team members: open "Team → Members", click "Manage groups" to set up your departments or teams, click "Add member" to fill in the member's name, group, login, initial password, and role ("Operator", "Business", "Team lead", etc.), click "Copy message for WeChat" to send their sign-in details, and use "Roles" to fine-tune whose data they can see and which features they can use.

Q: How do employees sign in to Star Captain? Does it work on mobile?
A: Employees sign in using the "Login" and "Initial password" you generated for them. The same credentials work on desktop browsers, mobile web, and the WeChat mini program.

Q: What is the difference between Operator, Business, and Team lead roles?
A: "Operator" focuses on editing, posting videos, and checking orders on their own assigned accounts. "Business" unlocks "Collect from brands" ("Merchant billing") to manage partner brands, shop commission rates, account inventory, and statements. "Team lead" sees their own team's data by default and can assign products, review submitted videos, and approve attendance requests for their team.

Q: If an employee leaves or I deactivate their login, do we lose their TikTok accounts or past orders?
A: No. Clicking "Set as former" or "Deactivate (recommended)" in their detail drawer turns off their login and moves them to "Former members". All TikTok accounts, historical orders, and video review records stay intact, and you can reassign their accounts to another team member on the "Accounts" page.

Q: Can I hide off-platform commissions and company costs from regular operators?
A: Yes. Company expenses and net profit are restricted to the agency owner by default. For order commissions, open "Roles", edit the operator role, and set "Commission display" to "No commission" or "Partial commission".

## How Staff Clock In and How to Track Attendance
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/staff-clock-in-and-attendance?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can set up how staff clock in and track attendance: open "Team → Attendance" and click "Attendance rules" to turn on attendance, pick a schedule preset with work hours, late deductions, and days off, save your clock-in area and missed-punch rules, have staff click "Clock in" and "Clock out" under "Me", and review requests and the "Monthly" summary under "Team → Attendance".

Q: Can staff still clock in when shooting videos outside the office?
A: Yes, if you allow it in "Attendance rules → Advanced rules → Clock-in area". Check the option "When outside the office location or network, allow clock-in and mark as 'Off-site'" so staff on location shoots can still punch in while managers see the off-site tag.

Q: Our team gets 4 flexible days off per month instead of fixed weekends. How do we set that up?
A: In "Attendance rules", set "Days off" to "Flexible days off" and enter "Each person gets … days off a month" (for example, 4). Staff can click "Request comp time" under "Me" to pick their rest days, and once approved, those dates count as scheduled days off rather than absences.

Q: If an employee forgets to clock out, can a manager fix it directly without waiting for a request?
A: Yes. On the "Today" list or the monthly calendar under "Team → Attendance", click "Adjust" next to the employee's record to enter their "Clock in" and "Clock out" times, update their status, and save a note.

Q: How do monthly attendance numbers flow into payroll?
A: Once attendance rules are turned on, days present, leave days, and late/early deductions are tallied automatically. At the end of the month, go to "Ledger → Payroll" and click "Generate from Team clock-ins" to prorate base pay and apply attendance deductions in one click.

## How to Record Expenses and Track Monthly Profit
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/record-expenses-and-monthly-profit?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can record expenses and track monthly profit: open "Ledger → Expenses" to check the costs synced automatically from your accounts, devices, networks, and AI tools, click "Add entry" to log rent, ads, or shipping and pick how they are split, verify amortization days under "Ledger → Settings", and open "Ledger → Overview" to see monthly revenue, cost breakdown, team rankings, and daily profit.

Q: Where do I edit synced device, network, or AI tool costs?
A: Device purchase prices, network monthly fees, and AI tool costs come from "Accounts → Devices & networks", while account costs come from your account records. Edit them on those source pages so your asset list and ledger stay in sync. If you want to exclude an entire synced category from profit calculations, uncheck it under "Ledger → Settings → How costs work".

Q: Is profit calculated when orders are placed or when partner brands pay out?
A: Profit is calculated as orders come in, using your partner brand commission rules and exchange rates minus that period's costs. That way you can see daily operating profit without waiting weeks for bank transfers. Actual payouts are tracked separately under "Ledger → Collect from brands → Reconcile".

Q: How are company-wide expenses like office rent split across teams?
A: When you set "Charged to" to "Whole company (split across teams by account count)", the ledger divides the expense across teams and staff in proportion to the number of TikTok accounts each team manages.

Q: Can regular operators see company expenses and monthly profit?
A: No. The expense ledger, payroll totals, and net profit are visible only to the agency owner by default. Regular operators and editors cannot view company cost or profit pages.

## How to Set Up Payroll and Generate Payslips in One Click
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/set-payroll-and-payslip?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can set up payroll and generate payslips: open "Ledger → Payroll", click "New position" to set base pay, commission tiers, and attendance bonuses, assign staff to positions or configure custom and team commissions, click "Generate from Team clock-ins" to pull in monthly attendance and late deductions, inspect the commission breakdown and add one-off bonuses, and click "Confirm payroll" to freeze amounts before marking them paid.

Q: How are employee commissions linked to TikTok orders?
A: Star Captain totals the monthly commissions (platform commissions plus off-platform commissions from partner brands, converted to CNY) from every TikTok account assigned to that employee, then multiplies the total by their position or custom commission rate—no manual order exports needed.

Q: How do we deduct account and device costs before calculating commission?
A: Open "Edit pay for …" on the employee's row (or enable the global rule under "Ledger → Settings → Payroll rules") and check "Deduct their account costs before commission". The system subtracts the account setup, device, and network costs tied to that employee's accounts before multiplying by their commission rate.

Q: Can employees see other people's salaries once payroll is confirmed?
A: No. Confirming payroll only unlocks each employee's own payslip under "Me → My pay", showing their own base pay, commission breakdown, bonuses, and attendance deductions. They cannot see anyone else's pay or company totals.

Q: Where do I change our payday date or standard monthly workdays?
A: Open "Ledger → Settings" and check the "Payroll rules" section. There you can set "When payroll is paid" ("One month behind" or "Same month") and "Payday" (for example, the 10th of next month), toggle "Prorate base pay by attendance", and set "Workdays per month" (such as 22 or 26 days).

## How to Tear Down a Viral TikTok Video
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/teardown-viral-tiktok-video?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can tear down a viral TikTok video: open "Tools → Viral teardown" (or "Me → Viral teardown"), paste a TikTok video link or share text and click "Tear down", wait 1–3 minutes while the system captures frames and translates the script, review "Why it sells" and the "First 3 sec" hook, inspect the "Shot by shot" frames with bilingual lines and edit tips, and use "Shoot it yourself (3 steps)" or click "Copy all" to hand the script to your editors.

Q: Can I paste the full share text copied from the TikTok mobile app?
A: Yes. You don't need to strip out the caption or hashtags first—paste the entire share text into the box and Star Captain will extract the TikTok URL automatically.

Q: What is the difference between pasting a TikTok link and uploading a local file?
A: Pasting a TikTok link downloads the video, captures stills every second, and uses AI to analyze both visuals and audio—giving you a "Shot by shot" storyboard with frame images, camera angles, and visual proof analysis. Clicking "No link? Upload a video file (transcript only)" analyzes the audio track to produce an original "Transcript", "Translation", and transcript-based "Structure" (hook, body, and call to action) without video frames.

Q: Do teammates need to rerun a video that someone in our agency already tore down?
A: No. Your agency's recent teardowns are saved under "Recent teardowns" at the bottom of the page. Any teammate with access can click an existing record to view the full breakdown immediately.

Q: What if I see "This tool isn't enabled for your role"?
A: Ask your agency owner or admin to open "Team → Members → Roles" (or "Team → Permissions") and enable the viral teardown tool under "Features" for your role or account.

## How to Register Devices and Networks and Get Expiry Reminders
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/register-devices-and-networks?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, register devices and networks: open "Accounts → Devices & networks", record work equipment by purpose, custodian and purchase cost, log network subscription fees and expiry dates, add AI tool subscriptions, then review "Due in 7 days" and record renewals. Check that costs reach the ledger. Equipment assignments follow workload and responsibility, not an account-per-phone configuration.

Q: Are network QR codes, connection keys, and AI tool passwords stored securely?
A: Yes. Passwords and connection keys are stored encrypted and are never displayed in plain text on the page. Network QR codes are only visible to team members whose role has access to the "Devices & networks" page.

Q: Does clicking "Record renewal" charge my card or renew the network line automatically?
A: No. As noted in the modal ("Records the expiry date and monthly fee only. No payment or auto-renewal"), you complete the payment with your network provider first and then use "Record renewal" in Star Captain to update the expiry date and monthly fee.

Q: How does Star Captain know how many TikTok accounts are linked to a network?
A: Whenever you link a phone to both a "Main account" and a "Network" under "Devices" (or pick a "Linked account" directly on the network), the system automatically counts and displays the linked accounts in the "Linked accounts" column.

Q: If I delete a device or network record, will it delete the linked TikTok account?
A: No. Deleting a device or network only removes that asset record—your authorized TikTok account and its orders remain untouched, and the account simply stops showing that device or network link.

## How to Find Products in Product Picks
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/find-products-in-selection-center?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can find products in Product Picks: open "Product picks" to review the top "Today" overview and "For you today", switch to "Best sellers" to sort by "Units sold", "Match score", or "Growth" and use the "Filter" popover, open the right-hand product detail pane to check "Why we picked it", "How to shoot this product", and "Can you list it?", click "☆ Save" or "Not a fit" to organize candidates, and click "Assign to staff" to send a shooting task.

Q: How does "Can you list it?" know whether our accounts can add the product link?
A: It compares the shop's rating and TikTok listing requirements against the follower counts of the TikTok accounts connected in your workspace, then shows how many of your accounts can list the product right now.

Q: Can other teammates see the products I save with "☆ Save"?
A: Yes. "Mine" → "Saved" in the left sidebar (titled "My saves", marked "Products your team saved; everyone can see them") is shared across your organization, so any product saved by an owner, manager, or product researcher is visible to operators and editors.

Q: What if I mark a product as "Not a fit" by mistake?
A: Open "Mine" → "Not a fit" in the left sidebar, click the product to open its detail pane on the right, and click "Recommend again" at the bottom. It will return to your recommendations and charts immediately.

Q: Can I tear down or iterate a viral video script right inside a product's details?
A: Yes. In the product drawer's "How to shoot this product" card, you can review the storyboard points, click "Iterate this script" to generate a rewritten version on the spot, or click "Full teardown ›"; if the product's top viral video hasn't been torn down yet, click "Tear down this one" right in the card.

## How to Issue Statements and Record Brand Payments
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/issue-statements-and-record-payments?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can issue statements and record brand payments: set each brand's settlement cycle and initial/final payment split in "Ledger → Collect from brands → Settings", select the brand and date range in "Reconcile" to issue a statement, align any discrepancies under "Adjustments & differences", click "＋ Record payment" when funds arrive, and follow up on red "Overdue" alerts in the "To do" bar.

Q: One partner brand has multiple TikTok Shops, and one shop needs its own separate statement. How do I set that up?
A: In "Collect from brands · Settings" (or in the shop's edit dialog under "Partner brands & shops"), mark that specific shop as "Settle this shop separately" ("Settled separately"). Next time you create a statement in "Reconcile", you can pick that shop on its own under "Statement scope", while the remaining shops continue to bill together.

Q: Can I log a partial payment if the brand pays less than the full initial payment?
A: Yes. Every time you click "＋ Record payment", Star Captain adds a payment entry under "Payments", sums what has been collected so far, and updates the remaining balance until the full amount is paid or you choose "Settle at the amount received".

Q: What if I typed the wrong amount when recording a payment?
A: Expand "Payments" on the statement card, delete the incorrect payment line, and click "＋ Record payment" again to enter the right numbers.

Q: Do I need to re-enter these payments manually in "Ledger → Overview"?
A: No. Commission receivable and recorded payments from "Collect from brands" flow into "Ledger → Overview" ("Profit overview") automatically, so you never have to log income twice.

## How to Bulk Import Accounts to Inventory in Star Captain
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/bulk-import-accounts-to-inventory?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can bulk import accounts to inventory: open "Accounts → Inventory" and click "Bulk import", paste account details under "1 · Paste the account details" to parse each account into the table, fill in group, source, unit cost, and onboarding date under "2 · Same for this batch" and click "Save to inventory", then assign accounts from "Unassigned" or backfill older accounts with "Add missed accounts".

Q: After entering "Cost each (¥)" here, do I also need to log an expense in "Ledger → Expenses"?
A: No. Once a team member authorizes the account in Star Captain, the recorded cost you entered in "Account inventory" links to that TikTok account automatically and flows into "Ledger → Overview" and "Account payback" without double counting.

Q: Does my operator need an external authenticator app to use the 2FA key?
A: No. When you save the secret string in the "2FA key" column, Star Captain generates the live 6-digit "2FA code" right next to the password and refreshes it every 30 seconds, so staff can copy it in one click.

Q: Can I see who viewed an account's password after it is imported or assigned?
A: Yes. Passwords and 2FA keys are stored encrypted, and every time an owner, business lead, or assigned operator views them, Star Captain records the viewer and timestamp in the "View log" inside the account's details.

Q: What if I need to register more than 50 accounts in a single day?
A: Each "Bulk import" submission saves up to 50 accounts at a time. Save the first 50, then click "Bulk import" again for the rest—as long as they share the same "Added on" date, they will roll up into the same daily batch automatically.

## How to Set Up Departments and Team Leads in Star Captain
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/set-up-departments-and-team-leads?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can set up departments and team leads: click "Manage groups" in "Team → Members" to create top-level departments and subgroups, select each group's "Lead" and click "Save", move teammates into their groups in bulk, verify the "Team lead" scope ("Own team" / "Manages team") in "Permissions", and let leads log in to manage only their own group.

Q: To promote an operator to team lead, should I change their role or set them as the group's "Lead"?
A: Set them as the group's "Lead" inside "Manage groups". Whoever leads a group becomes its "Team lead" automatically—so once you save the group, their role and management scope update on their own.

Q: Why wasn't a team lead moved when I used "Bulk actions → Move"?
A: Because they are still set as the "Lead" of their current group ("still lead a group. Change the lead in group settings first"). Open "Manage groups", change that group's "Lead" to the new lead (or "None for now"), click "Save", and then move them.

Q: If I delete a subgroup, what happens to the members inside it?
A: Nothing is lost. When you click "Delete" on a group that has members in "Manage groups", Star Captain asks "Move N people to which group?" so you can pick a destination group before saving. All their accounts, orders, and history stay intact.

Q: Can I let one specific team lead access "Product picks" without changing the default for all team leads?
A: Yes. In "Team → Permissions", switch "View by" to "By person", find that team lead's row, and click the "Product picks" cell to turn it "On" (marked with a blue dot for "Customized"). Their data scope for "Accounts" and "Orders" will still stay restricted to "Own team".

## How to Ask Star Captain Assistant About Your Data
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/ask-star-captain-assistant?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can ask Star Captain Assistant: click "Ask Star Captain" in the top bar (or press `Ctrl+K`), ask a question like "Which account had the most orders yesterday?" to get live numbers, tell the assistant to reassign accounts or tasks and click "Confirm", upload a spreadsheet via "Help me check a statement" to reconcile orders, or use the bottom skill shortcuts to tear down videos and write scripts.

Q: Can a regular operator ask the assistant for company-wide profit or other people's orders?
A: No. The assistant enforces the exact same role and data-access rules as the rest of the workspace: operators only see their own accounts and tasks, team leads only see their own group, and only agency owners or authorized admins can query company-wide profit and full-team rankings.

Q: What if the assistant misunderstands who I want to reassign an account or task to?
A: It will never apply a change without your approval. Every write action pauses at a "Should I do this?" preview card showing the target member, account, or task details—just click "Cancel" if anything looks off.

Q: Does a brand's Excel sheet need to follow a strict template before I drag it in?
A: No. The assistant automatically detects standard order ID and commission/settlement amount columns in `.xlsx`, `.xls`, and `.csv` files (up to 5 MB per file).

Q: Are my past chats saved if I close the drawer or refresh the page?
A: Yes. Every conversation is saved under "History" at the top right of the drawer, so you can reopen past answers or delete old threads whenever you like.

## Star Captain Notification Settings: Bell, Spike Alerts & WeChat Push
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/manage-notifications-and-alerts?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Star Captain notification settings take 5 steps: click the top-bar bell and flame icons to check categorized messages and sales spikes, set your order threshold in "Spike alert settings", toggle "Morning brief and alerts" for product and account changes, click "Link Official Account" under "Send spikes to WeChat" with "Quiet hours", or use "Team → Announce" to send team notices and track who read them.

Q: Our agency gets dozens of orders an hour and the spike alerts fire too often. How do we quiet them down?
A: To fine-tune your notifications and alerts, have the agency owner raise the "Spike threshold" in "Spike alert settings", or set a personal "Daily push limit" under your WeChat push settings. Once your daily push limit is reached, WeChat pushes pause for the rest of the day while in-app messages continue as normal.

Q: Why did my WeChat spike alerts stop arriving after I linked my account?
A: If you unfollowed the Official Account in WeChat, the status row will note `You unfollowed in WeChat. Link again to get alerts`. Click "Link again" and scan the QR code with WeChat to restore mobile pushes.

Q: Can any staff member change the "Spike threshold" for the agency?
A: No. The "Spike threshold" is shared across the organization and set by the owner. However, every member can control their own "Show spikes on Home" switch, link their own WeChat, and set their own "Quiet hours" and "Daily push limit".

Q: Can I recall a team notice after sending it?
A: Yes. Open "Team → Announce", switch to the "Sent" tab, open the notice, and click "Recall this notice". Once recalled, it is removed immediately from everyone's desktop bell drawer and mini program.

## How to Filter and Export Live Orders by Traffic Source and Refund Status
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/filter-and-export-live-orders?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can filter and export live orders: open "Orders" and switch between "Live sales", "By product", and "Refunds", filter by "Traffic" to separate organic and paid orders, filter by "Order status" to inspect refunds or cancellations, use "More filters" to narrow by department or operator, and click "Export orders" to download a 4-sheet Excel file.

Q: Which time zone do order dates and order times use?
A: US orders are grouped by fixed US date (`GMT-8`, where the day turns at 16:00 Beijing time, matching the TikTok app), while Mexico uses `GMT-6` and Brazil uses `GMT-3`. You can display individual order timestamps in either US time (`GMT-8`) or Beijing time (`GMT+8`).

Q: What sheets are included in the exported Excel file?
A: Every exported Excel workbook contains 4 sheets: notes, itemized orders, account summary, and team summary (broken down by `department → group → subgroup → staff`), including traffic attribution and after-sales fields.

Q: Why didn't a paid order use our paid commission rate?
A: Paid orders use a separate paid commission rate only when the shop has its own paid rate configured and "Separate commission for paid orders" is turned on in your brand settlement settings; otherwise, the standard product or shop rate applies.

Q: How long are background Excel exports kept in "Export history"?
A: Background exports usually finish in under a minute and remain available to download in "Export history" for 24 hours, along with who ran the export and the filter scope. After 24 hours, simply run a new export.

## How to Analyze Account Performance and Health in Account Analytics
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/analyze-account-performance-and-health?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can analyze account performance and health: open "Accounts → Account analytics" to check the "Account overview" cards, review "Needs attention" for newly banned accounts, repeated link removals, and outdated data, switch to "Account rankings" for top-selling and fastest-growing accounts, check "Staff performance" by operator, and sort "Account details" by the 100-point score.

Q: How is the 100-point "Score" calculated in Account details?
A: It totals four 30-day components out of 100: "Activity 30" (full marks at 12 videos in 30 days, or 3 per week), "Traffic 30" (full marks when median video views reach 5× the viral threshold), "Viral 20" (7 points per viral video, full marks at 3), and "Sales 20" (full marks at 50 orders). Grades are S (≥ 85), A (≥ 70), B (≥ 55), C (≥ 40), and D (< 40), with showcase-banned accounts capped at 39.

Q: What is the difference between "Idle accounts" and "Stale data"?
A: "Idle accounts" have fresh data synced within the last 3 days, meaning we know for sure the operator hasn't posted any new videos in the selected period. "Stale data" means the account hasn't synced for over 3 days, so you should click "Refresh" to pull its latest videos before judging output.

Q: What does "Repeated link removals" mean under "Needs attention"?
A: It flags an active account where multiple recent shoppable videos had a confirmed product link when posted but subsequently lost their product links—usually because the product was delisted, ran out of stock, or had its link invalidated.

Q: How often do video views refresh in Account analytics?
A: Views refresh automatically every day at 9:00 AM Beijing time for all active accounts, and accounts with recent sales or rising views refresh more frequently during the day. You can also click "Refresh" manually anytime.

## How to Analyze Videos and Product Links and Spot Throttling
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/analyze-videos-and-product-links?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can analyze videos and product links in Star Captain: open "Account analytics → Video results" and switch between "Most views", "Most orders", "Link removed", and "Throttled", filter videos by "Title or keyword", "Product ID", and "Product link" status, check "Link removed" and "Possibly throttled" badges on video cards, open "Video details" to inspect "Product impression rate", "Product CTR", and "Completion rate", and open "Understand this account" for 30-day traffic and product insights.

Q: How does Star Captain detect "Link removed" on a video?
A: When you analyze videos and product links, a video is marked "Link removed" only when an earlier sync confirmed it had an active product link and a subsequent sync found the link missing. Videos on banned accounts are excluded ("Videos from banned accounts don't count as link removed") so you don't chase false alarms.

Q: Is "Possibly throttled" an official penalty notice from TikTok?
A: No—it is Star Captain's early-warning estimate based on how many hours the video has been live versus its view count at refresh. When you see "Possibly throttled", open the video in TikTok to check for any violation notices, and if several videos in a row on the same account stall, pivot your content angle before posting again.

Q: Why does an account show "{n} account orders · not credited to a video"?
A: Sometimes TikTok returns account-level orders without specifying which video drove the sale. Star Captain keeps those orders in the account's total and labels them "{n} account orders · not credited to a video" rather than guessing which video made the sale.

Q: Can I re-attach a product link to a video marked "Product link expired"?
A: Once a published TikTok video's product link expires or is removed, TikTok does not allow re-attaching a new link to that same post. Follow the prompt in "Star Captain insights" and publish a new video featuring the product or a replacement store link.

## How to Use Personal Center for Daily Work, Tasks, and Payslips
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/use-personal-center-for-daily-work?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, staff can use Personal Center for daily work: open "Me" to check your clock-in status in "My day" and click "Completed +1" or "Log publication", switch to "My tasks" to follow the "Claim", "Edit", "Submit video", and "Review approved" progress bar or click "Mark done" or "Report done", click "Request account" under "My accounts" when you need new accounts, open "View login details" under "Accounts received" to sign in and authorize, and check "My pay" for confirmed monthly payslips.

Q: What if I see "Your login isn't linked to a staff member yet, so you can't clock in or log work. Ask your owner to link you in Team → Members."?
A: Before you can use Personal Center for daily work, your login account must be connected to a staff row on the team roster. Ask your organization owner or admin to open "Team" → "Members" and link your login to your staff name—once linked, clock-in, tasks, and post logging unlock immediately.

Q: Are password views under "Accounts received" logged?
A: Yes. Login details are stored encrypted, and only the requester, business team, and agency owner can click "View login details". Every view is logged with the viewer's name and timestamp, and you can reopen the card later whenever you need to sign in again or read a 2FA code.

Q: How long are video files kept under "Approved videos"?
A: Approved video files remain on the server for the retention window shown on the card ("Video kept for {n} days") and are then cleaned up automatically to save storage. Download any final cuts you want to archive locally; all written feedback and task records stay permanently.

Q: Why does my pay section say "No pay slips yet"?
A: Monthly payslips become visible to staff only after your manager reviews and confirms the payroll sheet in "Ledger" → "Payroll". Unconfirmed draft sheets are not shown to employees.

## How to Manage Saved Picks and Viral Videos for Teardown
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/manage-saved-picks-and-viral-videos?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can manage saved picks and viral videos: click "☆ Save" in "Product picks" and review your team-shared shortlist under "Mine" → "Saved", open "Not a fit" to exclude unwanted products or click "Recommend again" in the detail pane, switch to "Boards" → "Viral videos" to use the top filter bar for "Match", "Type", "Period", and quick "Sort", open the "Filter" popover for full Sort options, "Source", "Account type", and "Only show", and click any video for "Video analysis" and "Script to remix" or click "Tear down".

Q: Is "My saves" private to my login or shared across the team?
A: It is shared across your entire organization ("Products your team saved; everyone can see them"). When a product researcher or manager clicks "☆ Save", operators, editors, and team leads can all open "Mine" → "Saved" in the left sidebar to see the same shortlist.

Q: How does Star Captain tell "Real" apart from "AI" videos?
A: Star Captain classifies shoppable videos so you can toggle "Type" between "AI", "Real", and "All" on the top filter bar, and also tags products as "Mostly real" or "Mostly AI" so hands-on filming teams and AI editing teams can each filter for references they can produce.

Q: What accounts are included under the "Rivals" source filter?
A: In the "Filter" popover, "Rivals" under "Source" filters for shoppable videos posted by other creator agencies and matrix accounts on US TikTok Shop (as opposed to official brand storefronts). Combining "Rivals" with "24 hours" or "3 days" shows what peer teams just launched and scaled.

Q: Where can I find videos we have already torn down?
A: Open the "Filter" popover on "Viral videos" and set "Only show" to "Torn down", or click "Tools" → "Video breakdowns" in the left navigation. Every transcript, translation, and storyboard brief is saved in your history so the team can reuse it anytime.

## How to Assign Products and Review Videos Frame by Frame
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/assign-products-and-review-videos?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can assign products and review videos in Star Captain: paste a TikTok product link into "Team → Product library" and click "Add to library", attach "Affiliate links", a "Showcase QR code", and "Viral references", select products and click "Assign tasks" to send to specific people or the "Task pool", track the 5-column task board, and click "Review" on submitted cuts to leave frame-specific feedback.

Q: What is the difference between "Loose (auto-check)" and "Strict (claim + submit)"?
A: When you assign products and review videos, "Loose (auto-check)" counts an assigned task as claimed automatically, and whenever the employee logs a published post for that product, it counts toward the task's completion target. Under "Strict (claim + submit)", the employee must click "Claim task", upload the edited video via "Submit video", and pass a lead's review before it counts as done.

Q: How does "Upload QR codes" match a batch of QR code images to products?
A: Name each QR image file with the product's ID or product name (for example, `1729384756102938475.png` or `silicone-sink-strainer.jpg`) and drag the batch into "Upload QR codes". Star Captain matches them automatically ("Matched by product ID" or "Matched by product name"), lets you manually pick a product for any unmatched file, and saves the whole batch in one click.

Q: What happens when I check "Tear down viral references when assigning"?
A: Every viral reference video attached to the task's products is automatically torn down into a structured script brief, original transcript, and translation right inside the task details so editors can read it immediately. Reference videos that were already torn down are reused without counting again.

Q: If a product is delisted mid-campaign and I click "End task", do completed videos still count?
A: Yes. Ending a task moves it to "Ended" with the rule "The {n} videos done so far all count; the rest are no longer needed", preserving all completed post logs and video submissions for your staff.

## How to Log Published Videos and Check Productivity
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/log-published-videos-and-check-productivity?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can log published videos and check productivity: open "Team → Post log" and click "Log posts", log "One account" with the date, account, and task products, or switch to "Bulk log" to submit multiple products and accounts at once, check the five summary cards in "Post log" for "Matched", "Short", and "Extra", and switch to "Team → Productivity" to compare "Today", "This week", or "This month" "Orders", "Profit / loss", and "ROI" across staff and accounts.

Q: Why does a log I just submitted say "Videos not synced to this day yet"?
A: Star Captain refreshes the account automatically about 15 minutes after logging and on scheduled daily syncs. Moreover, "Matched", "Short", or "Extra" is only decided once the account's videos have refreshed past midnight of that day (Beijing time) so evening posts aren't prematurely marked short. You can also refresh manually on the "Accounts" page.

Q: If I already reported a product in a task, will logging posts count it twice?
A: No. When you log posts for yourself, task products with unlogged completions appear at the top and let you check "Already reported". Keeping it checked records the account in "Post log" without counting toward task progress a second time.

Q: Why can "Actually posted" in Post log differ from "Videos posted" in Productivity?
A: They use different scopes. "Post log" only checks videos posted on the logged Beijing date by accounts that staff logged. "Productivity" counts all new videos posted across every account assigned to each member over the selected period ("Today", "This week" through yesterday, or "This month")—logged or not—alongside shoppable video counts, orders, output, and ROI.

Q: Can staff log how many videos an account posted without picking products?
A: Yes. Both "One account" and "Bulk log" display "You can skip products and just log the count", letting staff record total videos posted per account even when a video has no product link.

## How to Read and Share Team Daily Reports and Weekly Summaries
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/read-and-share-team-daily-reports?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can read and share team daily reports: open "Team → Daily report" and pick "Yesterday", "Day before", "This week", or "Last week", review "At a glance" and "Overview" for gross profit, orders, editing, and link removals, check "Highlights" and "Account sources" to compare source payback, clear action items under "Needs attention", and click "Copy all" or "Share" to create a view-only link "Without profit" or "With profit".

Q: Why does the report say "the US day isn't over; the full report comes out at 4:30 PM Beijing time"?
A: Orders and gross profit are counted by US date (`GMT-8`, where the day ends at 16:00 Beijing time). Star Captain compiles the complete prior-day report at 4:30 PM Beijing time; before that cutoff, US order and profit numbers may still rise, while Beijing-time editing, posting, and attendance counts are already final.

Q: What does "Incomplete" next to "Gross profit" mean?
A: If some accounts are missing a recorded cost or onboarding date, active staff have no pay configured, or monthly rent and ad spend haven't been logged yet, the report flags "Incomplete: ..." and warns that gross profit reads high. Click "Fix" to fill in the missing records.

Q: How does a department lead's report differ from the owner's report?
A: Owners see the "Whole company" report including gross profit, revenue, cost, and account source payback. Department leads see only "Your departments", and company-wide profit and cost figures are automatically excluded.

Q: Can someone with a shared report link browse other days or workspace pages?
A: No. "No login needed. They can see this day only, nothing else. The link works for 30 days." If you select "Without profit" when creating the link, profit and cost lines are completely omitted from the shared page.

## How to Set Daily Targets and Department Statuses in Live Office
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/set-daily-targets-and-department-statuses?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can set daily targets and department statuses: open "Team" and click "Office settings" (or "Set targets"), configure "Group / role default targets" under "Daily targets", adjust individual targets for "Today only" or "From today on", set each department's statuses and counting unit ("videos", "product picks", "brands") under "Department statuses", and arrange seats and templates under "Seating" and "Look".

Q: Which target wins when a staff member has both a role default and a group default?
A: Star Captain applies the most specific rule in this exact order: `Today only > Set individually > Group default (closest level) > Role default > Company-wide target`. If the staff member sets their own "My personal target" higher than their manager's target, the higher of the two counts.

Q: How do we track daily output for product pickers or BD staff who don't edit videos?
A: In "Office settings → Department statuses", find their department and change "Count in" from "videos" to "product picks", "brands", "orders", or a custom unit. Staff in that department will then see `Finish 1 product pick +1` on their progress button.

Q: What happens if we turn off "In live office" for an admin or finance department?
A: "This department stays out of the office and today's progress. Attendance and daily reports still count; they're left out of the editing completion rate."

Q: Which office template works best once our team passes 25 people?
A: When many people are clocked in at once, 3D templates can feel crowded. Switch to "Simple floor plan" under "Office settings → Look" for a clean top-down seat map, and use the "Zoom in", "Zoom out", "Reset", and "Full screen" controls at the top right of the office canvas.

## How to Handle Team Inbox and Approvals in the For Me Panel
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/handle-team-inbox-and-approvals?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, leads can handle team inbox and approvals: open "Team" and check the categorized "For me" inbox, click "Account requests" to "Approve" or "Decline" showcase account applications, handle missed-punch and leave requests under "Attendance requests", reply with screenshots or "Forward up" under "Staff questions" and "Mark resolved", and extend or reassign "Overdue tasks".

Q: What happens after a team lead clicks "Approve" on an account request?
A: When leads handle team inbox and approvals and click "Approve", Star Captain records the approval and notifies the business/inventory admin (`Approved. The business team gets a reminder to issue it`) so they can assign a specific showcase account from "Accounts → Inventory".

Q: Who receives a staff question when a team lead clicks "Forward up"?
A: Clicking "Forward up" attaches a "Forwarded" tag along with the original question timestamp and routes the thread into the upper department manager's or organization admin's "For me → Staff questions" queue.

Q: How many screenshots can we attach when reporting or replying to an issue?
A: Both staff members and reviewers can upload or paste (`Ctrl+V`) up to 6 screenshots per message (`Up to 6 screenshots`), making it easy to share phone error screens, order IDs, and product links in one reply.

Q: If I cancel an overdue task, does it delete the posts staff already logged?
A: No. Canceling a task for one person or for everyone stops overdue reminders and removes the remaining quota, while all previously logged posts stay intact. Whole tasks that were canceled can also be reopened under `By task → Ended`.

## How to Inspect Single Account Conversion and Works in Detail
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/inspect-single-account-conversion-and-works?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 5 steps, you can inspect single account conversion and works: open a showcase account's detail page from "Accounts", check the top health badges and toggle "Pin" or "Monitor", inspect the right-column "Sales conversion" funnel ("Product impressions", "CTR", "Conversion rate") and "View distribution", compare "Avg views per video" against "Median views (all videos)" on the "Data" tab, and filter works by link status, title prefix, or product ID.

Q: Why is "Median views (all videos)" more reliable than "Avg views per video"?
A: When you inspect single account conversion and works, one viral video with 500,000 views will make a 30-video account's average look high even if its last 10 uploads got 300 views each. "Median views (all videos)" filters out that single spike so you can see the account's everyday baseline.

Q: What does the "Monitor" button at the top right do?
A: Accounts that stop posting new videos for a long time are normally skipped during routine bulk refreshes. Turning on "Monitor" ("Monitoring") keeps the account in every bulk refresh—ideal for older accounts whose past viral videos are still generating long-tail orders.

Q: What does "Videos with data outside the video library: N" at the bottom of the list mean?
A: "The video library keeps about the latest 30. These come from Creator Center (last 7 days) and TikTok official sales, sorted by sales." That ensures older evergreen videos that are still selling never get hidden outside the 30-video window.

Q: How can I filter videos made by a specific editor on a shared account?
A: If editors include a short prefix or code in their video titles (such as `zy10.27`), type that prefix into "Title or keyword". The list immediately filters to `{n} of {total} videos` matching that prefix along with their views, engagement, and sales.

## How to Read the Money Ledger Overview for Brand Collections and Payback
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/read-money-ledger-overview?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 4 steps, you can read the money ledger overview: open "Ledger" → "Overview" (`/app/money`) and toggle "This month" and "Last month" while clearing top "To do" pills, read the one-line summary and the two breakdown bars ("Earned · received or not" and "Earned · where it went, what's left"), check each brand's 4-stage billing progress under "Collect from brands", and inspect top cost categories and payback progress under "Where it went" and "Did accounts pay back?".

Q: Why is "Outstanding" in the money ledger overview sometimes larger than this month's earnings?
A: In the money ledger overview, "Outstanding" shows all unpaid partner brand balances across all periods ("Outstanding includes earlier months"), so unpaid final installments from earlier months remain visible until collected.

Q: Why does a note under the second bar say "Payroll is visible to the owner only, so it isn't deducted here"?
A: Staff payroll is restricted to the agency owner. When finance leads or team managers view `/app/money`, the second bar deducts operating "Expenses" only and notes that payroll is excluded from their view.

Q: Why does "Did accounts pay back?" say " · {count} accounts unpriced; add prices for accuracy"?
A: Only accounts with a recorded recorded cost are included in the payback denominator. Click the top `without a recorded cost · Fill in` pill or "See each account" to backfill missing recorded costs.

Q: What are the four types of "To do" pills at the top of the money ledger overview and where do they link?
A: Whenever items need action, the top of `/app/money` shows up to four pill shortcuts: `{count} statements to reconcile · Reconcile` (jumps to "Collect from brands" → "Reconcile"), `{count} overdue · Record` (jumps to overdue statements to record payment), `{count} accounts without a recorded cost · Fill in` (jumps to "Account payback" to enter recorded costs), and `{month} payroll not paid · Pay` (jumps to "Payroll" to confirm and mark payroll paid).

## How to Restore Deleted Accounts and Check the Team Activity Audit Log
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/restore-deleted-accounts-and-check-audit-log?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 4 steps, you can restore deleted accounts and check the audit log: open "Accounts → Recently deleted" (`/app/accounts/trash`) to view accounts deleted within the last 30 days, search by account or operator and click "Restore" or "Restore selected", then open "Team → Members → Activity log" (`/app/team/audit`) to inspect chronological changes by date, and use "Search name, shop, account" to pinpoint who made a specific change and when.

Q: Why does deleting an account show a warning saying "This account had N orders in the last 7 days"?
A: Before removing an account, Star Captain checks whether the account generated orders in the past 7 days or is actively syncing, reminding you that "Orders stop syncing once it's deleted" and that you can restore deleted accounts from "Recently deleted" within 30 days.

Q: What happens if someone re-scans the authorization QR code for a deleted TikTok account without clicking "Restore" first?
A: Scanning to authorize a deleted TikTok account automatically restores it from "Recently deleted" and reconnects its historical orders and videos.

Q: Why doesn't the Activity Log show routine background order syncs?
A: Routine automated syncs and background migrations are hidden on purpose (`Automatic system migrations are hidden`) so admins can focus on human-initiated changes to accounts, permissions, and settings.

Q: Can regular operators view the Activity Log or recover accounts on their own?
A: No. "Team → Members → Activity log" is restricted to admins and leads with member-management permissions. To recover accounts from "Recently deleted", your role must have account-management access and your organization must have an open account slot.

## How to Check Daily Profit and Team Profit Ranking in Star Captain
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/check-daily-and-team-profit-breakdown?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 4 steps, you can check daily profit and team profit ranking in Star Captain: open "Ledger → Profit overview" (`/app/profit`), switch the period between "Today", "Last 7 days", "This month", or "Last month", inspect "Where the money went" and "Daily profit" calendar or bars, and review "Most profitable teams" alongside "See profit or loss by account".

Q: Why are some days red in "Daily profit" with a note saying "usually because account setup costs were recorded that day"?
A: When you check daily profit and team profit ranking, account costs are counted in full on the onboarding date on the daily calendar, which can create a single-day loss. One-time operating expenses are spread evenly across the month by default, or you can change that under `Settings → How costs work → One-time expenses`.

Q: How is "ROI" calculated when I click a team in "Most profitable teams"?
A: As the tooltip explains: `ROI = earned ÷ the recorded cost of their accounts (the share for this period, per settings). Excludes devices, network, rent and payroll; shows “—” with no recorded cost in this period.` This lets you compare how quickly each operator's accounts earn back their recorded cost.

Q: Why does "Most profitable teams" say "No team sales in this period"?
A: Team profit rolls up from each order's selling account to that account's owner and the owner's subgroup. Follow the prompt (`Group your staff under Team and set owners under Accounts first`) so orders roll up to each team, while unowned handles appear under "Accounts without an owner".

Q: How is staff payroll included on the Profit Overview page?
A: Star Captain syncs with your payroll sheet (`Base pay and allowances are spread by day; commission, bonuses and deductions match the payroll sheet`). When viewing "This month", payroll is included as `Staff payroll (est. to date)`, whereas the per-account breakdown under "See profit or loss by account" deducts account-level expenses only and excludes payroll.

## How to View Star Captain Performance Rankings Across Products, Shops, and Staff
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/view-product-shop-and-staff-rankings?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

In 4 steps, you can view Star Captain performance rankings: open "Home" (`/app/home`) and pick a date range at the top, switch between "Products", "Shops", "Accounts", "Employees", and "Teams" inside the "Performance rankings" card to see the top 5, click "Full ranking" at the top right, and compare complete leaderboards for products, shops, staff, and groups.

Q: How are Star Captain performance rankings sorted, and how are refunds handled?
A: Star Captain performance rankings use the exact same math as Home and the Orders workspace: leaderboards sort from highest to lowest GMV for your selected date window, while header KPIs also show "Effective GMV" and "Refunds removed" so you can compare gross and net output.

Q: Can I link a product to a partner brand directly from "Products by sales"?
A: Yes. In the "Products by sales" full ranking view, any unlinked item shows "No partner brand yet" alongside a "Link brand / settlement" button. Saving a product settlement rule applies that partner brand and off-platform commission rate to past and future orders for that product ID.

Q: How do operator or subgroup changes affect historical staff and group rankings?
A: Rankings follow each account's current operator and that operator's current department and subgroup. When an account is reassigned to a new operator, historical order totals in the leaderboard move with the account's current owner.

Q: Why does the leaderboard say "No orders this day" or "Ranked after first sale"?
A: If no orders have been placed during the selected date window or newly connected accounts show "Orders still syncing", the card displays "No orders this day" or "Ranked after first sale". Switch the top date filter to "7 days" or "This month" to view cumulative rankings.

## Star Captain Account Group Settings: Groups, Types & Viral Line
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/tutorials/configure-account-groups-categories-and-viral-threshold?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

Star Captain account group settings take 4 steps: open "Accounts → Settings" (`/app/accounts/settings`), choose default sort and card display rules under "Display", add team groups and custom account types under "Groups and types", and set your view cutoff under "Viral line" while reviewing "Data refresh" before clicking "Save settings".

Q: Why does deleting a group say "{n} accounts are still in this group. Change them in Edit first"?
A: To prevent active filters from breaking, Star Captain blocks deleting a group while accounts are still assigned to it. Reassign those accounts to another group in "Edit" on the Accounts page until the badge reads `0 accounts`, then click "Delete this group".

Q: Which pages update when I change the "Viral line" view threshold?
A: The "Viral line" applies to the whole team for videos with product links (including removed links). Once you click "Save settings", the top-videos podium on Accounts, "Accounts → Analytics", and every single-account detail page immediately recalculate viral counts and viral rates using the new threshold.

Q: If I uncheck "Product link" or "Group" under "Show on cards", does it delete any account data?
A: No. As the card notes, "Only changes how the Accounts page looks. Account data stays the same" and "Turning off only hides it; data stays. Cards always list the latest 6 videos with product links." You can re-enable any field at any time.

Q: Will clicking "Reset to default" erase the custom groups and types I created?
A: No. The button tooltip states "Reset display and viral line to recommended settings. Groups and types stay", so your custom groups and account types remain intact while display preferences and the 10K viral line reset.

## Star Captain Privacy Policy & Data Protection (2026)
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/privacy?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

The Star Captain privacy policy protects your data in 4 ways: we use it only to provide the service and never sell, rent, or advertise with it; each organization's data is isolated; TikTok accounts connect through official authorization, so we never see passwords; and tokens and stored passwords are encrypted. You can view, export, or delete your data at any time.

Q: Under the Star Captain privacy policy, do we need to provide TikTok login passwords?
A: No. Under the Star Captain privacy policy, TikTok accounts connect through official QR or OAuth authorization, and Star Captain never asks for your TikTok login password. You can revoke access at any time in Star Captain or under TikTok Settings and privacy → Security → Apps and services.

Q: How does the Star Captain privacy policy isolate business data between agencies and roles?
A: Under the Star Captain privacy policy, all workspace data is strictly isolated by organization. Within an organization, three-tier role permissions (Owner, Department Lead, Staff) and group scopes control visibility so company profit, account costs, and shared overhead stay restricted to the owner by default.

Q: How does the Star Captain privacy policy protect optional credentials in Account Inventory?
A: Under the Star Captain privacy policy, account passwords and 2FA secrets voluntarily entered into Account Inventory are encrypted at rest, restricted to the requester, business staff, and organization owner, and logged with user and timestamp on every single view.

Q: What does the Star Captain privacy policy say about video files uploaded to the Creator Toolbox?
A: Under the Star Captain privacy policy, original audio or video files uploaded to the Creator Toolbox are deleted immediately after transcription and teardown processing; only the resulting transcript, translation, and frame breakdown are retained.

Q: Does the Star Captain Sync Assistant Chrome extension read browsing history?
A: No. Under the Star Captain privacy policy, the extension acts only when you manually enter a 6-digit pairing code and click Sync Showcase data for the active TikTok channel account, never reading browsing history or unrelated websites, in full compliance with Chrome Web Store Limited Use rules.

Q: How can an organization export data or request deletion under the Star Captain privacy policy?
A: Under the Star Captain privacy policy, you can export orders and settlement statements directly to Excel from their workspace pages, or contact support / email us for full data export, correction, or organization closure. We respond within 15 business days and delete or anonymize closed organization data within 30 business days.

## Star Captain Terms of Service & Platform Rules (2026)
URL: https://xingduizhang.com/en/terms?utm_source=ai&utm_medium=llms_full

These Star Captain terms of service cover 6 main points: using the service means you accept these terms and the Privacy Policy; your organization owns its data; figures are for reference, with TikTok and partner settlements as the final record; you must follow the law and platform rules; Star Captain is not an official TikTok product; and the Free plan is free, with paid plans as listed on the pricing page.

Q: Under the Star Captain terms of service, who owns the accounts, orders, and cost data?
A: Under the Star Captain terms of service, all data entered, uploaded, or authorized by your organization — along with the reports, settlement statements, and daily summaries generated from it — belongs to your organization and can be exported at any time.

Q: Are Star Captain's order, commission, and profit figures final legal settlement amounts?
A: Under the Star Captain terms of service, figures in Star Captain are synced from platform APIs and calculated from your configured rules for operational management and reconciliation reference; final settlement amounts always follow official TikTok statements and actual partner payments.

Q: How do reporting time zones work for US orders and partner statements?
A: Under the Star Captain terms of service, US orders and daily profit use fixed GMT-8 (with day cutoff at 16:00 Beijing time to match the TikTok mobile app), while Business Center settlement statements let you choose between merchant time (US Pacific Time) and system time (GMT-8).

Q: Will we lose historical data if we change plans or reach a usage allowance?
A: No. Under the Star Captain terms of service, all connected accounts, historical orders, partner rules, attendance records, and cost ledgers remain intact. Reaching a manual refresh or video teardown allowance only pauses new usage until renewal or upgrade.

Q: What actions are prohibited under the Star Captain terms of service?
A: Under the Star Captain terms of service, users must follow applicable laws and TikTok platform rules, and must not access another organization's data without authorization, reverse engineer, scrape, bulk-crawl, or resell Star Captain accounts or services.

Q: How can we export our data before closing an organization account?
A: Under the Star Captain terms of service, you can export order details and settlement statements to Excel directly from their workspace pages or contact support for assistance before closure. After confirmed organization closure, data is deleted within 30 business days under our Privacy Policy.